N30 Supervisory Controller User's Manual 6892010

N30 Supervisory Controller User’s Manual 1
Table of Contents
N30 Supervisory Controller

User’s Manual
Chapter 1 Using this Manual ............................................................. 1-1

Introduction.................................................................................................. 1-1
Key Concepts............................................................................................... 1-2

Manual Organization .................................................................................................. 1-2
Manual Conventions .................................................................................................. 1-2
Chapter Organization ................................................................................................. 1-3
Related Publications .................................................................................................. 1-4
Questions or Comments about this Manual ............................................................... 1-4
Chapter 2 Introduction to the N30 Supervisory Controller ............. 2-1
Introduction.................................................................................................. 2-1
Key Concepts............................................................................................... 2-2

N30 Supervisory Controller ........................................................................................ 2-2
N30 Capabilities ......................................................................................................... 2-2
BAS Components....................................................................................................... 2-2
Supported Application Specific Controllers (ASCs) ................................................... 2-3
Interfaces to the N30.................................................................................................. 2-4
M-Series Workstation ................................................................................................. 2-4
M-Tool ........................................................................................................................ 2-5
VT100 Terminal.......................................................................................................... 2-5
VT100 Terminal Emulator .......................................................................................... 2-6
Local Display Terminal (LDT)..................................................................................... 2-6
Printer......................................................................................................................... 2-6
N2 Bus ....................................................................................................................... 2-6
Ethernet Bus .............................................................................................................. 2-6
BACnet ....................................................................................................................... 2-6
10BaseT, Twisted Pair Cable..................................................................................... 2-6
Chapter 3 Getting Started .................................................................. 3-1
Introduction.................................................................................................. 3-1
Key Concepts............................................................................................... 3-3

N30 Task Overview .................................................................................................... 3-3
Objects ....................................................................................................................... 3-4
© Johnson Controls, Inc. www.johnsoncontrols.com

2 N30 Supervisory Controller User’s Manual
Object Names ............................................................................................................ 3-4

Containers .................................................................................................................. 3-4
Groups ....................................................................................................................... 3-4
Flash Memory............................................................................................................. 3-4
Warm Start ................................................................................................................. 3-5
Site Manager .............................................................................................................. 3-5
Rebind Site................................................................................................................. 3-5
Containers and Objects.............................................................................................. 3-6
N30 Screen Layout on VT100 Terminal or VT100 Terminal Emulator....................... 3-8
Browsing .................................................................................................................... 3-9
Functions Available in the VT100............................................................................. 3-10
Procedure Overview .................................................................................. 3-12
Detailed Procedures .................................................................................. 3-14

Logging On to an N30 .............................................................................................. 3-14
Checking the Firmware Version Level of an N30 ..................................................... 3-15
Setting the Date and Time ....................................................................................... 3-17
Editing the Attributes of an N30 ............................................................................... 3-18
Browsing an N30 Database with a VT100................................................................ 3-20
Adding Objects with a VT100 ................................................................................... 3-22
Editing Objects with a VT100 ................................................................................... 3-23
Commanding Objects............................................................................................... 3-24
Displaying a Summary ............................................................................................. 3-25
Printing a Summary.................................................................................................. 3-27
Changing an IP Address .......................................................................................... 3-28
Rebinding a Site....................................................................................................... 3-30
Changing Device Names.......................................................................................... 3-30
Archiving the Current Database ............................................................................... 3-30
Chapter 4 Working with Operator Objects ....................................... 4-1
Introduction.................................................................................................. 4-1
Key Concepts............................................................................................... 4-2

Operator Object.......................................................................................................... 4-2
Administrator .............................................................................................................. 4-2
Site Manager Device .................................................................................................. 4-2
Copy Holder Device ................................................................................................... 4-2
Global Objects............................................................................................................ 4-3
Redundant Objects .................................................................................................... 4-3
User Access Feature.................................................................................................. 4-3
Guidelines for Defining User Access.......................................................................... 4-5
Attributes .................................................................................................................... 4-8
Operator Object Example......................................................................................... 4-10

Adding an Operator Object ...................................................................................... 4-13
Table of Contents 3
Editing an Operator Object....................................................................................... 4-15

Commanding an Operator Object ............................................................................ 4-15
Changing Any Operator Password........................................................................... 4-16
Changing the ADMIN Password............................................................................... 4-16
Deleting an Operator Object .................................................................................... 4-17
Chapter 5 Working with VT100 Objects............................................ 5-1
Introduction.................................................................................................. 5-1
Key Concepts............................................................................................... 5-2

VT100 Object ............................................................................................................. 5-2
Attributes .................................................................................................................... 5-2
Procedure Overview .................................................................................... 5-5
Detailed Procedures .................................................................................... 5-6

Editing a VT100 Object .............................................................................................. 5-6
Chapter 6 Working with Group Objects............................................ 6-1
Introduction.................................................................................................. 6-1
Key Concepts............................................................................................... 6-2

Group Object .............................................................................................................. 6-2
Site Group .................................................................................................................. 6-2
User Group................................................................................................................. 6-3
Attributes .................................................................................................................... 6-4

Adding a Group Object............................................................................................... 6-6
Editing a Group Object ............................................................................................... 6-8
Adding Object References to a Group Object ............................................................ 6-9
Deleting Object References from a Group Object...................................................... 6-9
Deleting a Group Object........................................................................................... 6-10
Creating a Site Group .............................................................................................. 6-11
Creating a User Group ............................................................................................. 6-12
Chapter 7 Working with Schedule Objects ...................................... 7-1
Introduction.................................................................................................. 7-1
Key Concepts............................................................................................... 7-2

Schedule Object......................................................................................................... 7-2
Attributes .................................................................................................................... 7-2
Dates .......................................................................................................................... 7-4
Wildcard Date Fields .................................................................................................. 7-4
Time Changes ............................................................................................................ 7-6


Creating a New Schedule .......................................................................................... 7-9
Editing Schedule Objects ......................................................................................... 7-16
Commanding Schedule Objects............................................................................... 7-23
Deleting Schedule Objects ....................................................................................... 7-23
Chapter 8 Working with Calendar Objects ....................................... 8-1
Introduction.................................................................................................. 8-1
Key Concepts............................................................................................... 8-2

Calendar Object ......................................................................................................... 8-2
Attributes .................................................................................................................... 8-2
Wildcard Date Fields .................................................................................................. 8-3

Adding a Calendar Object .......................................................................................... 8-7
Editing a Calendar Object .......................................................................................... 8-9
Adding Date List Entries to a Calendar Object........................................................... 8-9
Deleting Date List Entries from a Calendar Object................................................... 8-10
Commanding a Calendar Object .............................................................................. 8-11
Deleting a Calendar Object ...................................................................................... 8-11
Chapter 9 Working with Optimal Start Objects................................ 9-1
Introduction.................................................................................................. 9-1
Key Concepts............................................................................................... 9-2

Optimal Start Object ................................................................................................... 9-2
Optimal Start Equation ............................................................................................... 9-2
Optimal Start Example ............................................................................................... 9-3
Optimal Stop .............................................................................................................. 9-3
Adaptation .................................................................................................................. 9-4
Attributes .................................................................................................................... 9-4

Adding an Optimal Start Object................................................................................ 9-10
Editing an Optimal Start Object ................................................................................ 9-13
Commanding an Optimal Start Object...................................................................... 9-13
Deleting an Optimal Start Object.............................................................................. 9-14
Chapter 10 Working with Temporary Occupancy Objects.............. 10-1
Table of Contents 5
Introduction................................................................................................ 10-1
Key Concepts............................................................................................. 10-2

Temporary Occupancy Object Operation................................................................. 10-2
Attributes .................................................................................................................. 10-2

Adding a Temporary Occupancy Object .................................................................. 10-5
Editing a Temporary Occupancy Object................................................................... 10-6
Commanding a Temporary Occupancy Object ........................................................ 10-6
Deleting a Temporary Occupancy Object ................................................................ 10-6
Chapter 11 Working with Printer Objects......................................... 11-1
Introduction................................................................................................ 11-1
Key Concepts............................................................................................. 11-2

Printer Object ........................................................................................................... 11-2
Attributes .................................................................................................................. 11-2

Adding a Printer Object ............................................................................................ 11-7
Editing a Printer Object .......................................................................................... 11-10
Commanding a Printer Object ................................................................................ 11-10
Deleting a Printer Object ........................................................................................ 11-11
Chapter 12 Working with Modem Configuration Objects ............... 12-1
Introduction................................................................................................ 12-1
Key Concepts............................................................................................. 12-2

Modem Configuration Object.................................................................................... 12-2
Attributes .................................................................................................................. 12-2

Adding a Modem Configuration Object .................................................................... 12-5
Editing a Modem Configuration Object..................................................................... 12-7
Deleting a Modem Configuration Object .................................................................. 12-7
Chapter 13 Working with Global Data Sharing Objects .................. 13-1
Introduction................................................................................................ 13-1
Key Concepts............................................................................................. 13-2

Global Data Sharing Object ..................................................................................... 13-2
Attributes .................................................................................................................. 13-2

Adding a Global Data Sharing Object ...................................................................... 13-4
Editing a Global Data Sharing Object ...................................................................... 13-7
Adding Slaves to the Slaves List .............................................................................. 13-7
Deleting Slaves from the Slaves List........................................................................ 13-8
Commanding a Global Data Sharing Object ............................................................ 13-8
Deleting a Global Data Sharing Object .................................................................... 13-9
Chapter 14 Working with Interlock Objects ..................................... 14-1
Introduction................................................................................................ 14-1
Key Concepts............................................................................................. 14-2

Interlock Object ........................................................................................................ 14-2
Attributes .................................................................................................................. 14-2
Example ................................................................................................................... 14-4

Adding an Interlock Object ....................................................................................... 14-9
Editing an Interlock Object ..................................................................................... 14-14
Adding Sources to an Interlock Object................................................................... 14-14
Deleting Sources from an Interlock Object............................................................. 14-15
Adding Action Table Entries to an Interlock Object................................................ 14-15
Deleting Action Table Entries from an Interlock Object.......................................... 14-16
Commanding an Interlock Object ........................................................................... 14-17
Deleting an Interlock Object ................................................................................... 14-17
Chapter 15 Working with Signal Select Objects .............................. 15-1
Introduction................................................................................................ 15-1
Key Concepts............................................................................................. 15-2

Signal Select ............................................................................................................ 15-2
Analog Signal Select ................................................................................................ 15-2
Binary Signal Select ................................................................................................. 15-2
Attributes .................................................................................................................. 15-3

Adding a Signal Select Object.................................................................................. 15-6
Table of Contents 7
Editing a Signal Select Object.................................................................................. 15-8

Adding Input Entries to a Signal Select Object ........................................................ 15-9
Deleting Input Entries from a Signal Select Object ................................................ 15-10
Commanding a Signal Select Object...................................................................... 15-10
Deleting a Signal Select Object.............................................................................. 15-11
Chapter 17 Working with Multiple Command Objects .................... 17-1
Introduction................................................................................................ 17-1
Key Concepts............................................................................................. 17-2

Multiple Command Object ........................................................................................ 17-2
Attributes .................................................................................................................. 17-2

Adding a Multiple Command Object......................................................................... 17-5
Editing a Multiple Command Object ......................................................................... 17-8
Adding Action Table Entries to a Multiple Command Object.................................... 17-8
Deleting Action Table Entries from a Multiple Command Object ............................. 17-9
Commanding a Multiple Command Object............................................................. 17-10
Deleting a Multiple Command Object..................................................................... 17-11
Chapter 18 Working with Data Broadcast Objects .......................... 18-1
Introduction................................................................................................ 18-1
Key Concepts............................................................................................. 18-2

Data Broadcast Object ............................................................................................. 18-2
Unconfirmed COV Notification ................................................................................. 18-2
Attributes .................................................................................................................. 18-2

Adding a Data Broadcast Object .............................................................................. 18-4
Editing a Data Broadcast Object .............................................................................. 18-5
Commanding a Data Broadcast Object.................................................................... 18-5
Deleting a Data Broadcast Object ............................................................................ 18-5
Working with Demand Limiting/Load Rolling (DLLR)
Chapter 19
Objects 19-1
Introduction................................................................................................ 19-1
Key Concepts............................................................................................. 19-2

Demand Limiting/Load Rolling Controller Object ..................................................... 19-2
Shedding .................................................................................................................. 19-2
Releasing ................................................................................................................. 19-2

Demand Limiting ...................................................................................................... 19-3
Interaction with Other Objects .................................................................................. 19-4
Attributes .................................................................................................................. 19-6
Detailed Procedures ................................................................................ 19-10

Adding a DLLR Object ........................................................................................... 19-10
Editing a DLLR Object............................................................................................ 19-13
Commanding a DLLR Object ................................................................................. 19-14
Deleting a DLLR Object ......................................................................................... 19-14
Chapter 20 Working with Load Objects............................................ 20-1
Introduction................................................................................................ 20-1
Key Concepts............................................................................................. 20-2

Load Object.............................................................................................................. 20-2
Shedding .................................................................................................................. 20-2
Releasing ................................................................................................................. 20-2
Attributes .................................................................................................................. 20-2

Adding a Load Object............................................................................................... 20-7
Editing a Load Object............................................................................................. 20-10
Commanding a Load Object................................................................................... 20-11
Deleting a Load Object........................................................................................... 20-11
Chapter 21 Working with Pulse Meter Objects ................................ 21-1
Introduction................................................................................................ 21-1
Key Concepts............................................................................................. 21-2

Pulse Meter Object................................................................................................... 21-2
Attributes .................................................................................................................. 21-2

Adding a Pulse Meter Object ................................................................................... 21-5
Editing a Pulse Meter Object.................................................................................... 21-7
Commanding a Pulse Meter Object ......................................................................... 21-7
Deleting a Pulse Meter Object ................................................................................. 21-8
Chapter 22 Working with Utility Profile Objects .............................. 22-1
Introduction................................................................................................ 22-1
Table of Contents 9
Key Concepts............................................................................................. 22-2

Utility Profile Object .................................................................................................. 22-2
Attributes .................................................................................................................. 22-2

Adding a Utility Profile Object................................................................................... 22-5
Editing a Utility Profile Object ................................................................................... 22-7
Commanding a Utility Profile Object......................................................................... 22-7
Deleting a Utility Profile Object................................................................................. 22-8
Chapter 23 Working with Analog Totalization Objects ................... 23-1
Introduction................................................................................................ 23-1
Key Concepts............................................................................................. 23-2

Analog Totalization Object ....................................................................................... 23-2
Analog Totalization Object Reset............................................................................. 23-3
Attributes .................................................................................................................. 23-3

Adding an Analog Totalization Object ...................................................................... 23-7
Editing an Analog Totalization Object ...................................................................... 23-9
Commanding an Analog Totalization Object ............................................................ 23-9
Deleting an Analog Totalization Object .................................................................. 23-10
Chapter 24 Working with Event Totalization Objects...................... 24-1
Introduction................................................................................................ 24-1
Key Concepts............................................................................................. 24-2

Event Totalization Object ......................................................................................... 24-2
Event Totalization Object Reset ............................................................................... 24-3
Attributes .................................................................................................................. 24-3

Adding an Event Totalization Object ........................................................................ 24-7
Editing an Event Totalization Object ........................................................................ 24-9
Commanding an Event Totalization Object .............................................................. 24-9
Deleting an Event Totalization Object .................................................................... 24-10
Troubleshooting ...................................................................................... 24-11
Chapter 25 Working with Runtime Totalization Objects ................. 25-1

Introduction................................................................................................ 25-1
Key Concepts............................................................................................. 25-2

Runtime Totalization Object ..................................................................................... 25-2
Runtime Totalization Object Reset........................................................................... 25-3
Attributes .................................................................................................................. 25-3

Adding a Runtime Totalization Object ...................................................................... 25-7
Editing a Runtime Totalization Object ...................................................................... 25-9
Commanding a Runtime Totalization Object............................................................ 25-9
Deleting a Runtime Totalization Object .................................................................. 25-10
Chapter 26 Working with Analog Alarm Objects ............................. 26-1
Introduction................................................................................................ 26-1
Key Concepts............................................................................................. 26-2

Analog Alarm Object ................................................................................................ 26-2
States ....................................................................................................................... 26-2
SNR.......................................................................................................................... 26-2
Attributes .................................................................................................................. 26-3

Adding an Analog Alarm Object ............................................................................... 26-7
Editing an Analog Alarm Object ............................................................................. 26-10
Commanding an Analog Alarm Object ................................................................... 26-11
Deleting an Analog Alarm Object ........................................................................... 26-11
Chapter 27 Working with Multistate Alarm Objects ........................ 27-1
Introduction................................................................................................ 27-1
Key Concepts............................................................................................. 27-2

Multistate Alarm Object ............................................................................................ 27-2
States ....................................................................................................................... 27-2
SNR.......................................................................................................................... 27-2
Attributes .................................................................................................................. 27-2

Adding a Multistate Alarm Object ............................................................................. 27-6
Editing a Multistate Alarm Object ............................................................................. 27-9
Commanding a Multistate Alarm Object................................................................... 27-9
Table of Contents 11
Deleting a Multistate Alarm Object ......................................................................... 27-10

Chapter 28 Working with Trend Log Objects ................................... 28-1
Introduction................................................................................................ 28-1
Key Concepts............................................................................................. 28-2

Trend Log Object ..................................................................................................... 28-2
Attributes .................................................................................................................. 28-2

Adding a Trend Log Object ...................................................................................... 28-5
Editing a Trend Log Object ...................................................................................... 28-7
Commanding a Trend Log Object ............................................................................ 28-7
Deleting a Trend Log Object .................................................................................... 28-8
Chapter 29 Working with Notification Class Objects ...................... 29-1
Introduction................................................................................................ 29-1
Key Concepts............................................................................................. 29-3

Notification Class ..................................................................................................... 29-3
Destinations ............................................................................................................. 29-3
Attributes .................................................................................................................. 29-4

Adding a Notification Class Object in Project Builder............................................... 29-7
Editing a Notification Class Object in Project Builder............................................. 29-10
Editing a Notification Class Object Using a VT100 ................................................ 29-12
Commanding a Notification Class Object Using a VT100 ...................................... 29-13
Deleting a Notification Class Object Using a VT100 .............................................. 29-13
Chapter 30 Working with Remote Destination Objects................... 30-1
Introduction................................................................................................ 30-1
Key Concepts............................................................................................. 30-2

Remote Destination Object Operation...................................................................... 30-2
Attributes .................................................................................................................. 30-2

Adding a Remote Destination Object ....................................................................... 30-7
Editing a Remote Destination Object ..................................................................... 30-10
Deleting a Remote Destination Object ................................................................... 30-10

Chapter 31 Working with E-mail Objects.......................................... 31-1
Introduction................................................................................................ 31-1
Key Concepts............................................................................................. 31-2

E-mail Object Operation ........................................................................................... 31-2
E-mail Delivery Failure ............................................................................................. 31-3
SMTP Server Location ............................................................................................. 31-3
Attributes .................................................................................................................. 31-4
Example ................................................................................................................... 31-6

Adding an E-mail Object .......................................................................................... 31-9
Editing an E-mail Object......................................................................................... 31-12
Commanding an E-mail Object .............................................................................. 31-12
Deleting an E-mail Object ...................................................................................... 31-12
Chapter 32 Working with Pager Objects .......................................... 32-1
Introduction................................................................................................ 32-1
Key Concepts............................................................................................. 32-2

Pager Object Operation ........................................................................................... 32-2
Attributes .................................................................................................................. 32-3

Adding a Pager Object ............................................................................................. 32-6
Editing a Pager Object ............................................................................................. 32-9
Commanding a Pager Object ................................................................................... 32-9
Deleting a Pager Object ........................................................................................... 32-9
Troubleshooting ...................................................................................... 32-10
Troubleshooting Using Internal Attributes .............................................................. 32-10
Chapter 33 Working with BACnet™ Group Objects ........................ 33-1
Introduction................................................................................................ 33-1
Key Concepts............................................................................................. 33-2

BACnet Group Object vs Johnson Controls Proprietary Group Object .................... 33-2
Attributes .................................................................................................................. 33-2
Table of Contents 13
Adding a BACnet Group Object ............................................................................... 33-4

Editing a BACnet Group Object................................................................................ 33-4
Deleting a BACnet Group Object ............................................................................. 33-7
Chapter 34 Working with Event Enrollment Objects ....................... 34-1
Introduction................................................................................................ 34-1
Key Concepts............................................................................................. 34-2

Event Enrollment Object........................................................................................... 34-2
Attributes .................................................................................................................. 34-2
Adding an Event Enrollment Object ......................................................................... 34-5
Editing an Event Enrollment Object.......................................................................... 34-5
Commanding an Event Enrollment Object ............................................................... 34-8
Deleting an Event Enrollment Object ....................................................................... 34-9
Editing Event Parameters - Examples.................................................................... 34-10
Appendix A Building an Energy Management Application ................A-1
Introduction..................................................................................................A-1
Key Concepts...............................................................................................A-2
Object Interaction .......................................................................................................A-2
Attribute Involvement..................................................................................................A-4
Advanced Object Functions .......................................................................................A-5
Procedure Overview ....................................................................................A-6
Detailed Procedures ....................................................................................A-7

Building an Energy Management Application.............................................................A-7
Troubleshooting ..........................................................................................A-8
Appendix B Building a Message Router Application .........................B-1

Introduction..................................................................................................B-1
Key Concepts...............................................................................................B-3
Message Router Purpose ..........................................................................................B-3
Routing SNRs ............................................................................................................B-3
Filtering ......................................................................................................................B-4
Object Interaction .......................................................................................................B-5
Appendix C Building an Optimal Start Application ............................C-1
Introduction..................................................................................................C-1
Key Concepts...............................................................................................C-2
Object Interaction ...................................................................................................... C-2

Attribute Involvement................................................................................................. C-3
Procedure Overview ....................................................................................C-4
Detailed Procedures ....................................................................................C-5

Building an Optimal Start Application ........................................................................ C-5
Troubleshooting ..........................................................................................C-6
Appendix D Building an Interlock Application ....................................D-1

Introduction..................................................................................................D-1
Key Concepts...............................................................................................D-2
Object Interaction ...................................................................................................... D-2
Attribute Involvement................................................................................................. D-3
Example .................................................................................................................... D-4
Procedure Overview ....................................................................................D-7
Detailed Procedures ....................................................................................D-8

Building an Interlock Application ............................................................................... D-8
Appendix E Building a Signal Select Application............................... E-1
Introduction.................................................................................................. E-1
Key Concepts............................................................................................... E-2

Object Interaction .......................................................................................................E-2
Attribute Involvement..................................................................................................E-4
Procedure Overview .................................................................................... E-5
Detailed Procedures .................................................................................... E-6

Building a Signal Select Application...........................................................................E-6
N30 Supervisory Controller User’s Manual 1-1
Chapter 1
Using this Manual
Introduction
This manual is a learning and reference guide for the N30 Supervisory
Controller (N30). This manual contains an overview of the N30, basic
operation, and specific procedures for a number of objects and features
available to control your Building Automation System (BAS) using
the N30.
This chapter describes:
• organization of information in this manual
• where to find related information about the N30
• manual conventions
This manual is written with the assumption that the user is familiar
with the general concepts and terminology of Building Automation
Systems (BAS) and Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning
(HVAC).
Note: Unless otherwise indicated, the information in this manual
refers to both the N30 Supervisory Controller and the
N31 Supervisory Controller.
© November 01, 2001 Johnson Controls, Inc. www.johnsoncontrols.com

Code No. LIT-6892010 Software Release 5.0
1-2 N30 Supervisory Controller User’s Manual
Key Concepts
Manual Organization
The first three chapters of this manual contain introductory material
about the manual and the N30. This includes information on how to
perform generic tasks. Generic tasks are those that are performed the
same, though in practice they may differ in the details. For example,
the task of adding an object is generic to all objects; however, adding
an Optimal Start (OST) object requires that the object be added to a
specific container with specific attributes.
The remaining chapters each address a specific object. This manual
also contains several appendixes that provide details about how to
create some of the more complex objects and applications.
Manual Conventions
Throughout this manual the term N30 is used to stand for an
N30 Supervisory Controller and, unless otherwise noted, the
N31 Supervisory Controller. The term VT100 is used to stand for
either a VT100 Terminal or a VT100 Terminal Emulator running on a
Personal Computer (PC).
Unless otherwise indicated, all screen captures and procedures were
performed with a VT100 Terminal Emulator running on a PC and
connected to one of the serial ports on the N30. Where possible we
have shown some of the screens that would be seen if performing the
indicated tasks offline using Project Builder software to edit the N30
database. In these cases, Project Builder was installed as part of
M-Tool on the same PC where we were running the VT100 Terminal
Emulator.
Chapter Organization
Each chapter in the N30 Supervisory Controller User’s Manual can be
divided into the main sections identified in Table 1-1.
Table 1-1: Chapter Organization

Section Description
Introduction Briefly outlines the contents of the chapter and lists
any task instructions that are written in the chapter.
Key Concepts Describes concepts necessary to perform specific
tasks. The Key Concepts section of the object
chapters include descriptions of attributes necessary
to properly create the object.
Procedure Overview Describes the general steps for completing the tasks
described in the Detailed Procedures section. It
combines the steps of the Detailed Procedures
sections into a short paragraph without drawings or
explanatory notes. This section is for those familiar
with the tasks they are planning to perform. Procedure
Overview pages can be used to create a quick
reference guide to N30 tasks.
Detailed Procedures Describes in detail the steps needed to complete the
tasks described within the chapter.
Related Publications
Table 1-2 describes where to find various types of information about
the N30 Supervisory Controller.
Table 1-2: N30-Related Publications

Topic Publication Publication Number
Technical Information
How to Install an N30 N30 Supervisory Controller Installation LIT-6891100
Technical Bulletin
How to Network N30s N30 Supervisory Controller Networking LIT-6891300
Technical Bulletin
How to Add Controllers and N30 Supervisory Controller Point Mapping LIT-6891400
Map Points Technical Bulletin
How to Setup an N30 Site N30 Supervisory Controller Quick Start LIT-6891200
Using Project Builder Technical Bulletin
M-Tool
Project Builder Project Builder User’s Guide
Communications
How to Use Site Book and Site Book User’s Guide
Setup Ethernet
Communications with an
N30
How to Setup Direct Direct Connect and Dial-up on Windows 98 LIT-6893350
Connect and Dial-up Application Note
Connections with N30s on
Windows® 98
How to Setup Direct Direct Connect and Dial-up on Windows NT LIT-6893400
Windows NT®
How to Setup Direct Direct Connect and Dial-up on Windows 2000 LIT-6893450
Windows 2000
Objects
Reference to All Objects Object Dictionary
and their Attributes
Questions or Comments about this Manual

Please direct your questions about the technical content of this manual
to your authorized Johnson Controls representative.
Chapter 2
Introduction to the
Introduction
This chapter describes the basic functions and operation of an
N30 Supervisory Controller (N30). It also provides the foundation you
need to monitor and control your facility using the N30.
This chapter includes:
• N30 concepts
• descriptions and illustrations of the Building Automation System
(BAS) components
© June 28, 2006 Johnson Controls, Inc. www.johnsoncontrols.com

Key Concepts
The N30 monitors and controls HVAC equipment in your facility. It
provides powerful data gathering and energy management tools, such
as Totalization and Demand Limiting, which can improve the cost
efficiency of your facility. The N30 is optionally available with an
integral Local Display Terminal (LDT).
N30 Capabilities
You can complete the following BAS functions with the N30:
• schedule BAS actions
• set up calendars, including exception and holiday calendars
• monitor facility conditions
• detect and respond to alarms
• control equipment and automate routine functions
• collect trend and totalization data
• reduce energy consumption and costs
BAS Components
A typical BAS configuration consists of the components listed below
and illustrated in Figure 2-1 and Figure 2-2.
• Multiple N30 Supervisory Controllers (with or without optional
Local Display Terminal [LDT])
• VT100 Terminal/Terminal Emulator
• Ethernet Local Area Network (LAN)
• N2 Bus (field bus or controller bus)
• serial printer
• N2 controllers (Table 2-1)
N30 Supervisory Controller User's Manual 2-3
Supported Application Specific Controllers (ASCs)

The N30 supports all current N2 devices except the N2 Dialer. This
includes Metasys® (AS) and Facilitator™ (FA) models and support
for the Variable Air Volume Modular Assembly (VMA) 1400 Series
controller. Table 2-1 shows the firmware version of all currently
supported ASCs.
Note: Metasys Integrator® (MIG), Variable Air Volume (VAV),
Unitary (UNT), and Air Handling Unit (AHU) controllers
with older code revisions are not allowed on an N30 system.
They are forced offline when detected.
Table 2-1: Firmware Revision of Current ASCs*

Device/Controller Revision Comments
Type
DR-9100 1.x Room Controller
DR-9100 2.x Room Controller
DC-9100 1.x Plant Controller
DC-9100 2.x Plant Controller
DO-9100 1.x Digital Optimizer
DX-9100 1.x Digital Controller
DX-9100 2.x Digital Controller
TC-9100 1.x-3.x Temperature Controller
TEC1100 1.x N2 LCD Thermostat
TEC2100 1.x N2 LCD Thermostat
XT-9100 1.x Extension Module
XTM-101 1.x Extension Module
LDT A08 or later Local Display Terminal
LCP-xxx All Lab and Central Plant Controller
MIG 3.0 or later Metasys Integrator
UNT B03 or later Unitary Controller
VAV A03 or later Variable Air Volume Controller
AHU C03 or later Air Handling Unit Controller
PHX All Phoenix Interface Module
VMA1400 All VAV Modular Assembly
VND (Vendor Devices) All Metasys Compatible (by others)
including TEC1100
ILC** All Intelligent Lighting Controller
IFC-1010/2020 All Intelligent Fire Controller
* Some controllers are unique to a local market and may not be available on a
global basis.
** Information for ILCs is not valid for Microlite lighting controllers. For Microlite
panels, use the information for Vendor Devices instead (VND).
M-Series Workstation
or PC with VT100 Emulator
VT100
or
VAV VMA
N2
esc
Serial
Printer N30 with LDT
AHU
DX UNT
N30 BAS
Figure 2-1: BAS Components - N30 Example
Interfaces to the N30

There are several user interfaces to the N30 available. M-Series
Workstations are used for online browsing and editing of facility
conditions with full graphical displays, VT100 Terminals or Terminal
Emulators on PCs can be used to add, edit, and browse objects in text
mode. Project Builder software is used for offline creation,
management, and editing of N30 databases. The Local Display
Terminal (LDT) installed in the N30 is used for display of a selected
set of data from the facility, including alarms, and allows local onsite
adjustments to operating conditions.
M-Series Workstation
Johnson Controls M-Series Workstation product portfolio represents a
special packaging of software components.
The M3 Workstation software application suite includes monitoring,
commissioning, and analysis features. It works in combination with
N30 Series and existing Companion™/Facilitator Supervisory
Controllers to provide a complete facility management solution.
N30 Supervisory Controller User's Manual 2-5
The M5 Workstation provides extensions and enhancements to the

Metasys Operator Workstation (OWS) to enable existing Metasys N1
systems to be expanded with N30 controllers.
M-Tool
M-Tool contains the System Tools and the Configuration Tools. The
Project Builder component of System Tools includes the ability to:
• upgrade existing N30s to the latest firmware
• import Advanced Installation Management (AIM) Tools point lists
and room schedule information
• configure the complete N30 database
• upload and download Application Specific Controllers (ASCs) and
DXs from a file created by Configuration Tools
M-Tool includes the N30 Upgrade Utility, which allows you to
upgrade databases from the data format used at one release to the data
format used at the next release.
Ethernet M-Series Workstation
esc
N30 N30 with LDT
VT100
N2 N2
UNT DX VMA VMA DX UNT
network n30
Figure 2-2: Networked N30s Example
VT100 Terminal
A video terminal developed by DEC and still a standard interface.
A VT100 Terminal can be connected to a serial port on an N30 either
directly or via modem.
VT100 Terminal Emulator

A program that allows a computer to function like a VT100 Terminal.
The computer appears as a terminal to the N30 and accepts the same
escape sequences for functions such as cursor positioning and clearing
the screen.
Local Display Terminal (LDT)

A display device optionally installed in the N30 controller. The LDT
provides alarm notification and navigation and access to data in the
controller. It allows the display and modification of operating
conditions, such as temperature, heating and cooling setpoints, and fan
override.
For more information on the LDT, refer to the N30 Supervisory
Controller Installation Technical Bulletin (LIT-6891100).
Printer
Connects to an N30 via a serial port or modem. The N30 sends data,
such as alarm messages, summaries, or scheduled reports to a printer
file in one of three ways: automatically, by operator command, or by
scheduled command.
N2 Bus
The communication network that allows the application specific
controllers to communicate with the N30.
Ethernet Bus
The Local Area Network (LAN) protocol used to allow multiple N30
Supervisory Controllers to communicate peer-to-peer using BACnet®
messaging. It is a widely used LAN standard.
BACnet
The Building Automation Control Network (BACnet),
Standard 35-1995, designed by the American Society of Heating,
Refrigerating, and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) as a data
communications protocol to promote connectivity between multiple
vendors of control equipment.
10BaseT, Twisted Pair Cable

The Cable used to connect N30s in an Ethernet network. Specified by
the IEEE 10BaseT standard, Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) and
Shielded Twisted Pair (STP) are common and economical media to
install in the network.
Chapter 3
Getting Started
Introduction
A VT100 can be used to add and edit objects and to browse an N30
database. Project Builder software provides an easier way to create,
define, and edit N30 databases offline. This chapter explains the
VT100 interface to the N30 and describes tasks performed in using an
N30. Notes on using Project Builder to perform these tasks are
included where appropriate. This chapter describes how to:
• log on to an N30
• check the firmware version level of an N30
• set the date and time
• edit the attributes of an N30
• browse an N30 database with a VT100
• add objects with a VT100
• edit objects with a VT100
• command objects
• display a summary
• print a summary
• change an IP address
• rebind a site
• change device names
• archive the current database

Note: Tasks such as adding or commanding objects are described

generically. For details on specific objects, see the relevant
chapter in this manual or in the Object Dictionary. For
information about using Project Builder software, see the
Project Builder User’s Guide.
Key Concepts
N30 Task Overview
Figure 3-1 is a flowchart of tasks to get started with your N30 system
using the VT100 and, in the case of setting up the N30 site, Project
Builder software. Other documents are referenced where required.
For information about generating N30 databases using Project Builder,
refer to the N30 Supervisory Controller Quick Start Technical Bulletin
(LIT-6891200).
Note: We recommend generating databases using Project Builder
software. Project Builder supports copy, paste, and mass
copy and can save you a substantial amount of time.
Install the N30. Define Alarms and Define Global Data

See the N30 Supervisory Alarm Messages. Sharing Objects.
Controller Installation Technical See the chapters in this manual See Working with Global Data
Bulletin on Analog Alarm objects, Sharing Objects chapter
(LIT-6891100). Multistate Alarm objects, in this manual.
Notification Class objects,
Remote Destination objects,
E-mail objects, and
Pager objects. Build Signal Select
Set Up the N30 Site. Applications.
See the N30 Supervisory See Appendix E: Building a
Controller Quick Start Signal Select Application
Technical Bulletin Define Schedules. in this manual.
(LIT-6891200). See the chapters in this manual
on Schedule objects and
Calendar objects.
Define Groups.
Print Controller See Working with Group
Configurations. Define Trend Logs. Objects chapter in this manual.
See the N30 Supervisory See the Working with Trend
Controller Point Mapping Log Objects chapter
Technical Bulletin in this manual.
(LIT-6891400).
Edit and add additional
Build Energy Management objects as required.
Applications. See the appropriate chapter in
See Appendix A: Building an this manual or in the
Add Controllers to your Energy Management Object Dictionary.
Database and Map the Points Application in this manual.
to N30 Point Objects.
See the N30 Supervisory
Controller Point Mapping Build Optimal Start
Technical Bulletin Applications.
(LIT-6891400) and the See Appendix C: Building an
Object Dictionary. Optimal Start Application
in this manual.
N30 Overview.vsd
Figure 3-1: Getting Started with an N30

Objects
Configurable and reusable features of the N30 that contain both data
and a means to act on that data to achieve desired results. They add
flexibility to the programming of the N30 by allowing you to add only
the objects you need to your database. They are the building blocks of
the N30 database. Individual objects are described throughout the N30
literature. The Object Dictionary provides a reference to all the current
N30 objects.
Object Names
Providing an Object Name is optional, but if it is defined, it must be
unique throughout the site. If it is not defined, the full reference
becomes the identifier. For example, Building1Floor2. The following
characters are not allowed: @ . ? * $ # : ‘ [ or ].
Containers
The basic organization of the N30 database is arranged through
containers. All objects are added to containers. The type of container
selected determines the type of objects that can be added to that part of
the database. See Table 3-1 for a list of which objects can be added to
each container.
A container object can hold a maximum of 75 objects. However, since
there are hidden objects in N30s, N30s are limited to 50 child objects.
To put more than 50 objects in an N30, use Container objects to
organize your objects. Use a maximum of 50 Container objects in
one N30.
Groups
A way to personalize the organization of a N30 database. Groups
contain references to objects. This allows you access to the object from
both the designated group and from the container where it was added.
They are a powerful organizational tool when working with large
databases. For more information, see the Working with Group Objects
(LIT-6892060) chapter in this document.
Flash Memory
A type of nonvolatile memory within the N30 device. The N30’s Flash
memory stores configuration data, startup code, boot code, main code,
and the archive database within this memory.
Warm Start
Cycling the N30 power off and then on again. In the N30, it is
considered a warm start when power is cycled with the battery still
installed. Warm starts are used as a reset for certain functions. For
example, after changing the IP address in an N30, it is necessary to
warm start the device to allow the updates to take effect.
Site Manager
The N30 within a site that contains the master Site object. The master
Site object is responsible for the synchronization of global objects,
time synchronization, and device status monitoring within the site.
There can only be one Site Manager per site.
Rebind Site
Rebind Site (formerly Rebind References) is a fail-safe command used
to correct situations where references to offbox objects become
unreliable. The Rebind Site command typically is used when you have
made major changes to a database and are re-downloading objects to
N30s. If all N30s in the database are connected during the download,
some N30s can bind to objects that have been moved to other N30s.
The Rebind Site command is not required when the IP address of an
N30 changes because other N30s in the site automatically relocate it
within a few minutes. See Rebinding a Site in the Detailed Procedures
section.
The following describes a sample sequence of events requiring the
Rebind Site command:
1. Outdoor Air (an N2 Analog Input object on N30-B) is used in an
Interlock object in N30-A.
2. N30-A temporarily loses its network connection to N30-B.
3. User moves Outdoor Air from N30-B to N30-C.
4. User reestablishes the network connection to N30-A.
5. User must Rebind Site in order for the Interlock object in N30-A
to reestablish its reference to Outdoor Air.
Containers and Objects

You can add objects as they are needed for your facility. The objects
available to add depend on the container selected. Table 3-1 lists the
objects that can be added to each container.
Table 3-1: Containers/Objects

When This Container is Selected These Objects Can Be Added:
Site Name - Top level name on the Analog Alarm*
VT100 screen Multistate Alarm*
Note: All the N30s on this site are Analog Totalization*
listed in this container; it is
usually given a localized Runtime Totalization*
name during set up of the Event Totalization*
N30 site. Trend Log*
Container
Data Broadcast*
N30 - Name determined by user All objects that can be added from the site name
Internals Site
Report Server
Also, all objects that can be added from the site name
Comm All objects that can be added from the site name
Applications All objects that can be added from the site name
Energy Optimal Start* Demand Limit and Load Rolling
Heavy Equip Contr (DLLR*)
Pulse Meter* Utility Profile*
Load* Also, all objects that can be added
from the site name
Group Group*
N2 Controller
A Controller object within an N2 N2 Analog Input (N2 AI) N2 Multistate Output (N2 MSO)
container N2 Binary Input (N2BI) N2 Pulse Counter (N2 PC)
N2 Analog Output (N2 AO) Also, all objects that can be added
N2 Binary Output (N2 BO) from the site name
N2 Multistate Input (N2 MSI)
Notifications Notification*
Continued on next page . . .
* Detailed procedures for working with these objects are in this manual. For all other objects, refer to the
Object Dictionary for further information.
When This Container is Selected These Objects Can Be Added:

(Cont.)
Operator Devices Display* (Project Builder is required to add this object.)
E-mail*
Modem Config*
LAN Remote Dest
Pager*
Printer*
Remote Destination*
VT100* (Project Builder is required to add this object.)
Operators Operator*
Programming Multiple Command Multistate Value (MV)
Interlock* Analog Value (AV)
Global Data* Binary Value (BV)
Signal Select* Also, all objects that can be added
from the site name
Schedule Schedule*
Calendar*
Temporary Occupancy*
Summaries Summary
* Detailed procedures for working with these objects are in this manual. For all other objects, refer to the
Object Dictionary for further information.
N30 Screen Layout on VT100 Terminal or VT100 Terminal Emulator

Figure 3-2 shows a typical N30 screen on a VT100 Terminal. The
screen shown is the main screen for the site called Brown Deer after
someone has logged on to the N30 device named Dean with a user
name of ADMIN. Table 3-2 describes areas 1 through 4 in Figure 3-2.
See Browsing an N30 Database with a VT100 in this chapter for basic
screens available in the N30. See the specific object chapter in this
document also.
Figure 3-2: N30 Screen Layout

Table 3-2: N30 Screen Layout Description

Number Display Area Name Purpose and Description
1 Alarm Information Used to view Status Notification Reports (SNRs). Occupies Lines 1
and 2 at the top of the screen. Alarm information displayed in this
example includes (from left to right):
Note: • alarm priority (IMP). Possible values are SER (Serious), CRIT
Refer to Appendix B: (Critical), IMP (Important), STAT (Status).
Building a Message • event state being reported (LW). Possible values are HA (High
Router Application Alarm), LA (Low Alarm), HW (High Warning), LW (Low Warning),
(LIT-6892320) for and Nor (Normal).
more information about
SNRs. • object name in alarm (Principal Office)
• value of attribute (65.0 deg F). Assumed attribute is Present
Value.
• units of attribute (optional)
• local date (28 Jan 2000)
• local time (09:16:39)
• message text (line 2)
2 Site/User Information Used to view site/user information. Occupies Line 3 at the top of the
screen. Site/user information displayed in this example includes (from
left to right):
• device object name (Dean)
• name of logged-in user (ADMIN)
• date and time (Fri 28 Jan 2000 9:18 CST)
3 User Workspace Used to view site information and to complete most operations.
Occupies Lines 4 through 22 in the middle of the screen. In this space,
the operator displays and interacts with objects, calls up summaries,
and uses the available features to program the site.
In this example, Brown Deer is the name of the site, Overview Grp is
the name of the Site Group, and South Building and Dean are names
the operator gave to the two N30s on this site.
4 User Assistance Used to view function key options, help messages, and error
messages. Occupies Lines 23 and 24 at the bottom of the screen.
Browsing
Browsing with a VT100 is moving within and through the N30
database to view, edit, and command objects. Browsing with Project
Builder software is performed offline and therefore commands are not
available. For information on browsing an N30 database using an
M-Series Workstation, see M-Explorer User’s Guide.
The User Assistance Line at the bottom of each screen (Number 4 in
Figure 3-2) displays the active keys and functions. The active keys and
the functions associated with each key change according to where you
are in the database. It also provides instructions for filling in attribute
fields. Some basic navigational keys are available but not described,
such as the arrow keys for moving the cursor.
Functions Available in the VT100

The same keys are used in an N30 with a VT100 Terminal or a
VT100 Terminal Emulator. The functions of some of the keys are
context-sensitive. For example, the F3 key can add, edit, or save
changes to an object, depending on when it is used. The available keys
and their functions at that time appear on the User Assistance Line at
the bottom of the screen. See Table 3-3 for descriptions of the keys.
Table 3-3: Functions Available in N30 from VT100

Function Key Function Context Purpose
] or [ Page There is more data than can Displays all available screens.
fit on one screen.
Arrow Keys Move cursor or Available on any screen Moves the cursor or highlight box to an
highlight fields where the cursor can move. object, attribute, or field.
Delete Delete An object is open or an Deletes the selected object.
empty container is open.
F1 Ack An alarm is displayed at the Acknowledges alarms that appear at the
top of the screen. top of the screen.
F2 Command An object is selected. Allows you to select an action on the
selected object.
Del (Delete) An attribute that can have Deletes an item from an attribute, such
Item items deleted from it is open. as an item from an Input List.
F3 Add A container or an object that Opens the Add Object screen. However,
can have items added to it is the function varies with the object or
selected. container that is highlighted when this
key is pressed.
Edit An editable object is open. Displays the objects attribute screen.
Save An editable object is open Saves changes to the memory database
and changes have been (RAM). The memory database is
made to it. archived in Flash memory once a day
after midnight.
Add Item An attribute that can have Adds a blank entry for an item to be
items added to it is open. added to an attribute, such as an item for
an Input List.
F4 Back An attribute that can have Displays the previous screen.
items added to or deleted
from it is open.
Cancel An object, container, or Cancels the current action and/or
attribute screen is open. displays the previous screen.
Q Quit N30 main screen displays. Logs the user off the N30.
Return (Enter) Execute An object has its command Carries out (executes) the displayed
line open and a command command.
selected.
Open An object, container, or Opens the selected (highlighted) object.
device is selected.
Select An add object screen is Opens the attribute screen to create a
open with an object new object of the highlighted type.
highlighted.
Spacebar Expand/ An object with a plus (+) or Expands a container, device, group, or
Collapse minus (–) next to it is object that has a plus (+) sign beside it;
highlighted. collapses a container that has a minus (-)
sign beside it.
Spacebar Cycle A field with multiple When available, allows you to cycle
(forward) and predefined options is through the available options for the
Backspace key selected, for example, selected attribute.
(backward) commanding an object.
Tab Confirm Delete An object has been deleted. Confirms the Delete operation.
Move to next An object is being edited. Moves the highlight box to highlight an
field attribute.
Procedure Overview
Table 3-4: Getting Started
To Do This Follow These Steps:
Log On to an N30 Start your VT100 Emulator or turn on your VT100. Press Enter when the
N30 name appears at the top of the screen. Type your Login ID and press
Enter. Type your password and press Enter.
Check the Firmware Version Using a VT100 Terminal or VT100 Terminal Emulator on a PC, browse to
Level of an N30 and highlight the N30 you want to check. Press Enter. The firmware
version level is on the right side under engineering values.
Set the Date and Time Use the arrow keys to highlight an N30. Press the F2 (Command) key.
Cycle through the list of commands until the Set Time or Set Date
command appears. Use the arrow keys or Tab key to highlight the Value
field. Edit the value as necessary. Press Enter.
Edit the Attributes of the N30 Use the arrow keys to highlight an N30. Press Enter. Press the F3 (Edit)
key. Move to the field that you want to edit. Edit the values. Press the
F3 (Save) key to save the changes or the F4 (Cancel) key to cancel the
changes.
Browse an N30 Database with Use the arrow keys to highlight an N30. Use the Spacebar to expand the
a VT100 list of containers. Select a container. Press the Spacebar to expand the
list of objects. Select an object. Press the Spacebar to expand the list of
additional objects and select an object. Press Enter to open the object.
Add Objects with a VT100 Browse to and highlight an N30. Press the Spacebar to expand the list of
object containers. Browse to and highlight a container or object. Press the
F3 (Add) key. Select the type of object to add and press Enter. Fill in the
fields. Press the F3 (Save) key.
Edit Objects with a VT100 Browse to and highlight an object. Press Enter to open the object. Press
the F3 (Edit) key. Edit as desired. Press the F3 (Save) key.
Command Objects Browse to and highlight an object. Press the F2 (Command) key. Use the
Spacebar and the Backspace key to cycle through the list of commands
until the desired command appears. Press Enter to carry out the
command.
Display a Summary Browse to and highlight the Summary container. Press the Spacebar to
expand the list of Summaries. Highlight a Summary. Press the
F2 (Command) key. Use the Spacebar and Backspace keys to cycle
through the list until Display appears. Press Enter.
Print a Summary Browse to and highlight the Summary container. Press the Spacebar to
expand the list of Summaries. Highlight a Summary. Press the
F2 (Command) key. Use the Spacebar and Backspace keys to cycle
through the list until Print appears. Use the arrow keys or Tab key to
highlight the Destination field. Use the Spacebar and the Backspace key
to cycle through to the desired printer. Press Enter.
Change an IP Address Browse to and select an N30. Press Enter. Press the F3 (Edit) key. Move
the cursor to IP Address. Press Enter. Type in the address for your
network. Press the F4 (Back) key. Enter the IP Mask and IP Router
addresses. Press the F3 (Save) key. Press any key to continue. Press the
F4 (Cancel) key to return to the main screen. Press Q to quit the N30.
Warm start the N30 to reset.
Rebind a Site Browse to and highlight an N30. Press Enter to open the N30 Device
object. Press the F2 (Command) key. Use the Spacebar and Backspace
key to cycle through the list until Rebind Site appears. Press Enter.
To Do This (Cont.) Follow These Steps:

Change Device Names Browse to and highlight an N30. Press the Enter key to open the N30
Device Object. Press the F3 (Edit) key. Use the arrow keys or Tab key to
highlight the Name field. Type in the new device name. Press the
F3 (Save) key. Press any key to continue.
Archive the Current Database Note: The N30 automatically archives the memory database to Flash
memory at 12:02 a.m. (just after midnight) and after a download.
The Archive command is provided for special circumstances and
should not be used regularly.
After logging into an N30, browse to and highlight an N30. Press the
F2 (Command) key. Use the Spacebar and Backspace key to cycle
through the list until Archive appears. Press Enter.
Detailed Procedures
The following procedures assume the N30 is already set up properly.
If using a direct serial port connection from the PC to the N30, see the
appropriate application note:
• Direct Connect and Dial-Up on Windows 98 Application Note
(LIT-6893350)
• Direct Connect and Dial-Up on Windows NT Application Note
(LIT-6893400)
• Direct Connect and Dial-Up on Windows 2000 Application Note
(LIT-6893450)
If connecting to the N30 through an Ethernet Local Area Network
(LAN), also see the N30 Supervisory Controller Networking Technical
Bulletin (LIT-6891300).
Logging On to an N30
To log on to an N30:
1. Start your VT100 Emulator or turn on your VT100.
2. Press Enter when the N30 name appears at the top of the screen.
The Login screen appears (Figure 3-3).
Figure 3-3: N30 Login Screen in a VT100

3. Type your Login ID and press Enter.

4. Type your password and press Enter. The Main N30 screen
appears (Figure 3-4).
Notes: The default Login ID is ADMIN.
The default password is 2468.
The password is case sensitive.
We strongly recommend that the site administrator change the default
password immediately and create Operator objects for editing the site.
Figure 3-4: N30 Main Screen After Logging In
Checking the Firmware Version Level of an N30

To check the firmware version number of an N30:
Note: These steps are performed using a VT100 Terminal or
VT100 Terminal Emulator on a PC.
1. Browse to and highlight the N30 you want to check (for example,
B7F3N01 in Figure 3-5).
Figure 3-5: N30 Screen after Logging in Through VT100 Terminal

2. Press Enter. The local attributes screen appears (Figure 3-6). The
firmware version level is on the right side under engineering
values.
Figure 3-6: N30 Local Attributes Screen

Setting the Date and Time

Note: The date and time defined for a site can be changed from any
of the configured N30 devices. When date or time is changed
at one N30 device, the change is automatically sent to all
other N30 devices on the site.
To set the date and time:
1. From the Main screen (Figure 3-4), use the arrow keys to
highlight an N30 (for example, N30P497).
2. Press the F2 (Command) key. The Command field appears.
3. Use the Spacebar or the Backspace key to cycle through the list
until the Set Time or Set Date command appears.
4. Use the arrow keys or Tab key to highlight the Value field.
5. Edit the value as necessary, using the number keys to set the
numbers and the Spacebar to scroll through the months.
6. Press Enter.
Editing the Attributes of an N30

To edit the attributes of the N30:
highlight an N30.
2. Press Enter to open the object (Figure 3-7).
Figure 3-7: Open N30 Device Object

Note: When an object is opened, an object information line appears
beneath the alarm/site information display area. The
information that appears, from left to right, includes: object
name (B7F3N01), present value, and object status
(Operational). Figure 3-7 only shows object name and object
status as an N30 Device object does not have a present value.
3. Press the F3 (Edit) key. The first of two N30 Device object
attribute screens appears (Figure 3-8).
Figure 3-8: N30 Device Object Attribute Screen

4. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the field that you want
to edit. The ] and [ keys are used to see additional pages of
attributes.
5. Edit the values. The acceptable values for each field are described
in the User Assistance line at the bottom of the screen. For more
information about the attributes of the N30 Device object, refer to
the N30 Device (LIT-694610) object chapter of the Object
Dictionary.
6. Press the F3 (Save) key to save changes or the F4 (Cancel) key to
cancel the changes.
Browsing an N30 Database with a VT100

This example illustrates how to browse an N30 database in a VT100
by describing how to view the attributes of an N2 Analog Output (AO)
object.
To browse an N30 database:
highlight an N30.
2. Press the Spacebar to expand the list of containers (Figure 3-9).
Note: The content of the list depends on the database. The
examples in this chapter use the containers of the default
N30 database.
Figure 3-9: Expanded N30 Container List

3. Select the N2 container.
4. Press the Spacebar to expand the list of objects.
5. Use the arrow key to highlight the Controller object where the
N2 object is located. In this example, it is UNT {1}.
6. Press the Spacebar to expand the list of N2 objects in the UNT
Controller object (Figure 3-10).
Figure 3-10: Expanded List of Objects in the UNT

7. Use the arrow keys to highlight the N2 AO object. In this example,
we want to see the attributes of the Heating Setpoint (SP).
8. Press the Enter key to open the object (Figure 3-11).
Figure 3-11: Open N2 AO Object

Adding Objects with a VT100

This section describes how to add objects using a VT100. Adding
objects using Project Builder software is simply a matter of dragging
the desired objects from the N30 library to the appropriate container in
your database, defining their attributes, and downloading to the N30.
See the Project Builder User’s Guide for more details.
Note: Most objects require that certain attributes be defined for
them to be valid. Refer to the Object Dictionary for details.
To add objects with a VT100:
1. Browse to and highlight an N30.
2. Press the Spacebar to expand the list of object containers
(Figure 3-9).
3. Browse to and highlight the container or object where you want to
add an object (for example, the UNT in Figure 3-10). See
Table 3-1 for a list of the objects that can be added to each
container type.
4. Press the F3 (Add) key. A list of objects that can be added at that
point appears (Figure 3-12).
Note: The Add Objects list changes according to what is selected
when the F3 (Add) key is pressed (see Table 3-1).
Figure 3-12: Add Object Screen

5. Select the type of object to add.

6. Press Enter. The attribute screen for the selected object appears.
7. Fill in the fields using the information in the Object Dictionary or
the appropriate chapter in this manual. Point mapping information
is in the N30 Supervisory Controller Point Mapping Technical
Bulletin (LIT-6891400).
8. Press the F3 (Save) key.
Editing Objects with a VT100

Editing objects using the VT100 requires browsing to the object,
opening the object, and modifying the attributes as desired. Editing
objects using Project Builder software is similar in that the object must
be browsed to and opened to modify it. However, in Project Builder,
objects are edited in the M-View interface, allowing standard windows
features such as drop-down lists. For more information, see the
Working with Objects and the M-View Screen (LIT-693230) chapter in
the Project Builder User’s Guide.
To edit objects:
1. Browse to and highlight an object.
2. Press Enter to open the object.
Note: Additional attributes appear after an object is created. For
complete lists of attributes for each object, refer to the
Object Dictionary.
3. Press the F3 (Edit) key. The attribute screen for that object
4. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to a field and edit as
desired. The User Assistance lines at the bottom of the screen
provide help on the range of values or types of information that
can be entered in the selected field. For example, in Figure 3-13,
with the Change-of-Value (COV) Increment field selected, the
User Assistance line shows that the number entered must be
greater than or equal to 0 to be valid for that field.
5. If an attribute shows a number of items rather than a value
(for example, [7] Items) move the cursor to the field, then press
the Enter key to open the list. The number in brackets indicates
the number of items that may be edited when that field is opened.
Note: After editing the items, press the F4 (Back) key to return to
the previous screen.
Figure 3-13: N2 AO Object Attribute Screen
Commanding Objects
To command objects, the N30 device with the objects you are
commanding must be online. Therefore, you can command objects
using a VT100 or an M-Series Workstation but not while using an
offline tool such as Project Builder.
To command objects:
1. Browse to and highlight an object.
2. Press the F2 (Command) key. The Command field appears
(Figure 3-14).
Figure 3-14: Command Field

3. Use the Spacebar and the Backspace key to cycle through the list
until the desired command appears. In this example, the Override
command is available for the Rooftop Unit N2 Binary Output
object.
4. If the desired command appears with additional parameters below
it, press the Tab key to highlight the field, and either type in the
necessary information or use the Spacebar and Backspace key to
cycle through the list of options.
5. Press Enter.
Displaying a Summary
To display a summary:
1. Browse to and highlight the Summary container.
2. Press the Spacebar to expand the list of Summaries.
3. Highlight a Summary.
4. Press the F2 (Command) key.
5. Use the Spacebar and Backspace keys to cycle through the list
until the Display command appears (Figure 3-15).
Figure 3-15: Summary Command Screen

6. Press Enter. The Summary Display screen appears (Figure 3-16).
Figure 3-16: Summary Display Screen

Printing a Summary
To print a summary:
1. Browse to and highlight the Summary container.
2. Press the Spacebar to expand the list of Summaries.
3. Highlight a Summary.
until Print appears (Figure 3-17).
6. Use the arrow keys or Tab key to highlight the Destination field.
until the desired printer appears.
8. Press Enter.
Figure 3-17: Print Summary Command

Changing an IP Address
Notes: Before performing the following steps, have the necessary
Internet Protocol (IP) Addresses available.
If the network uses Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP), you can
allow the N30 to obtain its own IP address by setting its
BOOTP Enabled attribute to true and by configuring the
BOOTP server to assign an IP address. See the N30 Device
(LIT-694610) chapter in the Object Dictionary and the
N30 Supervisory Controller Networking Technical Bulletin
(LIT-6891300) for more information.
To change an IP address using a VT100:
2. Press Enter to open the N30 Device object. Figure 3-7 shows the
N30 Device object named South Building after it has been
opened.
3. Press the F3 (Edit) key. The first of two N30 Device object
4. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to IP Address.
5. Press Enter. The IP Address list appears (Figure 3-18).
Figure 3-18: N30 IP Address List

6. Type in the address for your network in the four fields.

7. Press the F4 (Back) key.
8. Repeat steps 5 through 7 for the IP Mask and IP Router addresses.
10. Press any key to continue.
11. Press the F4 (Cancel) key to return to the container hierarchy.
Note: The status field for the device should now show
Reset Needed (Figure 3-19). The South Building
N30 Device object has just had its IP address changed.
Figure 3-19: N30 Requiring Reset

12. Press Q to quit the N30.
13. Warm start the N30 to reset.
Rebinding a Site
To rebind a site:
2. Press Enter to open the N30 Device object.
4. Use the Spacebar and Backspace key to cycle through the list until
Rebind Site appears.
5. Press Enter.
Changing Device Names

To change device names for the N30s:
2. Press the Enter key to open the N30 Device Object.
3. Press the F3 (Edit) key.
4. Use the arrow keys or Tab key to highlight the Name field.
5. Type in the new device name.
Archiving the Current Database

Note: The N30 automatically archives the memory database to
Flash memory at 12:02 a.m. (just after midnight) and after a
download. The Archive command is provided for special
circumstances and should not be used regularly.
To archive the current database in an N30 to Flash memory:
1. After logging in, browse to and highlight an N30.
Archive appears.
4. Press Enter.
Chapter 4
Working with Operator Objects T
Introduction
Before new users can log into and access an N30 site, an Operator
object must first be defined for each user. The Operator object dictates
password and login ID entry guidelines and specifies complete access
privileges for each user. Only site administrators can create, modify,
and delete this object.
This chapter describes how to:
• add an Operator object
• edit an Operator object
• command an Operator object
• change any Operator password
• change the ADMIN password
• delete an Operator object

Key Concepts
Operator Object
Added for each user in a site and configured according to the access
the user needs or requires for certain object categories. For instance, a
Security Guard’s Operator object allows the viewing of Security
objects, whereas the Building Manager’s Operator object allows the
adding and deleting of HVAC objects.
Administrator
The only user of a site with the ability to create, modify, or delete
operator objects. With the exception that the administrator cannot
change an Operator password after its initial creation, the administrator
has unrestricted access to and control over all other objects defined for
the site.
The administrator’s Login ID is ADMIN and the default password
is 2468. The user assigned it is responsible for changing the
administrator password for their site and keeping it recorded in a
secure place.
Because an administrator is the only user with access to Operator
objects, he or she is the only user who can issue commands, such as
Enable and Disable, to these objects.
Site Manager Device

The device in a site that contains the master Site object. The master
Site object synchronizes all global objects.
Copy Holder Device

Thie device that maintains copies of Redundant objects within each
site. The Copy Holder device name is an attribute of the Site Data
object.
Global Objects
Objects duplicated at each site-configured device. The master, stored
on the Site Manager device, is recorded complete with object name.
The copies of each global object are disseminated to all other N30
devices, but without an object name. The Site Data and
two administrative Operator objects are global objects.
Users can neither create additional global objects nor remove any
entries from any pre-defined set of global objects. The Site Manager
device is responsible for ensuring that attribute values associated with
all global objects are synchronized across all devices. Changes can be
made only to the named global objects maintained on the Site Manager
device.
Redundant Objects
Objects for which a copy is maintained for each object instance. The
master or named instance is loaded into a specified host device. The
copy is automatically copied to the Copy Holder device where it is
retained as a backup in case a host device goes offline or becomes
inoperable. All non-administrative Operator objects fall into this
classification.
User Access Feature

A feature that establishes and maintains a core access capability,
which can be expanded to meet increasing levels of sophistication.
A site can range from a single VT100 configured N30 device to one
consisting of fifty networked N30 devices (or ten N31s). As such, the
User Access feature focuses on these primary objectives:
1. Identify legitimate users and grant each an access level based on
his or her role and site responsibilities (via the configuration of the
Operator object).
2. Ensure that all devices can be accessed by at least a few operators
at all times (even if network communications between N30
devices is not functioning).
• A copy of the administrator Operator object is added or
downloaded to the Site Manager device and then distributed to
each of the site’s N30 devices.
• By maintaining copies in each N30, the administrator is
essentially guaranteed access to all objects on the site, even
during a network breakdown. During such a disruption, the
administrator must be physically logged into the N30 device
containing the object to be accessed using a VT100 Terminal.
3. Minimize the chance of users losing their ability to log into a site
due to a single N30 device breakdown.
• Designating one of the N30 devices on the site as the Copy
Holder device ensures the maintenance of a copy of each
non-administrative Operator object defined in the site.
• A user attempting to log in whose Operator object resides in a
non-operational N30, automatically has his or her login ID and
password entry verified against the copy of his Operator object
maintained in the site’s Copy Holder device.
Guidelines for Defining User Access

Table 4-1 provides guidelines for defining user access.
Table 4-1: Guidelines for Defining User Access

Guideline Description
Assigning Objects to • When created, all objects are defaulted to the HVAC object category.
Object Categories Access to objects intended for special applications (such as fire or security)
can be easily restricted.
• Objects that require greater restrictions should be segregated into one of
the other categories (Fire, Security, Services, or Administrative).
• Only the user intended to have access to these objects should be granted
any level of access to these categories.
Understanding the User When the user logs into a VT100 equipped N30 device, the user’s Login ID and
Login Validation Process Password entries are compared against those defined in each of the site’s
Operator objects. This search and comparison process consists of the following
steps.
1. The entries are compared against the administrator Operator object, which
is locally maintained within each site’s configured N30 devices.
2. If no match is found, the entries are compared against each
non-administrator Operator object maintained within the N30 device that
the user is using to log into the site.
3. If no match is found, the entries are compared against each copy of all the
Operator objects defined for the site. This activity is performed by the Copy
Holder device.
4. If the Copy Holder device is offline or is undefined, all N30 devices are
queried to determine which (if any) of the devices has an Operator object
through which the user entries can be validated.
5. If no match is found by the end of this validation sequence, the user is
denied access.
Assigning Operator In a fully operational site, an Operator object can reside anywhere. However,
Objects to N30 Devices in practice, you can take steps to help minimize the chances that an offline N30
(see Figure 4-1) or a faulty communications network could prevent a legitimate operator from
successfully logging into a site.
In sites with one VT100 Terminal, locate all Operator objects within the N30
device that the VT100 is interfaced to, if enough memory is available. Following
this guideline, the possibility of a required Operator object being located in an
offline N30 is negated.
In sites consisting of two VT100-equipped N30 devices, locate all Operator
objects within either of these N30 devices. Note in the next section that
one N30 should be the Site Manager and the other N30 should be designated
the Copy Holder device.
In sites equipped with more than two VT100 interfaces, locate each
Operator object within the VT100-equipped N30 that the operator is most apt to
use routinely.
Guideline (Cont.) Description

Designating Site Manager Site Manager Configuration: Unless there is a reason for not doing so
and Copy Holder Devices (available memory, etc.), designate a VT100-equipped N30 device to be the
(see Figure 4-1) Site Manager.
Copy Holder Configuration: Unless there is a reason for not doing so
(available memory, etc.), designate a Copy Holder as follows:
• For a standalone configuration, Copy Holder designation is not required.
• For a single VT100 and multiple N30 devices, any device can be
designated Copy Holder as long as all Operator objects have been loaded
into the single VT100 equipped N30 device.
• For multiple VT100s, direct the Copy Holder designation to one of the other
VT100-equipped N30 devices. Since the Copy Holder retains a copy of
each Operator object defined for the site, login access attempted through
this device is virtually guaranteed to any legitimate operator.
Site
Manager
N30
VT 100
Standalone N30 Configuration
Site Copy
Manager Holder
N30 N30 N30

VT 100
Multiple N30 Configuration with Single VT100 Monitor
Site Copy
Manager Holder
N30 N30 N30
VT 100 VT 100
Multiple N30 Configuration with Two VT100 Monitors
Site Copy
Manager Holder
N30 N30 N30
VT 100
VT 100 VT 100
Multiple N30 Configuration, Each with a VT100 Monitor

SiteCopy
Figure 4-1: Site Manager/Copy Holder Designations

Attributes
The values of an object’s attributes determine how the object operates.
The Operator object attributes described below are listed in the order
that they appear on the screen.
For additional information about the Operator object and its attributes,
refer to the Object Dictionary.
Object Name
Identifies the object on the user interface. For the Operator object, the
Login ID is the object name.
Description
Provides optional information to further describe the object.
Object Type
Indicates the kind of object, such as Schedule, N2 Analog Input, or
Operator.
Object Category
Determines the general classification of an object to help define user
access capability and message routing.
Enabled
Determines whether the user associated with a specific Operator object
can log on to the site. True indicates that the user can log on to the site;
False indicates that a user cannot log on to the site.
Password
Determines the password that a specific user must enter to log on to
the site. The Password must be a number of characters equal to or
greater than the Minimum Password Length defined for the site by the
Site Data object. The Password is case sensitive.
User ID
Appears as a string output on a printed status report and identifies the
user that has acknowledged an alarm.
Login ID
Determines the Login ID that a specific user must enter to log on to the
site. The Login ID may be up to 32 characters long.
IMPORTANT: As of Release 2.0, the Login ID is case sensitive.

User Group
Determines which Group object (if any) appears directly under the
main container on the main N30 screen. Once the Group is added to
the Group container, the exact name of a Group object must be entered
in the User Group field of an Operator object, in order for that Group
object to appear directly under the main container whenever that user
logs in.
For more information regarding User Group, refer to the Working with
Group Objects (LIT-6892060) chapter of this document.
Timeout
Indicates the amount of time that must elapse before a VT100 session
expires due to no keyboard activity.
Acknowledge
Specifies if the user has the ability to recognize alarm reports. Alarm
reports may be routed to terminals being used.
Display Units
Defines which units are used for display when the operator is logged
in.
User Capability
Dictates the user’s relative degree of access, such as Configure,
Modify, etc., for each of the site’s five object categories.
The five object categories for which the user must have an access level
defined are identified in Table 4-2. Since non-administrative users
have no access to objects in the Administrative category, the entry for
this category defaults to No Access, and the Administrative field is not
accessible from the VT100. The administrator receives a default access
level of Configure to all five object categories.
Table 4-2: Object Categories
Category Description
HVAC Categorizes an object as relating to Heating, Ventilating and
Air Conditioning functions.
Fire Categorizes an object as relating to Fire functions.
Security Categorizes an object as relating to Security functions.
Services Categorizes an object as relating to Services functions.
Administrative Categorizes an object as relating to Administrative functions.
Only Operator objects can be categorized as Administrative and
only the site administrator can access these objects.
For each of the five object categories identified above, a user must be
assigned (through the User Capability attribute of the Operator object)
one of the seven access levels defined in Table 4-3. These access
levels represent the degree of functional capability a user has when
accessing objects assigned to the object category. A user receives all
capabilities defined at the assigned level and below.
Table 4-3: Access Levels

Access Level Description
Configure Can create, add, delete, upload, and download.
Modify Can release, release all, change attributes, enable, and
disable objects.
Supervise Can override at Command Priority 8 (Operator Override).
Intervene Can set time and date, declare points Out of Service,
Lock/Unlock loads, and Cancel Timer.
Operate Can start, stop, adjust, etc., at Command Priority 16 (Default).
View Can only view attribute details.
No Access Can see the object listed on the browser but not the details.
As an example, one user may be granted a Configure access level to

objects categorized as HVAC but only given a View access level to
objects categorized as Security, and No Access to objects assigned to
the Fire, Security, or Administrative object categories.
Another more experienced user may be granted the ability to
Configure objects in all four of the categories – HVAC, Fire, Security,
and Services.
Operator Object Example

Figure 4-2 is an example of the flexibility of Operator objects. This
example illustrates the following:
• The Login ID entry was kept short by using just the user’s first
name and the initial of the last name. To ensure clarity, the user’s
full name was entered in the Description field.
• The User Group reference tailors the user interface to the user’s
specific needs. For more information, refer to Working with
Groups (LIT-6892060) in this manual.
• Careful consideration to User Capability ensures that the user is
granted the appropriate access level to the four object categories
accessible to non-administrator operators.
• The login ID becomes the name of the defined Operator object.
Figure 4-2: Operator Object Example

Procedure Overview
Table 4-4: Working with Operator Objects
Add an Operator Object Browse to and highlight the Operators container. Press the F3 (Add) key.
Highlight Operator and press Enter. Fill in the fields using Table 4-5.
Press the F3 (Save) key. Check the User Assistance area of the screen to
verify if the save was successful or if there were errors. Press any key to
continue. Press the F4 (Cancel) key to return to the container hierarchy.
Edit an Operator Object Browse to and highlight an Operator object. Press Enter to open the
object. Press the F3 (Edit) key. Edit the fields using Table 4-5. Press the
F3 (Save) key to save the changes. Check the User Assistance area of
the screen to verify if the save was successful or if there were errors.
Press any key to continue. Press the F4 (Cancel) key to return to the
container hierarchy.
Command an Operator Object Browse to and highlight an Operator object. Press the F2 (Command)
key. Use the Spacebar and the Backspace key to cycle through the list
until the desired command appears. Press Enter.
Changing Any Operator Log on to the N30 using the login ID and password of the user whose
Password password is to be changed. Browse to and expand the Operators
container. Highlight the Operator object. Press the F2 (Command) key.
Use the Spacebar and the Backspace key to cycle through the list until
Change Password appears. Press Enter to move to the next field.
Pressing the Tab or down arrow key also moves the cursor to the next
field. In the New Password field, type a new password. Press Enter to
move to the next field. Type the password again in the Confirm New
Password field. Press Enter.
Change the ADMIN Password Log on to the N30 using the ADMIN login ID and password. In the
N30 device object designated as the Site Manager, expand the Internals
container. Highlight the Operator object named site name.Operator {1}.
Press Enter to open the object. Press the F2 (Command) key. Press
Enter to move to the next field. Pressing the Tab or down arrow key also
moves the cursor to the next field. In the New Password field, type a new
password. Press Enter to move to the next field. Type the password again
in the Confirm New Password field. Press Enter.
Delete an Operator Object Browse to and highlight an Operator object. Press Enter to open the
object. Press the Delete key. Press the Tab key to confirm the deletion.
Detailed Procedures
Adding an Operator Object
Note: The Administrator of the site is the only user who can add an
Operator object.
To add an Operator object:
1. Browse to and highlight the Operators container.
2. Press the F3 (Add) key. The Add Objects list appears.
3. Highlight Operator and press Enter. The Operator object attribute
screen appears (Figure 4-3).
Figure 4-3: Operator Object Attribute Screen

4. Fill in the fields using Table 4-5.
Table 4-5: Attribute Entry Requirements

Screen Attribute Required Default Options/Range
Area
Object Object Name No Blank Determined by the Login ID.
Description No Blank Maximum 40 characters
Object Type Yes Operator Default is preset and cannot be changed.
Object Category Yes Administrative Use the Spacebar and Backspace key to
All other view and select options: HVAC, Fire,
Operator objects Security, Services, Administrative.
have the default
HVAC.
Enabled Yes True Use the Spacebar and Backspace key to
view and select options: True, False.
Login ID Yes Blank Maximum 32 characters
This entry identifies the object in the
container hierarchy. It is recommended to
keep this entry as short as possible
because the user must type this in for
each login.
Password Yes Blank Maximum 8 characters
The Password is case sensitive.
User ID Yes Blank 1 to 8 characters
User Group No Blank Maximum 32 characters
Timeout No 60 Minimum value = 1
Maximum value = 1440
Units = minutes
Acknowledge No True Use the Spacebar and Backspace key to
Display Units Yes Imperial Units Imperial Units
SI Can Units
SI Eur Units
User HVAC Yes Operate Use the Spacebar and Backspace key to
Capability Fire Yes No Access view and select options: No Access, View,
Operate, Intervene, Supervise, Modify, or
Security Yes No Access Configure.
Services Yes No Access

6. Check the User Assistance area of the screen to verify if the save
was successful or if there were errors. If errors were detected,
correct them and resave the entries. Once the save is successful,
continue with Step 7.
Editing an Operator Object

Note: The Administrator of the site is the only user who can edit an
Operator object.
To edit an Operator object:
1. Browse to and highlight an Operator object.
3. Press the F3 (Edit) key. The Operator object attribute screen
4. Edit the fields using Table 4-5.
5. Press the F3 (Save) key to save the changes.
8. Press F4 (Cancel) to return to the container hierarchy.
Commanding an Operator Object

To command an Operator object:
until the desired command appears. The Operator object supports
the commands described in Table 4-6.
Table 4-6: Operator Object Commands

Command Description
Enable Allows the user to log on and access the site according to the
user access levels defined by the Operator object.
Disable Prevents the user from logging on to the site.
4. Press Enter.
Changing Any Operator Password

Note: Administrative and non-administrative Operator objects are
maintained in different locations.
To change any Operator password:
1. Log on to the N30 using the login ID and password of the user
whose password is to be changed. This is the only way the
Change Password command is available.
2. Browse to and expand the Operators container.
3. Highlight the Operator object.
until Change Password appears.
6. Press Enter to move to the next field.
Note: Pressing the Tab or down arrow key also moves the cursor to
the next field.
7. In the New Password field, type a new password.
9. Type the password again in the Confirm New Password field.
10. Press Enter.
Changing the ADMIN Password

Note: Administrative and non-administrative Operator objects are
maintained in different locations.
To change the ADMIN password:
1. Log on to the N30 using the ADMIN login ID and password. This
is the only way the Change Password command is available.
2. In the N30 device object designated as the Site Manager, expand
the Internals container.
3. Highlight the Operator object named site name. Operator {1}. For
example, BROWN DEER. Operator {1} (Figure 4-4).
Figure 4-4: SITE NAME.Operator {1}

5. Press the F2 (Command) key. The Command field appears with
only the Change Password available.
Note: Pressing the Tab or down arrow key also moves the cursor to
the next field.
7. In the New Password field, type a new password.
9. Type the password again in the Confirm New Password field.
10. Press Enter.
Deleting an Operator Object

Note: The Administrator of the site is the only user who can delete
an Operator object
To delete an Operator object:
3. Press the Delete key.
4. Press the Tab key to confirm the deletion.
Chapter 5
Working with VT100 Objects T
Introduction
The VT100 object is a representation of the VT100 user interface.
One VT100 object exists in each new N30 by default. This makes it
possible for every N30 to have a VT100 directly attached to it. A user
cannot add additional or delete existing VT100 objects via a VT100;
however, the VT100 object can be edited for the filtering of messages
as desired. Additional VT100 objects can be added to a database using
Project Builder software. This chapter describes how to edit a VT100
object.

Key Concepts
VT100 Object
The VT100 object performs three primary functions:
• provides the means for users to observe VT100 data and status, and
identify it as a target device for alarms and summaries.
• handles unsolicited messages directed from objects, such as alarm
messages and Summaries.
• supports the relationship to the Serial Datalink object that manages
dial connections and line status conditions.
The VT100 object provides support for VT100 Terminals as well as
VT100 Terminal Emulators running on a standard computer.
The VT100 object’s attributes allow a user to configure a variety of
filters that establish the type of messages, or Status Notification
Reports (SNR), which the VT100 object receives. For more
information about determining filter configurations, refer to
Appendix B: Building a Message Router Application (LIT-6892320) in
this document.
Attributes
The VT100 object attributes described below are listed in the order
that they appear on the screen. Entry requirements for these attributes
are in Table 5-2.
For additional information about the VT100 object and its attributes,
Object Name
Identifies the object on the user interface.
Description
Object Type
Indicates the kind of object, such as Schedule, N2 Analog Input,
or VT100.
Object Category
Active Filter
Selects the type of filtering in effect for this VT100 destination. The
filter types are as follows:
• Pass None - When selected, this destination receives no alarm
messages.
• Pass All - When selected, this destination receives all alarm
messages.
• Filter A - This destination receives alarm messages based on
settings of Filter A.
• Filter B - This destination receives alarm messages based on
settings of Filter B.
• Filter A and B - This destination receives alarm messages based
on settings of Filter A and B.
Priority Filter A
Defines which priorities the destination receives when Filter A is in
effect. A value of True for a particular selection means that messages
of that defined priority reach this destination. Choices from highest to
lowest priority are Critical, Serious, Important, and Status.
Category Filter A
Defines which categories of messages the destination receives when
Filter A is in effect. This filter has no effect for alarm messages
without a defined object category. A value of True for a particular
selection means that messages of that defined object category reach
this destination.
Msg Type Filter A

Defines which types of messages the destination receives when
Filter A is in effect. A value of True for a particular selection means
that messages of that defined type reach this destination. Choices from
highest to lowest priority are System Alert, Operator Transaction, and
Alarm.
Priority Filter B
Defines which priorities the destination receives when Filter B is in
effect. A value of True for a particular selection means messages of
that defined priority reach this destination. Choices from highest to
lowest priority are Critical, Serious, Important, and Status.
Category Filter B
Filter B is in effect. This filter has no effect for alarm messages
without a defined object category. A value of True for a particular
selection means that messages of that defined category reach this
destination.
Msg Type Filter B

Filter B is in effect. A value of True for a particular selection means
that messages of that defined type reach this destination. Choices from
highest to lowest priority are System Alert, Operator Transaction, or
Alarm.
Port Number
Identifies the port where the VT100 Terminal is connected.
Procedure Overview
Table 5-1: Working with VT100 Objects
Edit a VT100 Object Browse to and highlight the VT100 object. Press Enter to open the object.
Press the F3 (Edit) key. Edit the fields using Table 5-2. Move the cursor to
the next field (Priority Filter A). Press Enter. Use the Spacebar and
Backspace key to view and select True or False for the first available
option. Press the down arrow key to move to the next option. Enter values
for all of the options. Press F4 (Back) to return to the attribute screen.
Edit all fields. Press the F3 (Save) key. Check the User Assistance area
of the screen to verify if the save was successful or if there were errors.
Detailed Procedures
Editing a VT100 Object
To edit a VT100 object:
1. Browse to and highlight a VT100 object.
Note: Additional attributes appear. Refer to the Object Dictionary
for more information.
3. Press the F3 (Edit) key. The VT100 object attribute screen appears
(Figure 5-1).
Figure 5-1: VT100 Object Attribute Screen


Area
Object Object Name No Blank The default is preset and cannot be changed.
Object Type Yes VT100 The default is preset and cannot be changed.
Object Yes HVAC Use the Spacebar and Backspace key to view and
Category select options: HVAC, Fire, Security, Services,
Administrative.
Alarm Active Filter Yes Pass All Use the Spacebar and Backspace key to view and
Setup select options: Pass None, Pass All, Filter A, Filter B,
Filter A and B.
Priority Yes [4] Items Use the Spacebar and Backspace key to view and
Filter A select True or False for the following values: Critical,
Serious, Important, Status.
Category Yes [5] Items Use the Spacebar and Backspace key to view and
Filter A select True or False for the following values: HVAC,
Fire, Security, Services, Administrative.
Msg Type Yes [3] Items Use the Spacebar and Backspace key to view and
Filter A select True or False for the following values: System
Alert, Operator Transaction, Alarm.
Priority Yes [4] Items Use the Spacebar and Backspace key to view and
Filter B select True or False for the following values: Critical,
Serious, Important, Status.
Category Yes [5] Items Use the Spacebar and Backspace key to view and
Filter B select True or False for the following values: HVAC,
Msg Type Yes [3] Items Use the Spacebar and Backspace key to view and
Filter B select True or False for the following values: System
Alert, Operator Transaction, Alarm.
Notification Enter an integer between 1 and 4194303.
Class
Port Port Number Yes Port 1 The default is preset and cannot be changed.
Setup
5. Move the cursor to the next field (Priority Filter A).

6. Press Enter. The filter options appear.
7. Use the Spacebar and Backspace key to view and select True or
False for the first available option.
8. Press the down arrow key to move to the next option.
9. Repeat Steps 7 and 8 until values are chosen for all of the options.
10. Press F4 (Back) to return to the attribute screen.
11. Repeat Steps 5 through 10 while referring to Table 5-2 or the User
Assistance line, until all of the fields are edited as desired.
Chapter 6
Working with Group Objects T
Introduction
The Group object provides the user with the ability to customize the
organization of objects within the site.
• add a Group object
• edit a Group object
• add object references to a Group object
• delete object references from a Group object
• delete a Group object
• create a Site Group
• create a User Group

Key Concepts
Group Object
An organizational tool that organizes and displays site information
according to specific needs. For example, a Group object can display
information by floors, sections, all zone temps, etc. These
representations are independent of the devices themselves. This allows
users to define site hierarchies differently than the default organization
by N30 device.
Groups can reference any object, collection of objects, or other groups.
By referencing groups from inside of other groups a full or partial site
hierarchy can be built. The flexibility of the Group object allows for
multiple custom hierarchies defined for use by different users or
different job functions.
More than one Group object can reference a single object in the site.
Multiple points in the hierarchy can access the same object
information. Each object in the site, however, is not required to be
referenced within a group. View, edit, and command objects in the
groups using the same operations available for the other containers in
the site hierarchy. If changes are made to an object from within the
Group object, these changes are reflected in the object wherever it is
accessed from.
A total of 75 objects or groups can be added per group and up to
seven consecutive levels of Group objects can be added within any
other container or object or group.
Site Group
The site can have a particular Site Group appear at the top level of the
site hierarchy when any user logs in.
First, add a Group object under the Group container. Then the name of
this group is inserted into the Site Group Object field of the Site Data
object. A Site Group contains any information important to a site and
that needs to be easily accessed. Figure 6-1 shows an example of a Site
Group named OVERVIEW GRP. This procedure is described in the
Detailed Procedures section of this chapter.
Figure 6-1: Site Group Example in the Container Hierarchy
User Group
Each user (operator) in the site can also have a personal group appear
at the top level of the site hierarchy when he or she logs in. First,
create a Group object in the Group container. Then reference the name
of this group via the User Group attribute of the user’s Operator
object.
Creating a User Group allows users to customize their container
hiearchy. For instance, a particular Facility Manager may need to
check temperatures and setpoints on a daily basis. By creating a Group
object containing this information (named Maintenance) under the
Group container and then making sure to enter the name of this Group
(Maintenance) in the User Group attribute field of the Facility
Manager’s own Operator object, a group of vital information is created
at the top of the container hierarchy that eliminates the need to browse
any further after logging in. Figure 6-2 is an example of a User Group.
This procedure is described in the Detailed Procedures section of this
chapter.
If both a User Group and Site Group are defined and that particular
operator is logged in, the User Group appears first, and then the Site
Group followed by the remainder of the site hierarchy.
For more information about the Operator object, refer to the Working
with Operator Objects (LIT-6892030) chapter of this document.
Figure 6-2: User Group Example in the Container Hierarchy
Attributes
The Group object attributes described below are listed in the order that
they appear on the user interface.
For additional information about the Group object and its attributes,
Object Name
Description
Child List
Consists of an object reference and a label string for display. The
object reference may refer to any object including another group.
The optional label allows a shorter name to be used when displaying
the members in the group. It is also intended to reflect the object’s
meaning relative to the group that it is in. The label names within a
given group must be unique from all other labels in that group.
Procedure Overview
Table 6-1: Working with Group Objects
Add a Group Object Browse to and highlight the Group container. Press the F3 (Add) key.
Highlight Group and press Enter. Fill in the fields using Table 6-2. Move
the cursor to Child List. Press Enter. Type in the exact name of an object
to be added to the new Group object. Press F3 (Add Item) to add a blank
entry for another object. Press F4 (Back) key. Press F3 (Save) key to
save the object. Check the User Assistance area of the screen to verify if
the save was successful or if there were errors. Press any key to
Edit a Group Object Browse to and highlight a Group object. Press Enter to open the object.
Press F3 (Edit) key. Move the cursor to Child List. Press Enter. Make any
necessary changes (correct an object or label name). Press the F4 (Back)
key. Press the F3 (Save) key to save the changes. Check the User
Assistance area of the screen to verify if the save was successful or if
there were errors. Press any key to continue. Press the F4 (Cancel) key
to return to the container hierarchy.
Add Object References to a Browse to and highlight a Group object. Press Enter to open the object.
Group Object Press the F3 (Edit) key. Move the cursor to Child List. Press Enter. Press
the F3 (Add Item) key to add a blank entry. Type in the exact name of an
object to be added to the Group object. Press F3 (Add Item) to add a
blank entry for another object. Press the F4 (Back) key. Press the
Delete Object References from Browse to highlight a Group object. Press Enter to open object. Press
a Group Object F3 (Edit) key. Move the cursor to Child List. Press Enter. Highlight either
the Reference Name or Label of an object and press the F2 (Del Item)
key. Press the F4 (Back) key. Press the F3 (Save) key to save the
changes. Check the User Assistance area of the screen to verify if the
save was successful or if there were errors. Press any key to continue.
Press the F4 (Cancel) key to return to the container hierarchy.
Delete a Group Object Browse to and highlight a Group object. Press Enter to open the object.
Press the F3 (Edit) key. Move the cursor to Child List. Press Enter. Press
F2 (Del Item) key until all of the objects in the Child List are deleted. Press
the F4 (Back) key. Press the F3 (Save) key to save the changes. Check
the User Assistance area of the screen to verify if the save was
successful or if there were errors. Press any key to continue. Press the
Delete key. Press the Tab key to confirm the deletion.
Create a Site Group In the Group container, add a Group object with the desired Child List
members. Write down the name of this new group. Browse to and expand
the Site Data object. Press the F3 (Edit) key. Move the cursor to the Site
Group Object field. Type in the name of this new group. Press the
F3 (Save) key. Press any key to continue. Log out and log in for the
changes to take effect. Check the container hierarchy to verify that the
Site Group appears.
Create a User Group In the Group container, add a Group object with the desired Child List
members. Write down the name of this new group. Edit the appropriate
Operator object by entering the exact name of this new group in the User
Group field. Log out and log in the VT100 with the appropriate Login ID
and Password for the edited Operator object. Check the container
hierarchy to verify that the User Group appears.
Detailed Procedures
Adding a Group Object
Note: When adding objects to a Group object it is helpful to have a
list of the exact names of the objects to be added.
To add a Group object:
1. Browse to and highlight the Group container.
2. Press the F3 (Add) key. The Add Object list appears.
3. Highlight Group and press Enter. The Group object attribute
screen appears (Figure 6-3):
Figure 6-3: Group Object Attribute Screen


Screen Area Attribute Required Default Options/Range
Object Object Name No Blank Maximum 32 characters
Invalid characters: @ . ? * $ # : ’ [ ]
If not completed, the system assigns a
name.
Object Type Group
Object HVAC
Category
Child List Yes 0 Items Object reference and optional label of
20 maximum characters
5. Move the cursor to Child List.

6. Press Enter. The Group object Child List appears (Figure 6-4).
Figure 6-4: Group Object Child List

7. Type in the exact name of an object to be added to the new Group
object.
8. If desired, type in a Label for that object.
Note: If a Label is entered it appears in the container hierarchy
under the name of the Group object. Otherwise, the
Reference name appears.
9. Press F3 (Add Item) to add a blank entry for another object.
10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 for all objects to be added to the Group
object.
12. Press the F3 (Save) key to save the object.
Note: Once a Group object is added, users can view and edit its
objects the same way they would view and edit objects in
their original containers.
Editing a Group Object

To edit a Group object:
Note: To add object references to or delete object references from a
Group object, refer to the appropriate sections of this
chapter.
1. Browse to and highlight a Group object.
3. Press the F3 (Edit) key. The Group object attribute screen appears
(Figure 6-3).
4. If necessary, edit the Description field.
5. If only the Description field is edited, press F3 (Save) and
continue with Step 11. If the Child List is to be edited, continue
with Step 6.
8. Make any necessary changes (correct an object or label name).
Adding Object References to a Group Object

To add object references to a Group object:
3. Press the F3 (Edit) key. The Group object attribute screen appears
(Figure 6-3).
6. Press the F3 (Add Item) key to add a blank entry.
7. Type in the exact name of an object.
8. If desired, type in a Label for that object.
Note: If a Label is entered it appears in the container hierarchy
under the name of the Group object. Otherwise, the
Reference name appears.
9. Press F3 (Add Item) to add a blank entry for another object.
10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 for all objects to be added to the Group
object.
Deleting Object References from a Group Object

To delete object references from a Group object:
6. Highlight either the Reference Name or Label of an object and
press the F2 (Del Item) key.
7. Repeat Step 6 for all objects to be deleted.

Deleting a Group Object

To delete a Group object:
6. Press the F2 (Del Item) key until all of the objects in the Child
List are deleted.
Note: All objects must be deleted from the Child List before the
Group object can be deleted.
Creating a Site Group

To create a Site Group:
1. In the Group container, add a Group object with the desired Child
List members.
Note: See Adding a Group Object in this chapter.
2. Write down the name of this new group.
3. Browse to and highlight the Site Data object. The Site Data object
appears at the top of the hierarchy. In Figure 6-1, the Site Data
object is Brown Deer.
6. Move the cursor to the Site Group Object field (Figure 6-5).
Figure 6-5: Site Group Object field – Site Data Object Attribute Screen
7. Type in the name of this new group.
10. Log out and log in for the changes to take effect.
11. Check the container hierarchy to verify that the Site Group
Creating a User Group

To create a User Group:
1. In the Group container, add a Group object with the desired Child
List members.
Note: See Adding a Group Object in this chapter.
2. Write down the exact name of this new group.
3. Edit the appropriate Operator object by entering the exact name of
this new group in the User Group field (Figure 6-6).
Note: The Administrator of the site is the only user who can edit an
Operator object. See Working with Operator Objects
(LIT-6892040) in this document for editing an Operator
object
Figure 6-6: User Group Field - Operator Object Attribute Screen

4. Log out and log in the VT100 with the appropriate Login ID and
Password for the edited Operator object.
5. Check the container hierarchy to verify that the User Group
Chapter 7
Working with Schedule Objects
Introduction
A Schedule object allows you to automate routine functions.
For example, you can schedule a fan to start every weekday
(Monday through Friday) at 7:00 a.m. and stop at 5:00 p.m.
• create a new Schedule object
• edit a Schedule object
• delete a Schedule object
• command a Schedule object
For information on creating and editing Schedule objects in Project
Builder, see the Project Builder User’s Guide. For information on
viewing and editing Schedules using M-Schedule, see the
M-Schedule/M-Calendar User’s Guide.

Key Concepts
Schedule Object
The Schedule object updates the attribute values of objects according
to the time of day. The Schedule object allows for flexible selection of
dates on which to run the Schedule. These times can be specified for
days of the week and exception days. The exception days can be
defined as specific dates, ranges of dates, or days for which a given
Calendar object is defined. See Table 7-7 for a list of exception types.
The Schedule object is compatible with the BACnet Schedule object.
All required and optional attributes of the BACnet Schedule object are
supported. Some proprietary attributes have been added to the N30 to
extend the functionality of the Schedule object. The Schedule object is
added to the Schedule container in an N30 database.
Attributes
The Schedule object attributes described below are listed in the order
For additional information about Schedule object and its attributes
Object Name
Identifies the object on the user interface. This is the name the user
sees when viewing the database.
Description
Object Type
Indicates the type of object, such as Schedule, N2 Analog Input, or
Calendar.
Object Category
Enabled
Indicates if the object is active and executing an operational condition.
N30 Supervisory Controller User’s Guide 7-3
List of Property References (List of Prop Refs)

Lists attributes of objects, which are to be written at the scheduled
times. The List of Prop Refs is a list of the objects and attributes that
are scheduled using the Schedule object.
Weekly Schedule
Contains one element for each day of the week, where element
1=Monday, 2=Tuesday, . . . 7=Sunday. Each element contains a list of
the times and corresponding values for the Schedule object to write to
the scheduled objects. The exception schedules override the times in
this weekly schedule.
Exception Schedule
Contains a list of exceptions to the times listed in the weekly schedule.
The exceptions can be based on a specific date, a date range, a
calendar reference, or a week/day selection. The Schedule object
automatically deletes date or range type of exceptions that expired
31 days ago. All four types of exceptions also contain the times and
corresponding values for the Schedule object to write to the scheduled
objects on those exceptions. The exceptions are also prioritized
1 . . . 16, with 1 being the highest priority. If multiple exceptions apply
for a given day, then the exception with highest priority is in effect.
If multiple exceptions apply for the current day and have the same
priority, then the first of these in the list is in effect. The week/day
selection can be used to identify particular days of the week, months of
the year, etc.
Effective Period
Gives the range of dates that the Schedule object is active. By default,
these dates are unspecified (blank), causing the Schedule object to be
active for all days. Refer to Wildcard Date Fields in this chapter for
further details.
Present Value
Indicates the current value of the Schedule object. This is the value
most recently written to a referenced object attribute, listed in the List
of Prop Refs attribute. A blank Present Value field in a Schedule
object indicates that the schedule has not reached a scheduled time
since the object was created (or since the last device restart).
Dates
Each date contains four fields: Day of Month, Month, Year, and
Day of Week. These fields appear in the following format:
<Day of Month> <Month> <Year> <Day of Week>
The values of the Day of Month and Day of Week fields cannot
contradict each other or the date is not valid. For example, a date of
10 Apr 1999 Tuesday is invalid because April 10, 1999 is not a
Tuesday. Also, the values of a date range (start date, end date) must be
in chronological order or the date range is not valid. For example, a
date range with a start date of 30 Aug 1999 Monday and an end
date of 30 Jun 1999 Wednesday is not valid because
August 1999 comes after June 1999.
Wildcard Date Fields

Any unspecified date field is considered to be a wildcard date field.
Single Date
For a single date, a wildcard opens a particular field to the full range of
possible values for that field. Table 7-1 describes the meaning of a
wildcard in each of the four date fields.
Table 7-1: Wildcard Date Field Meanings

Unspecified Field Meaning
Day of Month Every day of the month, unless a particular day of the
week is specified by the Day of Week field
Month Every month
Year Every year
Day of Week Every day of the week, unless a particular day of the
month is specified by the Day of Month field
Table 7-2 shows some sample wildcard dates and their meanings.
Table 7-2: Sample Wildcard Dates

Wildcard Date Meaning
01 * * Any day of the week The first day of every month, every year
12 Apr * Any day of the week April 12 of every year
* Apr 1999 Any day of the week Every day in April 1999
* * * Any day of the week Every day
* * * Monday Every Monday
* * 1999 Monday Every Monday in 1999
* Apr 1999 Monday Every Monday in April of 1999
12 Apr 1999 Any day of the week Only on Monday, April 12, 1999 (same meaning as 4/12/99Mon)
* Indicates a blank field.
Date Range
If the same field is a wildcard in both the start date and end date, the
range from start to end is infinite, except as limited by the other date
fields. The Day of Week field is only considered when it is specified
for both the start date and the end date. Table 7-3 shows sample
wildcard date ranges and meanings.
Table 7-3: Sample Wildcard Date Ranges

Start Date End Date Meaning
* * * Wednesday * * * Friday Every Wednesday, Thursday, and
Friday of every month, every year
* * 1999 Wednesday * * 1999 Friday Every Wednesday, Thursday, and
Friday of every month in 1999
* Jun 1999 Wednesday * Aug 1999 Friday Every Wednesday, Thursday, and
Friday in June, July, and August
in 1999
* Jun 1999 Any day of * Aug 1999 * Every day in June, July, and August
the week in 1999
30 Aug 1999 Any day of * * * * Every day after August 30, 1999
the week
10 * * Any day of 12 * * * The tenth, eleventh, and twelfth days
the week of every month, every year
04 Jul * Monday 04 Jul * Friday Every July 4 that is a Monday,
Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, or
Friday, every year
Week and Day

The Week and Day selection identifies a month, a week of the month,
and a day of the week. The week of the month can be chosen as
Any (every) week of month, Days 1-7, Days 8-14, Days 15-21,
Days 22-28, Days 29-31, and the Last seven days. Table 7-4 shows
some sample wildcard week and day exceptions.
Table 7-4: Sample Wildcard Week and Days

Month Week of Month Day of Week
Any Any week of Any day of week Every day of the year
month
Any Days 1-7 Monday Monday of the first week of every month
Jan Any week of Tuesday Every Tuesday in January
month
Feb Days 8-14 Any day of week Every day of the week in the second week of February
Any Any week of Wednesday Wednesday of every week of every month
month
Mar Any week of Any day of week Every day of every week in March
month
Any Days 14-21 Any day of week Every day of the third week of every month
Apr Days 22-28 Thursday Thursday in the fourth week of April
Any Days 29-31 Any day of week Last three days of every month with 31 days
Jun Last seven days Saturday Saturday in the last seven days of June
Time Changes
When a time change occurs or the supervisory controller restarts, the
Schedule object attempts to reissue the last value that should have
been scheduled. It searches backwards through the time and value
pairs for the current day to find the last scheduled time. If no times are
found from midnight to the current time, then the latest scheduled
value will be used. Changes in time due to Daylight Saving Time are
also handled in this manner.
Procedure Overview
Table 7-5: Working with Schedule Objects
To Do This: Follow These Steps:
Create a New Schedule Object Add a Schedule object - Browse to and highlight the Schedule container.
Press the F3 (Add) key. Highlight Schedule and press Enter. Fill in the
fields using Table 7-6. Press the F3 (Save) key. Check the User
Add to a List of Prop Refs - Browse to and highlight a Schedule object.
Press Enter. Press the F3 (Edit) key. Move the cursor to the List of Prop
Refs. Press Enter. In the Object Name field that is highlighted, type the
exact name of the object to be scheduled. Press Enter. Move the cursor
to the Attribute field for that object. Use the Spacebar and Backspace
keys to cycle through the list of attributes until the desired attribute
appears. Press the F4 (Back) key. Press the F3 (Save) key. Check the
User Assistance area of the screen to verify if the save was successful or
if there were errors. Press any key to continue. Press the F4 (Cancel) key
Add a Weekly Schedule - Browse to and highlight a Schedule object.
Press Enter. Press the F3 (Edit) key. Move the cursor to Weekly
Schedule. Press Enter. Use the Spacebar and Backspace keys to cycle
through the days of the week until the day you are scheduling appears.
Press the F3 (Add Item) key. Enter the time/value pair in the fields
displayed. Press the F4 (Back) key. Press the F3 (Save) key. Check the
Add an Exception Schedule - In the Schedule container, highlight a
schedule. Press Enter. Press the F3 (Edit) key. Move the cursor to the
Exception Schedule field. Press Enter. Press the Add Item (F3) key. Move
the cursor to Exception Type. Select an exception type . Enter values for
Date and Priority. Press the F4 (Back) key. Press the F3 (Save) key.
Check the User Assistance area of the screen to verify if the save was
F4 (Cancel) key to return to the container hierarchy.
Set an Effective Period for an Object - Browse to and highlight a
Schedule object. Press Enter. Press the F3 (Edit) key. Move the cursor to
Effective Period and press Enter. Enter the starting and ending dates the
Weekly schedule should be active. Press the F4 (Back) key. Press the
F3 (Save) key. Check the User Assistance area of the screen to verify if
Edit a Schedule Object Edit a List of Prop Refs - Browse to and highlight a Schedule object.
Press Enter. Press the F3 (Edit) key. Move the cursor to the List of Prop
Refs. Press Enter. Highlight the Object Name that you want to edit. Type
the exact name of the new object you want to schedule. Move the cursor
to the Attribute field for that object. Use the Spacebar and Backspace
keys to cycle through the list of attributes until the desired attribute
appears. Press the F4 (Back) key. Press the F3 (Save) key. Check the

Edit a Schedule Object (Cont.) Delete from a List of Prop Refs - Browse to and highlight a Schedule
object. Press Enter. Press the F3 (Edit) key. Move the cursor to the List of
Prop Refs. Press Enter. Highlight the Object Name to delete. Press the
F2 (Del Item) key. Press the F4 (Back) key. Press the F3 (Save) key.
Edit a Weekly Schedule - Browse to and highlight a Schedule object.
through and select the day of the week. Move the cursor to the time and
value pairs. Edit the fields as desired. Press the F4 (Back) key. Press the
Edit an Exception Schedule - Browse to and highlight a Schedule
object. Press Enter. Press the F3 (Edit) key. Move the cursor to Exception
Schedule and press Enter. Use the Spacebar or Backspace key to select
an exception schedule. Highlight Exception Type. Cycle through the
available exception types. Use the cursor to move to the other fields and
edit as desired. Press the F4 (Back) key. Press the F3 (Save) key. Press
any key to continue. Press the F4 (Cancel) key.
Add Time and Value Pairs to an Exception Schedule - Browse to and
highlight a Schedule object. Press Enter. Press the F3 (Edit) key. Move
the cursor to Exception Schedule. Press Enter. Use the Spacebar and
Backspace keys to cycle through and select the Exception Schedule
where you want to add time and value pairs. Place the cursor on any of
the fields that appear except the number of Exception Schedules. Press
the F3 (Add Item) key. In the Time field, type the desired time. In the
Value field, press the Spacebar or Backspace key to select On or Off.
Press the F4 (Back) key. Press the F3 (Save) key. Press any key to
continue. Press the F4 (Cancel) key.
Delete Time and Value Pairs from an Exception Schedule - Browse to
and highlight a Schedule object. Press Enter. Press the F3 (Edit) key.
Move the cursor to Exception Schedule. Press Enter. Use the Spacebar
and Backspace keys to cycle through and select the Exception Schedule
where you want to delete time and value pairs. Place the cursor on a time
and value pair. Press the F2 (Delete Item) key. Press the F4 (Back) key.
Press the F3 (Save) key.
Commanding a Schedule Browse to and highlight a Schedule object. Press the F2 (Command) key.
Object Use the Spacebar and Backspace keys to cycle through the available
commands. Press Enter.
Delete a Schedule Object Delete a Weekly Schedule - Browse to and highlight a Schedule object.
through the days of the week. Move the cursor to each time and value
pair. Press the F2 (Item Del) key for each time and value pair. Press the
F4 (Back) key. Press the F3 (Save) key. Press any key to continue. Press
the F4 (Cancel) key.
Delete an Exception Schedule - Browse to and highlight a Schedule
object. Press Enter. Press the F3 (Edit) key. Move the cursor to Exception
Schedule and press Enter. Use the Spacebar and Backspace keys to
cycle to the Exception Schedule that you want to delete. Press the Del
Item (F2) key. Press the F4 (Back) key. Press the F3 (Save) key. Press
any key to continue. Press the F4 (Cancel) key.
Delete a Schedule Object - Browse to and highlight a Schedule. Press
Enter. Press the Delete key. Press the Tab key to confirm the deletion.
Detailed Procedures
Creating a New Schedule
Creating a new schedule consists of adding a Schedule object, adding
the objects and the attributes of those objects (List of Prop Refs) that
you are scheduling, and then creating a weekly Schedule for those
items. Additional tasks that can be part of creating a new schedule are
adding exceptions to the schedule, and setting an effective period for
the Schedule or the exceptions. All of these tasks are covered in this
section, Creating a New Schedule.
To add a Schedule object:

1. Browse to and highlight the Schedule container.
3. Highlight Schedule and press Enter. The Schedule object attribute
Figure 7-1: New Schedule Object Screen


Screen Area Attribute Required Default Options/ Range
name.
Object Type Yes Calendar The default is preset and cannot be
changed.
Object Yes HVAC Use the Spacebar and Backspace key to
Category view and select options: HVAC, Fire,
Security, Services, Administrative.
Scheduling List of Prop Yes [0] Items See the appropriate sections of this
Values Refs chapter.
Weekly Yes [7] Items See the appropriate sections of this
Schedule chapter.
Exception Yes [0] Items See the appropriate sections of this
Schedule chapter.
Effective Yes [2] Items See the appropriate sections of this
Period chapter.

8. Press the F4 (Back) key to return to the container hierarchy.
Note: Now that you have a Schedule object you need to add the
objects to be scheduled. See Adding to a List of Prop Refs in
this chapter.
Adding to a List of Prop Refs
IMPORTANT: All objects scheduled by a Schedule object must reside

on the same N30. The first object in the List of Prop
Refs determines which N30. The Schedule object itself
may or may not be located on this N30.
Notes: Prior to adding to a List of Prop Refs you should have a list
of the exact names of the objects that you are scheduling.
A Schedule object can indirectly schedule objects on
multiple N30s by scheduling a Multiple Command object,
which commands objects on multiple devices. For more
information, see the Working with Multiple Command
Objects (LIT-6892170) chapter in this manual.
To add objects and attributes to a List of Prop Refs:
1. Browse to and highlight the Schedule object.
4. Move the cursor to the List of Prop Refs.
5. Press Enter. The List of Prop Refs appears (Figure 7-2).
6. In the Object Name field that is highlighted, type the exact name
of the object to be scheduled.
7. If the object is valid, use the arrow or Tab key to move the cursor
to the attribute field. If the object name is invalid, you receive an
Object not found message. If you receive this message you
must retype a valid object name.
8. Use the Spacebar and Backspace keys to cycle through the list of
attributes until the desired attribute appears. The default value is
Present Value.
Figure 7-2: List of Prop Refs

9. Press the F3 (Add Item) key to add a blank entry for an additional
object and attribute.
10. Repeat Steps 6 through 10 for each object being added to the List
of Prop Refs.
IMPORTANT: Once you save entries in the List of Prop Refs, you can
no longer edit the first entry in the list (the object
device). You cannot change an existing Schedule
object to schedule points on a different N30; you must
delete the entire schedule and add a new one.
Adding a Weekly Schedule

To add a Weekly Schedule:
1. Browse to and highlight a Schedule object.
4. Move the cursor to the Weekly Schedule.
5. Press Enter. A new Weekly Schedule screen appears (Figure 7-3).
Note: You cannot add a weekly schedule unless there is something to
be scheduled in the List of Prop Refs.
Figure 7-3: Weekly Schedule Screen

6. Use the Spacebar and Backspace keys to cycle through and select
the day of the week for the schedule entry.
7. Press the F3 (Add Item) key.
8. Add the time/value pair in the fields displayed. Press the Tab key
to move between the Time and Value fields.
9. To add another entry, repeat Steps 6 through 8.
10. Press the F4 (Back) key to return to the previous screen.
Adding an Exception Schedule

To add an Exception Schedule:
4. Move the cursor to the Exception Schedule field.
5. Press Enter. The Exception Schedule appears (Figure 7-1).
Figure 7-4: Schedule Object Exception Schedule

6. Press the Add Item (F3) key. The Exception Schedule screen
appears.
7. Use the Spacebar and Backspace keys to cycle through the
Exception Type options (Table 7-7).
Table 7-7: Exception Schedule Types

Exception Type Setting
Single Date Enter the date to run the Exception schedule instead of the current schedule.
Date Range Enter the range of dates to run the Exception schedule instead of the current schedule.
Week and Day Enter a recurring week and day of the month to run the Exception schedule instead of
the current schedule.
Calendar Ref Enter a reference to an existing Calendar object that determines the dates to run the
Exception schedule instead of the current schedule. This exception must be a valid
Calendar object name.
8. Use the Tab or arrow keys to move to the remaining fields. Either
type in all values, or use the number keys to enter dates and the
Spacebar and the Backspace key to change days and months.
Note: Pressing the F3 (Add) key at this point adds Time and Value
pairs to the Exception Schedule. Information on adding and
deleting Time and Value pairs is under the Editing Schedule
Objects section of this chapter.
9. Repeat Steps 6 through 8 for each new Exception Schedule.
Setting an Effective Period for a Schedule Object

To set an Effective Period for a Schedule object:
4. Move the cursor to Effective Period.
5. Press Enter. The Effective Period screen appears (Figure 7-5).
Figure 7-5: Effective Period Screen

6. Enter the starting and ending dates the Weekly schedule should be
active. Use the number keys to enter dates and the Spacebar and
the Backspace key to change days and months.
10. Press any key to to continue.
Editing Schedule Objects

Note: Editing a Schedule can include editing the objects and the
attributes of those objects (List of Prop Refs) that you have
already scheduled, editing a weekly Schedule for those items,
editing exceptions to the schedule, and editing the effective
periods of the various schedules.
Editing a List of Prop Refs
IMPORTANT: When entries are put in the List of Prop Refs and
saved, you can no longer edit the first entry in the list
(the object device). You cannot change an existing
Schedule object to schedule points on a different N30;
you must delete the entire schedule and add a new one.
To edit a List of Prop Refs:
1. Browse to and highlight the Schedule object.
4. Move the cursor to List of Prop Refs.
6. Highlight an Object Name that you want to edit.
7. In the Object Name field that is highlighted, type the exact name
of the object to be scheduled.
8. If the object is valid, use the arrow or Tab key to move the cursor
to the attribute field. If the object name is invalid, you receive an
Object not found message. If you receive this message, you
must retype a valid object name.
9. Use the Spacebar and Backspace keys to cycle through the list of
attributes until the desired attribute appears. The default value is
Present Value.
Deleting from a List of Prop Refs

To delete from a List of Prop Refs:
4. Move the cursor to the List of Prop Refs.
6. Highlight the Object Name to delete.
7. Press the F2 (Del Item) key.
8. Repeat Steps 6 and 7 for each object you want to delete.
Editing a Weekly Schedule

To edit a Weekly Schedule:
4. Move the cursor to Weekly Schedule.
5. Press Enter. The Weekly Schedule screen appears (Figure 7-6).
Figure 7-6: Weekly Schedule with Time and Value Pair

6. Use the Spacebar or the Backspace key to select the day of the
week that contains the schedule you want to change.
7. Use the arrow or Tab keys to move the cursor to a time and value
pair that you want to edit.
8. Edit the fields as desired.
9. Press the F3 (Add) key to add Time and Value pairs to the weekly
schedule.
10. To change another schedule, repeat Steps 6 through 9.
Editing an Exception Schedule

To edit an Exception Schedule:
4. Move the cursor to Exception Schedule.
5. Press Enter. The Exception Schedule screen appears (Figure 7-7).
Figure 7-7: Exception Schedule Edit Screen

6. Use the Spacebar or Backspace key to cycle through the available
exception schedules until the one you want to edit appears.
Note: The number of Exception schedules you are cycling through is
listed. The example in Figure 7-7 shows the second of three
available Exception schedules.
7. To change the Exception type, use the arrow or Tab keys to select
the Exception Type field. Use the Spacebar and Backspace keys to
cycle through the Exception Type options. See Table 7-7.
8. To edit other fields, use the Tab or arrow keys to move to the
fields. Either type in all values, or use the number keys to enter
dates and the Spacebar and the Backspace key to change days and
months.

Adding Time and Value Pairs to an Exception Schedule

To add time and value pairs to an Exception Schedule:
6. Use the Spacebar and Backspace keys to cycle to the Exception
Schedule where you want to add Time and Value pairs.
7. Place the cursor on any of the fields that appear except the number
of Exception Schedules.
8. Press the F3 (Add Item) key. The Time and Value fields appear
(Figure 7-8).
9. In the Time field, type the desired time.
10. In the Value field, press the Spacebar or Backspace key to select
On or Off.
Note: Enter as many Time and Value pairs as you need.
11. Repeat Steps 7 through 10 for each pair.
Figure 7-8: Adding a Time and Value to an Attribute Screen
Deleting Time and Value Pairs from an Exception Schedule

To delete time and value pairs from an Exception Schedule:
5. Press Enter. The Exception Schedule appears (Figure 7-8).
6. Use the Spacebar and Backspace keys to cycle through and select
the Exception Schedule that you want to delete time and value
pairs from.
7. Place the cursor on a time and value pair.
8. Press the F2 (Delete Item) key.
9. Repeat Steps 6 through 8 for each pair you wish to delete.
Commanding Schedule Objects

To command a Schedule object:
3. Use the Spacebar and Backspace keys to cycle through the
available commands. The Schedule object supports the commands
described in Table 7-8.
Table 7-8: Supported Commands

Command Description
Enable Allows the Schedule object to resume normal scheduling
operation.
Disable Halts all future scheduled times. Neither the weekly nor the
exception schedules will run again, until the Schedule object is
re-enabled.
4. Press Enter.
Deleting Schedule Objects

Note: Deleting Schedule objects can include deleting Weekly
Schedules, deleting Exception Schedules from Schedule
objects or deleting the Schedule object itself. Deleting items
from a List of Prop Refs or an Exception Schedule is covered
in the Editing Schedule Objects section of this chapter.
Deleting a Weekly Schedule

To delete a Weekly Schedule:
4. Move the cursor to Weekly Schedule.
5. Press Enter. The Weekly Schedule appears (Figure 7-3).
6. Use the Spacebar or the Backspace key to select the day of the
week that contains the schedule you want to change.
7. Move the cursor to the first time and value pair.

8. Press the F2 (Item Del) key.
9. Repeat Steps 7 and 8 for each time and value pair in the weekly
schedule you are deleting.
Note: The seven days of the week are always available in the weekly
schedule. Deleting a weekly schedule means you have removed
all schedule time and value pairs from that schedule.
Deleting an Exception Schedule

To delete an Exception Schedule:
6. Use the Spacebar and Tab keys to cycle to the Exception Schedule
you want to delete.
7. Press the F2 (Delete) key.
8. Repeat Steps 5 through 7 for each Exception Schedule you want
to delete.
Deleting a Schedule Object

To delete a Schedule object:
Chapter 8
Working with Calendar Objects T
Introduction
Calendar objects allow a user to accommodate for a special day or
days, such as a holiday, in which the building controls should run in a
different way than usual. For instance, users can configure a Calendar
object for days when there is a change in the number of people or in
the amount of activity in the building.
• add a Calendar object
• edit a Calendar object
• add Date List entries to a Calendar object
• delete Date List entries from a Calendar object
• command a Calendar object
• delete a Calendar object
For information on creating and editing Calendar objects in Project
Builder, see the Project Builder User’s Guide. For information on
viewing and editing Calendars using M-Calendar, see the
M-Schedule/M-Calendar User’s Guide.

Key Concepts
Calendar Object
The Calendar object maintains a list of dates designated as exceptions
to the normal schedule. A Schedule object working from a chosen
Calendar reads the Present Value of the Calendar object to determine
if the current day is within the Date List of the Calendar.
Single or multiple Schedule objects can work from the same Calendar
object, allowing a user to reference a defined Calendar object, such as
a holiday calendar, from any Schedule object. When a new day is
added to the Calendar object, all the schedules working from the
Calendar object are updated at the same time.
Attributes
The Calendar object attributes described below are listed in the order
For additional information about the Calendar object and its attributes,
refer to Object Dictionary.
Object Name
Description
Object Type
Calendar.
Object Category
Enabled
Date List
List dates defined as entries to the Calendar object. Each entry may
either be an individual date, range of dates, or
month/week-of-month/day-of-week specification. If the current date
matches any calendar entry, the Present Value is set to True. Also,
individual fields of an entry can be left unspecified, thus acting as a
wildcard if necessary.
Each date contains four fields: Day of Month, Month, Year, and
Day of Week. These fields appear in the following format:
<Day of Month> <Month> <Year> <Day of Week>
The values of the Day of Month and Day of Week fields cannot
contradict each other or the date is not valid. For example, a date of
10 Apr 1999 Tuesday does not schedule because April 10, 1999
is not a Tuesday. Also, the values of a date range (start date, end date)
must be in chronological order or the date range is not valid. For
example, a date range with a start date of 30 Aug 1999 Monday
and an end date of 30 Jun 1999 Wednesday is not valid because
August 30, 1999 comes after June 30, 1999.
Wildcard Date Fields

Any unspecified date field is considered to be a wildcard date field.
Single Date
For a single date, a wildcard opens a particular field to the full range of
possible values for that field. Table 8-1 describes the meaning of a
wildcard in each of the four date fields.
Table 8-1: Wildcard Date Field Meanings

Wildcard Field Meaning
Day of Month Every day of the month, unless a particular day of the
week is specified by the Day of Week field
Month Every month
Year Every year
Day of Week Every day of the week, unless a particular day of the
month is specified by the Day of Month field
Table 8-2 shows some sample wildcard dates and their meanings.
Table 8-2: Sample Wildcard Dates

01 * * Any day of week The first day of every month, every year
12 Apr * Any day of week April 12 of every year
* Apr 1999 Any day of week Every day in April 1999
* * * Any day of week Every day
* * * Monday Every Monday
* * 1999 Monday Every Monday in 1999
* Apr 1999 Monday Every Monday in April of 1999
12 Apr 1999 Any day of week Only on Monday, April 12, 1999 (same meaning as 4/12/99Mon)
Date Range
If the same field is a wildcard in both the start date and end date, the
range from start to end is infinite, except as limited by the other date
fields. The Day of Week field is only considered when it is specified
for both the start date and the end date. Table 8-3 shows sample
wildcard date ranges and meanings.
Table 8-3: Sample Wildcard Date Ranges

Start Date End Date Meaning
* * * Wednesday * * * Friday Every Wednesday, Thursday, and Friday
of every month, every year
* * 1999 Wednesday * * 1999 Friday Every Wednesday, Thursday, and Friday
of every month in 1999
* Jun 1999 Wednesday * Aug 1999 Friday Every Wednesday, Thursday, and Friday
in June, July, and August in 1999
* Jun 1999 Any day of * Aug 1999 Any Every day in June, July, and August in
week day of 1999
week
30 Aug 1999 Any day of * * * Any Every day after August 30, 1999
week day of
week
10 * * Any day of 12 * * Any The tenth, eleventh, and twelfth days of
week day of every month, every year
week
04 Jul * Monday 04 Jul * Friday Every July 4 that is a Monday, Tuesday,
Wednesday, Thursday, or Friday, every
year
Week and Day

The Week and Day selection identifies a month, a week of the month,
and a day of the week. The week of the month can be chosen as Any
(every) week of month, Days 1-7, Days 8-14, Days 15-21, Days 22-28,
Days 29-31, and the Last seven days. Table 8-4 shows some sample
wildcard week and day exceptions.
Table 8-4: Sample Wildcard Week and Days

Month Week of Month Day of Week
Any Any week of Any day of week Every day of the year
month
Any Days 1-7 Monday Monday of the first week of every month
Jan Any week of Tuesday Every Tuesday in January
month
Feb Days 8-14 Any day of week Every day of the week in the second week of February
Any Any week of Wednesday Wednesday of every week of every month
month
Mar Any week of Any day of week Every day of every week in March
month
Any Days 14-21 Any day of week Every day of the third week of every month
Apr Days 22-28 Thursday Thursday in the fourth week of April
Any Days 29-31 Any day of week Last three days of every month with 31 days
Jun Last seven days Saturday Saturday in the last seven days of June
Procedure Overview
Table 8-5: Working with Calendar Objects
Add a Calendar Object Browse to and highlight the Schedule container. Press the F3 (Add) key.
Highlight Calendar and press Enter. Fill in the fields using Table 8-6.
Move the cursor to Date List. Press Enter. Press the F3 (Add Item) key.
Use the Spacebar and Backspace key to view and select options and set
date parameters. Press the F3 (Add Item) key to add a blank entry. Press
the F4 (Back) key to return to the attribute screen. Press the F3 (Save)
key. Check the User Assistance area of the screen to verify if the save
was successful or if there were errors. Press any key to continue. Press
the F4 (Cancel) key to return to the container hierarchy.
Edit a Calendar Object Browse to and highlight a Calendar object. Press Enter to open the object.
Press the F3 (Edit) key. Edit the fields using Table 8-6. Press the
Add Date List Entries to a Browse to and highlight a Calendar object. Press Enter to open the object.
Calendar Object Press the F3 (Edit) key. Move the cursor to Date List. Press Enter. Press
the F3 (Add Item) key to add a blank entry. Use the Spacebar and
Backspace key to view and select options and set date parameters. Press
the F4 (Back) key to return to the attribute screen. Press the F3 (Save)
Delete Date List Entries from a Browse to and highlight a Calendar object. Press Enter to open the object.
Calendar Object Press the F3 (Edit) key. Move the cursor to Date List. Press Enter.
Highlight the calendar entry to be deleted. Press the F2 (Del Item) key.
Press the F4 (Back) key to return to the attribute screen. Press the
Command a Calendar Object Browse to and highlight a Calendar object. Press the F2 (Command) key.
Use the Spacebar and Backspace key to cycle through the list until the
desired command appears. Press Enter.
Delete a Calendar Object Browse to and highlight a Calendar object. Press Enter to open the object.
Press the Delete key. Press the Tab key to confirm the deletion.
Detailed Procedures
Adding a Calendar Object
To add a Calendar object:
1. Browse to and highlight the Schedule container.
3. Highlight Calendar and press Enter. The Calendar object attribute
Figure 8-1: Calendar Object Attribute Screen


Screen Area Attribute Required Default Options/ Range
name.
Object Type Yes Calendar The default is preset and cannot be
changed.
Security, Services, Administrative
Engineering Date List Yes [0] Items Use the Spacebar and Backspace key to
Values view and select options: Single Date, Date
Range, Week and Day. Refer to Table 8-1,
Table 8-2, Table 8-3, and Table 8-4.
5. Move the cursor to Date List.

6. Press Enter.
7. Press the F3 (Add Item) key. The Calendar object Date List
Figure 8-2: Calendar Object Date List

8. Use the Spacebar and Backspace key to view and select options
and set date parameters. Refer to Table 8-1, Table 8-2, Table 8-3,
and Table 8-4.
10. Repeat Steps 8 and 9 until all Date List entries have been added.
11. Press the F4 (Back) key to return to the attribute screen.
Editing a Calendar Object

To edit a Calendar object:
Note: To delete or add Date List entries, refer to the appropriate
sections of this chapter.
1. Browse to and highlight a Calendar object.
3. Press the F3 (Edit) key. The Calendar object attribute screen
Adding Date List Entries to a Calendar Object

To add Date List entries to a Calendar object:

5. Press Enter. The Calendar object Date List appears (Figure 8-2).
7. Use the Spacebar and Backspace key to view and select options
and set date parameters. Refer to Table 8-1, Table 8-2, Table 8-3,
and Table 8-4.
8. Repeat Steps 6 and 7 for each entry to be added.
Deleting Date List Entries from a Calendar Object

To delete Date List entries from a Calendar object:
5. Press Enter. The Calendar object Date List appears (Figure 8-2).
6. Highlight the calendar entry to be deleted.
8. Repeat Steps 6 and 7 for each entry to be removed from the list.
Commanding a Calendar Object

To command a Calendar object:
1. Browse to and highlight the Calendar object.
the desired command appears. The Calendar object supports the
commands described in Table 8-7.

Command Description
Enable Compares the current day with the entries within the calendar
and reevaluates the Present Value based on the results.
Disable Forces the Present Value of the object to the False state.
4. Press Enter.
Deleting a Calendar Object

To delete a Calendar object:
Chapter 9
Working with Optimal Start

Objects T
Introduction
The Optimal Start (OST) feature reduces energy consumption by
keeping a facility in its unoccupied mode for as long as possible
(for example, in the morning) and putting it in unoccupied mode as
soon as possible (for example, at night), without sacrificing comfort.
• add an Optimal Start object
• edit an Optimal Start object
• command an Optimal Start object
• delete an Optimal Start object

Key Concepts
Optimal Start Object
The goal of Optimal Start is to reach either the Heating setpoint or
Cooling setpoint at occupancy. (The Optimal Start object selects the
appropriate setpoint depending on current temperature.) To meet this
goal, the Optimal Start object calculates:
• building Heating and Cooling constants that represent the rate at
which the temperature inside the building changes
• temperature differences between the Zone Temperature and the
Heating setpoint or Cooling setpoint
• how many minutes of precooling or preheating are required based
on the above difference
• optimal start time when the Zone WC (Warmup/Cooldown) Mode
object is controlled by the optimal start process
The Optimal Start object interacts with Schedule objects, N2 Binary
objects, and N2 Analog objects in an Optimal Start application. For
more information, refer to Appendix C: Building an Optimal Start
Application (LIT-6892330) in this document.
Optimal Start Equation

The following equation illustrates how the optimal start time is
derived:
Heating or Cooling Constant * (Temperature Differential)2 + Deadtime = Optimal Start Time
Table 9-1: Optimal Start Equation Variables

Variable Description
Heating or Cooling This variable is the building Heating or Cooling
Constant Constant parameter divided by 100.
Temperature This variable is the difference between the Zone
Differential Temperature and the Heating Setpoint or Cooling
Setpoint.
Units = delta deg F or delta deg K
Deadtime This variable is the amount of time required to raise or
lower the Zone Temperature 1.0 degree.
Units = minutes
Optimal Start Example

For an example of the optimal start process, assume:
• The Zone Occ (Occupied) Mode object is scheduled weekly to
start at 7:00 a.m. and stop at 5:00 p.m.
• Zone Temperature = 55°F
• Heating Setpoint = 70°F
• Deadtime = 5 minutes
• Building Heating Constant (since in Heating mode) = 10
(The optimal start process has run for several days, and the
building Heating Constant has been adjusted to 10 based on past
performance.)
• Temperature Differential = 70°F - 55°F = 15°F
• Heating Constant = 10/100 = 0.1
Therefore:
• Optimal Start Time = 0.1 * (15)2 + 5
= 0.1 * 225 + 5
= 22.5 + 5
= 27.5
= 28 minutes
The optimal start process turns on the Zone WC (Warmup/Cooldown)
Mode object at 6:32 a.m. (28 minutes prior to the scheduled 7:00 a.m.
start time.)
Optimal Stop
The goal of optimal stop is to set the heating/cooling zone to vacant
zone temperature settings prior to actual zone vacancy. It must do this
while the zone is still occupied without causing comfort level alarms.
The Optimal Start object calculates the number of minutes before the
zone changes from occupied to vacant. It then uses the same equation
for deriving the optimal start time to determine the earliest stop time.
To ensure occupancy comfort, it sets the temperature differential to the
edited Temp (Temperature) Differential attribute.
Adaptation
Each day, at occupancy, the optimal start process adapts the building
Heating and Cooling Constant. It checks if the Zone Temperature
converged to within the edited temperature differential of the Heating
setpoint or Cooling setpoint. If the Zone Temperature did not
converge, the building Heating and/or Cooling Constants are
increased. This increase moves the optimal start time closer to the
earliest start time defined for the system. If the Zone Temperature
converges to within the edited Temperature Differential of the Heating
setpoint or Cooling setpoint prior to occupancy, the buildings Heating
and/or Cooling constants are decreased. This decrease moves the
optimal start time closer to the occupancy start time defined for the
system.
Attributes
The values of an object’s attributes determine how the object will
operate. The Optimal Start object attributes described below are listed
in the order that they appear on the screen.
For additional information about the Optimal Start object and its
attributes, refer to the Object Dictionary.
Object Name
Description
Object Type
Optimal Start.
Object Category
Classifies the object to aid in the determination of user access
capability and message routing.
OST Type
Defines the supported configuration. When the zone is in a mode not
available as an OST Type and not supported by the Optimal Start
object, the Present Value is Idle.
Enabled
Indicates if an object is active and executing an operational condition.
Adaptation Enabled
Indicates whether the Optimal Start object should use adaptive
learning to change the building heating and cooling constants and
cooling and heating deadtimes.
Zone Schedule Obj (Zone Schedule Object)

Identifies the object that schedules the Zone Occupied Mode object.
This object must be defined in the schedule and have valid start and
stop times for the current day for the Optimal Start object to run.
Zone Occ Mode Obj (Zone Occupied Mode Object)

Identifies the object used to command a zone to occupied or
unoccupied. This object must be specified in the zone schedule. It is
commanded by scheduling to Occupied and by the Optimal Start
object if the Maximum Prestop attribute is enabled.
Zone WC Mode Obj (Zone Warmup/Cooldown Mode Object)

Identifies the object used to command a zone to Warmup or Cooldown
mode. This object may be the same as the Zone Occupied Mode
object. This object is commanded by the Optimal Start object at the
optimal start time, and may be released at the occupied time.
Cooling Setpoint
Identifies the attribute of an object used to define the zone occupied
target cooling temperature. This object may be the same as the Heating
Setpoint object.
Heating Setpoint
Identifies the attribute of an object used to define the zone occupied
target heating temperature. This object may be the same as the Cooling
Setpoint object.
Zone Temperature
Identifies the attribute of an object used to determine the actual zone
temperature.
Outdoor Air Temp

Identifies the attribute of an object used to determine the actual outside
air temperature. If this attribute is not specified, or is offline, the
outdoor air temperature is not used in the Optimal Start object’s
calculations and it is assumed to be within the design temperatures.
Cooling Design Temp

Indicates the highest outside temperature at which the cooling system
maintains zone comfort in the Cooling mode. The default units
(Imperial or SI) of this attribute are based on the Default Base Units
attribute in the Device object.
Heating Design Temp

Indicates the lowest outside temperature at which the heating system
maintains zone comfort in the Heating mode. The default units
(Imperial or SI) of this attribute are based on the Default Base Units
attribute in the Device object.
Min (Minimum) Prestart Time

Lists the minimum period of time before occupancy to start the
heating/cooling system. This time allows for the required amount of
air changes in the zone prior to occupancy (latest optimal start time).
Max (Maximum) Prestart Time

Lists the maximum period of time required to bring the zone up to
occupancy setpoint temperature under the worst conditions (earliest
optimal start time).
Max (Maximum) Prestop Time

Lists the maximum period of time that the heating/cooling system can
be shut down and still maintain the occupied zone temperature until
entering the unoccupied mode (earliest optimal stop time). By setting
this time to zero (the default value), optimal stop is disabled.
Temperature Units
Lists the units associated with the attributes for temperatures.
The default units of this attribute are determined by the default base
units attribute in the Device object. These attributes are:
• Cooling Design Temperature
• Heating Design Temperature
• Zone Temperature at Start
• Temperature Differential
Relative Temp Units

Units associated with the Temp Differential attribute.
Display Precision
Indicates the rounded position and decimal places to display for this
object.
Cooling Constant
Defines the rate at which the zone cools down after equipment startup.
If adaptation is enabled, this constant is adapted without user
intervention. If adapting and cooling and heating setpoints are the
same attribute, the cooling constant is adapted even if the mode
is not cooling, meaning both constants change.
Cooling Deadtime
Lists the time required after startup to lower the temperature by one
degree. The Optimal Start object’s algorithm adapts this value, if
adaptation is enabled. If adapting and cooling and heating setpoints are
the same attribute, the cooling deadtime is adapted even if the mode is
not cooling, meaning both deadtimes change.
Heating Constant
Defines the rate at which the zone heats up after equipment startup.
If adaptation is enabled, this constant is adapted without user
intervention. This attribute does not have a unit. If adapting and
cooling and heating setpoints are the same attribute, the heating
constant is adapted even if the mode is not heating, meaning both
constants will change.
Heating Deadtime
Lists the time required after startup to raise the temperature by one
degree. The Optimal Start object’s algorithm adapts this value, if
adaptation is enabled. If adapting and cooling and heating setpoints are
the same attribute, the heating deadtime is adapted even if the mode is
not heating, meaning both deadtimes change.
Temp (Temperature) Differential

Lists the temperature value added to and subtracted from the zone
setpoint to define a deadband used in the Optimal Start object’s
calculations.
Present Value
Represents the current value of the object. Present Value appears to the
right of the object name in the container hierarchy after the object is
created.
Possible values are:
• Idle - Waiting for next occupied time for a supported mode
(heating or cooling).
• Prestart Heating – Heating Optimal Start time is pending.
• Prestart Cooling – Cooling Optimal Start time is pending.
• Calculating Deadtime – Valid only if Adaption Enabled.
• Calculating Constant – Valid only if Adaption Enabled.
• Occupied
• Prestop – Waiting to reach optimal stop time.
• Not Operational – Optimal Start object is not operational due to
errors in its connection status to other required objects. You can
determine the specific problem by viewing the other status
attributes. The Optimal Start object is Not Operational if the Zone
Occ Mode Obj attribute is in the schedule, but there are no valid
start and stop times for that day.
Procedure Overview
Table 9-2: Working with Optimal Start Objects
Add an Optimal Start Object Browse to and highlight the Energy container. Press the F3 (Add) key.
Highlight Optimal Start and press Enter. Fill in the fields using Table 9-3.
Press the F3 (Save) key to save the object. Check the User Assistance
area of the screen to verify if the save was successful or if there were
errors. Press any key to continue. Press the F4 (Cancel) key to return to
the container hierarchy.
Edit an Optimal Start Object Browse to and highlight an Optimal Start object. Press Enter to open the
Command an Optimal Start Browse to and highlight an Optimal Start object. Press the F2 (Command)
Object key. Use the Spacebar or the Backspace key to cycle through the list until
the desired command appears. Press Enter.
Delete an Optimal Start Object Browse to and highlight an Optimal Start object. Press Enter to open the
Detailed Procedures
Adding an Optimal Start Object
To add an Optimal Start object:
1. Browse to and highlight the Energy container.
3. Highlight Optimal Start and press Enter. The first of two Optimal
Start object attribute screens appears (Figure 9-1).
Note: Use the [ and ] keys to page to other screens.
Figure 9-1: Optimal Start Object Attribute Screen (1 of 2)

Figure 9-2: Optimal Start Object Attribute Screen (2 of 2)


Area
Invalid characters: @ . ? * $ # : ‘ [ ]
If not completed, the system assigns a name.
Object Type Yes Optimal Start Default is preset and cannot be changed.
OST Type Yes Heating/Cooling Use the Spacebar and Backspace key to
view and select options: Cooling Only,
Heating/Cooling, Heating Only.

Area
(Cont.)
Control Adaptation Yes True Use the Spacebar and Backspace key to
Enabled view and select options: True = Enabled;
False = Not enabled.
Zone Schedule Yes Blank Name of the Schedule object scheduling the
Object Zone Occ Mode Obj
Zone Occ Yes Blank Name of the object used to command a zone
Mode Object to occupied or unoccupied
Zone WC Yes Blank Name of the object used to command a zone
Mode Object to Warmup or Cooldown mode. It may be the
same as the Zone Occ Mode Obj.
Cooling Yes (unless Blank Name of the object and analog attribute used
Setpoint Heating to define the zone occupied target cooling
Only) temperature
Heating Yes (unless Blank Name of the object and analog attribute used
Setpoint Cooling to define the zone occupied target heating
Only) temperature
Zone Yes Blank Name of the object and analog attribute used
Temperature to determine the zone temperature
Outdoor Air No Blank Name of the object and analog attribute used
Temp to determine the outside air temperature
Setup Cooling Design Yes 95.0 deg F or Minimum Value = -20
Temp 35.0 deg C Maximum Value = 120
Units = Temperature Units
Heating Yes -5.0 deg F or Minimum Value = -35
Design Temp -20.0 deg C Maximum Value = 90
Units = Temperature Units
Min Prestart Yes 20 minute Minimum Value = 0
Time Maximum Value = 240
Units = Minutes
Max Prestart Yes 120 minute Minimum Value = 5
Units = Minutes
Max Prestop Yes 0 minute Minimum Value = 0
Units = Minutes
Display Yes 10ths Use the Spacebar and Backspace key to
Precision view and select options. Refer to Display
Precision Enumeration Set in Appendix A:
Object Enumeration Sets of the Object
Dictionary (LIT-694980).
Cooling Yes 5.0 Minimum Value = 1
Constant Maximum Value = 999
Cooling Yes 10 minute Minimum Value = 5
Deadtime Maximum Value = 480
Units = Minutes
Heating Yes 10.0 Minimum Value = 1
Constant Maximum Value = 999
Heating Yes 10 minute Minimum Value = 5
Deadtime Maximum Value = 480
Units = Minutes

Editing an Optimal Start Object

To edit an Optimal Start object:
1. Browse to and highlight an Optimal Start object.
3. Press the F3 (Edit) key. The first of the two Optimal Start object
attribute screen appears (Figure 9-1 and Figure 9-2).
Commanding an Optimal Start Object

To command an Optimal Start object:
2. Press the F2 (Command) key. The Optimal Start Command field
appears.
until the desired command appears. The Optimal Start object
supports the commands described in Table 9-4.

Command Description
Cancel Prestart Delays pending start until latest prestart time. Only valid
during Prestart and before the Optimal Start time.
Cancel Prestop Cancels the pending stop. Only valid during Prestop and
before the Optimal Stop time.
Enable Allows the object to perform its calculations once a minute.
Disable Prevents the object’s functionality, no calculations take
place.
4. Press Enter.
Deleting an Optimal Start Object

To delete an Optimal Start object:
Chapter 10
Working with Temporary

Occupancy Objects T
Introduction
The Temporary Occupancy (Temp Occ) object gives users the
capability to temporarily override the current state of a multistate
object for a specified period of time.
• add a Temporary Occupancy object
• edit a Temporary Occupancy object
• command a Temporary Occupancy object
• delete a Temporary Occupancy object

Key Concepts
Temporary Occupancy Object Operation
Upon receipt of the temporary occupancy request, the Temporary
Occupancy object sends a write attribute message, at a higher priority
than the scheduling feature, to the specified object. The overridden
point then stays occupied until the timer expires, or the user cancels
the occupancy request.
Attributes
Present Value
This is the current state of the Temporary Occupancy object’s
occupancy timer. A value of Active means the timer is active, and a
value of Inactive means the timer is inactive.
Occupancy Time
This defines the requested time for the Output object to remain
occupied. The valid range is 1-65,535 minutes.
Time Remaining
This is the value in minutes of the remaining occupancy time for the
Output object.
Output Object
This contains the reference to a prioritized attribute of a given object
type in order to temporarily override that attribute.
Output Value
This is the value to be written to the Output Object, when the Present
Value attribute is set to Active.
States Text
This is a reference to the multistate set, which characterizes the Output
Value. The states text is obtained from the object/attribute specified in
the Output Object once a new Temporary Occupancy object is created.
Reliability
This is the reliability of the Temporary Occupancy object. If the
Temporary Occupancy object is unable to communicate with the
Output object during creation, the reliability is set to Unreliable. Once
the Output object comes online, the reliability of the Temporary
Occupancy object returns to Reliable. If at any other time, the Output
object either goes Offline or is Unreliable, the Temporary Occupancy
object does not report this change. Also, if the Temporary Occupancy
object is Unreliable, the Present Value attribute may not be changed.
Procedure Overview
Table 10-1: Working with Temporary Occupancy Objects
Add a Temporary Occupancy Browse to and select the Schedule container. Press the F3 (Add) key.
Object Select Temp Occ. Press the Enter key. Fill in the fields using Table 10-2.
Press the F3 (Save) key. Press any key to continue. Press the
F4 (Cancel) key to return to the main screen.
Edit a Temporary Occupancy Browse to and select the object you want to edit. Press the Return key.
Object Press the F3 (Edit) key. Edit the attributes according to Table 10-2.
Command a Temporary Browse to and select the Temporary Occupancy object you want to
Occupancy Object command. Press the F2 (Command) key. Use the Spacebar and the
Backspace key to cycle to the desired command. Press the enter key.
Delete a Temporary Browse to and select the Temporary Occupancy object you want to
Occupancy Object delete. Press the Return key to open the object. Press the Delete key.
Press the Tab key to confirm the deletion.
Detailed Procedures
Adding a Temporary Occupancy Object
To add a Temporary Occupancy object:
1. Browse to and select the Schedule Container.
2. Press the F3 (Add) key.
3. Select Temp Occ from the list that appears.
4. Press the Enter key. The Temporary Occupancy object
configuration screen appears (Figure 10-1).
Figure 10-1: Temporary Occupancy Object Configuration Screen

Table 10-2: Temporary Occupancy Attribute Entry Requirements

Screen Attribute Required Default Value Options/Range
Area Name
Engineering Occupancy Yes 1 Valid Range: 1-65,535; Units: Minutes
Values Time
Output Yes Null
Object
Output Yes Multistate Set: Redirected to States Text.
Value Refer to States Text in Appendix A: Object
Enumeration Sets of the Object Dictionary
(LIT-694980).

8. Press the F4 (Cancel) key to return to the main screen.
Editing a Temporary Occupancy Object

To edit a Temporary Occupancy object:
1. Browse to and select the object you want to edit.
2. Press the Return key to open it.
4. Edit the attributes according to Table 10-2.
Commanding a Temporary Occupancy Object

To command a Temporary Occupancy object:
1. Browse to and select the Temporary Occupancy object you want
to command.
3. Use the Spacebar and Backspace keys to select a command. Select
State 1 to send the Temporary Occupancy object into the occupied
mode. Select State 0 to send the Temporary Occupancy object into
the unoccupied mode.
4. Press the Enter key. The command is executed.
Deleting a Temporary Occupancy Object

To delete a Temporary Occupancy object:
1. Browse to and select the Temporary Occupancy object you want
to delete.
2. Press the Return key to open the object.
Chapter 11
Working with Printer Objects T
Introduction
The Printer object allows printed alarms, summaries, and reports from
within the N30 system to be generated. A Printer object needs to be
added for each piece of printer hardware that exists on the system.
Each N30 allows for a maximum of two printers to be attached to it.
IMPORTANT: Do not do a serial download of an N30 from Project

Builder through a port for which a direct connect
printer is defined. Doing so can cause communications
to stop working, causing download errors.
For example, if you are downloading a database with a
direct connect Printer object assigned to Port 1 of the
N30, you should establish your communications with
the N30 on either Port 2 or Port 3 to avoid
communications errors.
• add a Printer object
• edit a Printer object
• command a Printer object
• delete a Printer object

Key Concepts
Printer Object
The Printer object provides hard copy output of the alarms, summaries,
and other reports generated by objects, features, and the system. The
Printer object is responsible for the buffering of output to the printer
device. Printers are either connected directly or connected through
dial-up access via modems.
The Printer object provides the interface to manipulate the printer
device and performs the following:
• Prints alarm messages from the Message Router object.
• Prints trend log data, summaries, and utility profile reports.
The Printer object’s attributes allow a user to configure a variety of
filters that establish the type of messages, or Status Notification
Reports (SNR), which the Printer object receives. For more
information about determining filter configurations, refer to
Appendix B: Building a Message Router Application (LIT-6892320) in
this document.
Attributes
The Printer object attributes described below are listed in the order that
they appear on the screen. Entry requirements for these attributes are
in Table 11-2.
For additional information about the Printer object and its attributes,
Object Name
Description
Object Type
Analog Alarm.
Object Category
Port Number
Specifies which serial port the printer is connected to.
Active Filter
Selects the type of filtering in effect for this printer destination. The
• Pass None - When selected this destination receives no alarm
messages.
• Pass All - When selected this destination receives all alarm
messages.
Priority Filter A
Defines which priorities this destination receives when Filter A is in
lowest priority are Critical, Serious, Important, Status.
Category Filter A
without a defined category. A value of True for a particular selection
means messages of that defined category reach this destination.
Msg Type Filter A

messages of that defined type reach this destination. Choices from
highest to lowest priority are System Alert, Operator Transaction,
Alarm.
Priority Filter B
Category Filter B
means that messages of that defined category reach this destination.
Msg Type Filter B

Alarm.
Alt SNR Destination

Indicates the alternate destination to receive this printer’s output if this
printer is unavailable.
Page Size
Indicates the number of lines per page.
SNR Delimiter
Identifies if printed alarm messages and other data should be separated
by a dashed line.
Interleave
Specifies whether to mix alarm messages in other types of reports. If
this attribute is True, alarm messages will be held or buffered until the
end of the currently printing page. At this point, all of the buffered
alarm messages will be printed. When the alarm messages are done
printing, the remaining report pages are printed. If False, the complete
report will be printed before alarm messages are printed.
Max SNR Queue

Specifies the maximum number of alarm messages that can be
buffered for this printer. If the queue is full, alarm messages sent to
this printer to be printed may be lost.
XOFF Delay Time

Defines the amount of time that passes before filtering XON/XOFF
signal changes. Once the Serial Datalink object receives the XOFF
signal, the Printer object waits the specified amount of time before
changing the Error State attribute to OUT OF PAPER.
Use Dial
Indicates remote connect printer or the direct connected printer. If this
attribute is set to True, the object is set for the remote connect printer.
If this attribute is set to False, the object is set for the direct connect
printer and the Phone Number can’t be changed from None.
Phone Number
Indicates the dial out phone number to printer device if a modem is
connected to the port. If a printer device is connected to the port
directly, this attribute should be blank.
Modem Config Object

Lists the name of the object that holds the modem initialization strings
and other dialout-related data.
SNR Dial Out Level

Indicates the percentage of the queue that needs to be full before dial
out occurs.
Retry Interval
Indicates the interval in which the Printer object retries sending the
Dial command periodically, if dial out fails. This attribute has no
effect if the object is designated for the direct connect printer.
Hang Up Wait Time

Specifies how many times the Printer object resends the Dial
command. If the dial up connection is unsuccessful, the Printer object
sends the Dial command again in the time defined as the Retry
Interval. This attribute has no effect if the object is designated for the
direct connect printer.
Process Identifier
Used to identify the Printer object as a destination for SNRs. This
identifier must be unique for each device. If it is not specified, the next
available identifier is automatically used.
Procedure Overview
Table 11-1: Working with Printer Objects
Add a Printer Object Browse to and highlight the Operator Devices container. Press the
F3 (Add) key. Highlight Printer and press Enter. Fill in the fields using
Table 11-2. Press the F3 (Save) key. Check the User Assistance area of
Edit a Printer Object Browse to and highlight a Printer object. Press Enter to open the object.
Press the F3 (Edit) key. Edit the fields according to Table 11-2. Press the
Command a Printer Object Browse to and highlight a Printer object. Press the F2 (Command) key.
Delete a Printer Object Browse to and highlight a Printer object. Press Enter to open the object.
Detailed Procedures
Adding a Printer Object
To add a Printer object:
1. Browse to and highlight the Operator Devices container.
3. Highlight Printer and press Enter. The first of two Printer object
Figure 11-1: Printer Object Attribute Screen (1 of 2)

Figure 11-2: Printer Object Attribute Screen (2 of 2)


Object Object No Blank Maximum 32 characters
Name Invalid characters: @ . ? * $ # : ’ [ ]
Object Type Yes Printer The default is preset and cannot be changed.
Object Yes HVAC Use the Spacebar and Backspace key to view
Category and select options: HVAC, Fire, Security,
Services, Administrative.
Port Setup Port Number Yes Port 2 Use the Spacebar and Backspace key to view
and select options: Port 0, Port 1, Port 2, Port 3.
Port 2 and Port 3 are the only valid options.
Setup Active Filter Yes Pass All Use the Spacebar and Backspace key to view
and select options: Pass None, Pass All, Filter A,
Filter B, Filter A and B.
Priority Yes [4] Items Use the Spacebar and Backspace key to view
Filter A and select True or False for the following values:
Critical, Serious, Important, Status.
Category Yes [5] Items Use the Spacebar and Backspace key to view
HVAC, Fire, Security, Services, Administrative.
Msg Type Yes [3] Items Use the Spacebar and Backspace key to view
System Alert, Operator Transaction, Alarm.

(Cont.)
Setup (Cont.) Priority Yes [4] Items Use the Spacebar and Backspace key to view
Filter B and select True or False for the following values:
Critical, Serious, Important, Status.
Category Yes [5] Items Use the Spacebar and Backspace key to view
HVAC, Fire, Security, Services, Administrative.
Msg Type Yes [3] Items Use the Spacebar and Backspace key to view
System Alert, Operator Transaction, Alarm.
Alt SNR No Blank Enter the exact name of the Printer or VT100
Destination object to act as an alternate destination for
messages should this printer be inoperable.
Page Size No Blank 3-255 (Blank = printed lines not counted)
SNR Yes False Use the Spacebar and Backspace key to view
Delimiter and select options: True, False.
Interleave Yes False Use the Spacebar and Backspace key to view
and select options: True, False.
Max SNR Yes 25 3-100
Queue
Xoff Delay Yes 20 0-65535 seconds
Time
Process No 3-15
Identifier
Dial Setup Use Dial Yes False Use the Spacebar and Backspace key to view
Phone No Blank Blank = printer connected directly
Number
Modem No Blank Enter the exact name of the Modem
Config Configuration object containing the required
Object dial-out information.
SNR Dial Yes 80 % 35-100 percent
Out Level
Retry Yes 180 60-600 seconds
Interval
Retries Yes 3 0-10
Hang Up Yes 1 0-65535 seconds
Wait Time

Editing a Printer Object

To edit a Printer object:
1. Browse to and highlight a Printer object.
3. Press the F3 (Edit) key. The Printer object attribute screen appears
(Figure 11-1 and Figure 11-2).
4. Edit the fields according to Table 11-2.
Commanding a Printer Object

To command a Printer object:
until the desired command appears. The Printer object supports
the commands listed in Table 11-3. For more information about
supported commands, refer to the Object Dictionary.

Command Description
Form Feed Form feeds the paper.
Queue Clear Clears the queue entries.
Cancel Print Stops printing Trend Log, Summary, or Utility Profile data in
progress.
Dial Forces a dial out when the Error State is Dial Out Failed.
4. Press Enter.
Deleting a Printer Object

To delete a Printer object:
Chapter 12
Working with Modem

Configuration Objects T
Introduction
The Modem Configuration object allows a user to have different
modem configuration data (for different purposes) located in a
separate location. For example, one phone number may require a much
longer connection timeout or number of redials.
• add a Modem Configuration object
• edit a Modem Configuration object
• delete a Modem Configuration object

Key Concepts
Modem Configuration Object
The Modem Configuration object serves as a named storage place for
modem configuration data. The user provides the specific dial-out
configuration data for this object and then other objects capable of
initializing a dial out connection refer to this data. A dial-out Printer
object typically uses the Modem Configuration object as a source of
data.
If the standard modem configuration string of the Serial Datalink
object (as defined by the N30 Device object) refers to incorrect
modem configuration data for a particular printer, the Printer object
can reference the Modem Configuration object for different modem
configuration data. When the default values of the Serial Datalink
object are sufficient, no Modem Configuration object is required.
Attributes
The Modem Configuration object attributes described below are listed
in the order that they appear on the screen. Entry requirements for
these attributes are in Table 12-2.
For additional information about the Modem Configuration object and
its attributes, refer to Object Dictionary.
Object Name
Description
Object Type
Modem Config.
Object Category
Enabled
Dial Mode
Indicates if pulse or tone dialing is used.
Connect Timeout
Specifies the length of time to wait for connection after dialing before
the attempt is aborted.
Modem Init String

Identifies the set up commands sent to the modem.
Number of Redials
Specifies the number of times the dialing connection is attempted.
Procedure Overview
Table 12-1: Working with Modem Configuration Objects
Add a Modem Configuration Browse to and highlight the Operator Devices container. Press the
Object F3 (Add) key. Highlight Modem Config and Press Enter. Fill in the fields
using Table 12-2. Press the F3 (Save) key. Check the User Assistance
Edit a Modem Configuration Browse to and highlight a Modem Configuration object. Press Enter to
Object open the object. Press the F3 (Edit) key. Edit the fields using Table 12-2.
Delete a Modem Configuration Browse to and highlight a Modem Configuration object. Press Enter to
Object open the object. Press the Delete key. Press the Tab key to confirm the
deletion.
Detailed Procedures
Adding a Modem Configuration Object
To add a Modem Configuration object:
3. Highlight Modem Config and Press Enter. The Modem
Configuration Object attribute screen appears (Figure 12-1).
Figure 12-1: Modem Configuration Object Attribute Screen


Object Type Yes Modem The default is preset and cannot be changed.
Config
Enabled Yes True Use the Spacebar and Backspace key to view
Setup Dial Mode Yes Tone Use the Spacebar and Backspace key to view
and select options: Tone, Pulse.
Connect Yes 45 Seconds
Timeout
Number of Yes 3 0-6
Redials
Modem Init Yes Blank Enter the modem setup data.
String

Editing a Modem Configuration Object

To edit a Modem Configuration object:
1. Browse to and highlight a Modem Configuration object.
3. Press the F3 (Edit) key. The Modem Configuration object
attribute screen appears (Figure 12-1).
Deleting a Modem Configuration Object

To delete a Modem Configuration object:
1. Browse to and highlight a Modem Configuration object.
Chapter 13
Working with Global Data

Sharing Objects
Introduction
The Global Data Sharing object permits the sharing of data from a
single master input with up to 16 slave output references.
• add a Global Data Sharing object
• edit a Global Data Sharing object
• add slaves to the Slaves List
• delete slaves from the Slaves List
• command a Global Data Sharing object
• delete a Global Data Sharing object

Key Concepts
Global Data Sharing Object
The Global Data Sharing feature distributes changes in value
associated with a single master input to a range of between one and
sixteen targeted slave outputs. For example, Outdoor Air data can be
distributed and shared between multiple Air Handling Unit controllers.
Attributes
The Global Data Sharing object attributes described below are listed in
the order that they appear on the screen. Entry requirements for these
attributes are listed in Table 13-2.
For additional information about Global Data Sharing object and its
Object Name
Description
Object Type
Global Data.
Object Category
Enabled
Master
Identifies the attribute reference (object and attribute name) and its
value, state, or status that is to be sent to the list of slaves.
Slaves List
Identifies the names (attribute references) of from 1 to 16 slaves that
receive the value, status, or state of the master.
Procedure Overview
Table 13-1: Working with Global Data Sharing Objects
Add a Global Data Sharing Browse to and highlight the Programming container. Press the
Object F3 (Add) key. Highlight Global Data and press Enter. Fill in the fields
using Table 13-2. Move the cursor to Slave List. Press Enter. Type in an
object name and attribute name. Press the F3 (Add Item) key and type in
another slave. Press the F4 (Back) key. Press the F3 (Save) key.
Edit a Global Data Sharing Browse to and highlight a Global Data Sharing object. Press Enter to
Add Slaves to the Slaves List Browse to and highlight a Global Data Sharing Object. Press Enter to
open the object. Press the F3 (Edit) key. Move the cursor to Slaves List.
Press Enter. Press the F3 (Add Item) key to add a blank entry. Type in an
object name and attribute name. Press the F4 (Back) key to return to the
previous screen. Press the F3 (Save) key to save the changes. Check the
Delete Slaves from the Slaves Browse to and highlight a Global Data Sharing Object. Press Enter to
List open the object. Press the F3 (Edit) key. Move the cursor to Slaves List.
Press Enter. Highlight the slave to be deleted. Press the F2 (Del Item)
key. Press the F4 (Back) key to return to the previous screen. Press the
Command a Global Data Browse to and highlight a Global Data Sharing object. Press the
Sharing Object F2 (Command) key. Use the Spacebar and the Backspace key to cycle
through the list until the desired command appears. Press Enter.
Delete a Global Data Sharing Browse to and highlight a Global Data Sharing object. Press Enter to
Object open the object. Press the Delete key. Press the Tab key to confirm
deletion.
Detailed Procedures
Adding a Global Data Sharing Object
To add a Global Data Sharing object:
1. Browse to and highlight the Programming container.
3. Highlight Global Data and press Enter. The Global Data Sharing
Figure 13-1: Global Data Sharing Object Attribute Screen


name.
Object Type Yes Global Data Default is preset and cannot be changed.
Engineering Master Yes Blank Enter the exact object and attribute name
Values containing the data to be distributed. For
example, the name of the N2 Analog Input
point object representing outdoor air
temperature.
Slaves List Yes 0 items Enter the exact object name and attribute
names of the object and attribute to
receive the data. For example, the names
of all Controller objects representing Air
Handling Units in the site. Present Value
appears by default (AHU1.Present Value).
IMPORTANT: The system does not check to ensure that the master
(input) and the slaves (outputs) are mapped to the
same data type. Each slave attempts to convert the
value being received (if necessary) to the data type
defined for itself.
5. Move the cursor to Slaves List.
6. Press Enter. The Global Data Sharing object Slaves List appears
(Figure 13-2).
Figure 13-2: Global Data Sharing Object Slaves List

7. Type in an object name and attribute name.
Example: AHU1.Present Value.
8. Press the F3 (Add Item) key and type in another slave.
9. Repeat Steps 7 through 8 for all slaves being added to the list.
Editing a Global Data Sharing Object

To edit a Global Data Sharing object:
Note: To delete or add slaves, refer to the appropriate sections of
this chapter.
1. Browse to and highlight a Global Data Sharing object.
3. Press the F3 (Edit) key. The Global Data Sharing object attribute
Adding Slaves to the Slaves List

To add slaves to the Slaves List:
(Figure 13-2).
7. Type in an object name and attribute name.
8. Repeat Steps 6 and 7 for each new slave.
Deleting Slaves from the Slaves List

To delete slaves from the Slaves List:
(Figure 13-2).
6. Highlight the slave to be deleted.
7. Press the F2 (Delete Item) key.
8. Repeat Steps 6 and 7 for each slave to be removed from the list.
Commanding a Global Data Sharing Object

To command a Global Data Sharing object:
until the desired command appears. The Global Data Sharing
object support the command listed in Table 13-3.

Command Description
Enable Updates changes to the slaves list.
Disable Prevents distribution of Changes-of-Value.
4. Press Enter.
Deleting a Global Data Sharing Object

To delete a Global Data Sharing object:
Chapter 14
Working with Interlock Objects
Introduction
The Interlock object establishes conditional control over one or more
other objects. Based on the results of some conditional checks, a series
of commands can control other objects.
• add an Interlock object
• edit an Interlock object
• add sources to an Interlock object
• delete sources from an Interlock object
• add action table entries to an Interlock object
• delete action table entries from an Interlock object
• command an Interlock object
• delete an Interlock object

Key Concepts
Interlock Object
The Interlock object establishes conditional control over one or more
other objects. It consists of IF conditional statements, True command
statements, and False command statements. Through these statements,
the user specifies a set of conditional checks. Based on the results of
those checks, a series of commands can control a collection of one or
more objects.
For example, the Interlock object is used to place a Variable Air
Volume (VAV) controller in the occupied mode whenever the main
fan is on and in the occupied mode.
The attributes of the Interlock object have to work together as well as
with other objects in order for the object to function properly.
The Source and Logic attributes determine the condition and the
Action Table defines the course of action (commands) to take based on
those conditions. For information about building an Interlock
application, refer to Appendix D: Building an Interlock Application
(LIT-6892340) in this manual.
Attributes
The Interlock object attributes described below are listed in the order
in Table 14-4.
For additional information about the Interlock object and its attributes,
Object Name
Description
Object Type
Interlock.
Object Category
N30 Supervisory Controller User’s 14-3
Enabled
Commands Priority
Determines the order by importance for all commands set.
States Text
Indicates the text that appears for the Present Value.
Source
Contains data pertaining to an object being referenced which is used as
input into the logic expression. It helps determine if the condition is
true or false. Table 14-1 identifies the information needed for the
source.
Table 14-1: Source Information

Options Description
Object Name Name of the source object
Attribute Varies with the object. The default is Present Value.
Relation Equal, Not Equal, Greater Than, Less Than, Greater or Equal, Less or Equal
Value The value used in the relation varies according to the object. True or False.
Differential Accounts for variations in the value. Required if the value is analog.
Logic
Specifies the Boolean (AND/OR) logic used in combination with the
Source input to deliver a True or False statement. Options include:
• Match All - Every condition must be true.
• Match Any - One or more of the conditions must be true.
• Complex - Use Logic Equation attribute for complex logic.
Logic Equation
When the Logic attribute is set to Complex, this attribute contains a
logic equation.
Use the logic equation to define the relationship between the master
conditions using logic operators and parentheses for determining
precedence.
Valid characters in the Logic Equation string are shown in Table 14-2.
Table 14-2: Logic Equation Characters

Character Description
* AND operator
+ OR operator
( Open parenthesis (for grouping)
) Close parenthesis (for grouping)
Numbers Master condition numbers
Spaces Spaces are allowed for readability
The following is a sample Logic Equation string:

((1+2)*(3+4))+(6*7)
This sample equation says that master condition ((1 or 2) and (3 or 4))
or (6 and 7) results in a True execution.
Action Table - True

List commands issued when the Interlock object’s Present Value goes
to a True state. This attribute identifies the object to receive the
commands, the amount of time each command waits to be sent after a
change in condition, and the command to be issued from those made
available upon entering the Command ID field.
Action Table - False

Lists commands issued when the Interlock object’s Present Value goes
to a False state. This attribute identifies the same parameters as the
Action Table - True attribute.
Example
Figures 14-1 through 14-4 show screens from a sample completed
Interlock object. This sample object uses the Logic Equation attribute.
Figure 14-1: Completed Interlock Object - Focus Screen
Figure 14-2: Completed Interlock Object - Edit Screen

Figure 14-3: Completed Interlock Object - Source
Figure 14-4: Completed Interlock Object - Action Table - True

Procedure Overview
Table 14-3: Working with Interlock Objects
Add an Interlock Object Browse to and highlight the Programming container. Press the
F3 (Add) key. Select Interlock and press Enter. Fill in the fields using
Table 14-4. Move the cursor to Source. Press Enter. Type in the object
name. Press Tab to move to the next field. Use the Spacebar and
Backspace key to cycle through the list until the desired option appears.
Press the F3 (Add Item) key to add a blank entry. Press the F4 (Back) key
to return to the previous screen. Move the cursor to Logic. Fill in the field
using Table 14-4. If necessary, move the cursor to Logic Equation and fill
in the field. Move the cursor to True under Action Table. Press Enter.
Type in an object name. Press Tab to move to the next field. Fill in the
remaining fields. Press the F3 (Add Item) key to add a blank entry. Press
the F4 (Back) key to return to the previous screen. Move the cursor to the
next field (False). Press Enter. Type in an object name. Press Tab to
move to the next field. Fill in the remaining fields. Press the F3 (Add Item)
key to add a blank entry. Press the F4 (Back) key to return to the previous
screen. Press the F3 (Save) key. Check the User Assistance area of the
screen to verify if the save was successful or if there were errors. Press
any key to continue. Press the F4 (Cancel) key to return to the container
hierarchy.
Edit an Interlock Object Browse to and highlight an Interlock object. Press Enter to open the
Add Sources to an Interlock Browse to and highlight an Interlock object. Press Enter to open the
Object object. Press the F3 (Edit) key. Move the cursor to Source. Press Enter.
Press the F3 (Add Item) key to add a blank entry. Type in an object name.
Press Tab to move to the next field. Use the Spacebar and Backspace
key to cycle through the list until the desired option appears. Press the
F3 (Add Item) key to add a blank entry. Press the F4 (Back) key to return
to the previous screen. Press the F3 (Save) key to save the changes.
Delete Sources from an Browse to and highlight an Interlock object. Press Enter to open the
Interlock Object object. Press the F3 (Edit) key. Move the cursor to Source. Press Enter.
Highlight the source to be deleted. Press the F2 (Del Item) key. Press the
F4 (Back) key to return to the previous screen. Press the F3 (Save) key to
save the changes. Check the User Assistance area of the screen to verify
if the save was successful or if there were errors. Press any key to
Add Action Table Entries to an Browse to and highlight an Interlock object. Press Enter to open the
Interlock Object object. Press the F3 (Edit) key. Move the cursor to True or False under
Action Table. Press Enter. Press the F3 (Add Item) key to add a blank
entry. Type in an object name. Press Tab to move to the next field. Fill in
the remaining fields. Press the F3 (Add Item) key to add a blank entry.
Press the F4 (Back) key to return to the previous screen. Press the

Delete Action Table Entries Browse to and highlight an Interlock object. Press Enter to open the
from an Interlock Object object. Press the F3 (Edit) key. Move the cursor to True or False under
Action Table. Press Enter. Highlight the Action Table value to be deleted.
Press the F2 (Del Item) key. Press the F4 (Back) key to return to the
previous screen. Press the F3 (Save) key to save the changes. Check the
Command an Interlock Object Browse to and highlight an Interlock object. Press the F2 (Command) key.
Delete an Interlock Object Browse to and highlight an Interlock object. Press Enter to open the
Detailed Procedures
Adding an Interlock Object
To add an Interlock object:
3. Select Interlock and press Enter. The Interlock object attribute
Figure 14-5: Interlock Object Attribute Screen


Name Invalid characters: @ . ? * $ # : ’ [ ].
name.
Object Yes Interlock The default is preset and cannot be
Type changed.
Object Yes HVAC Use the Spacebar and the Backspace key to
Enabled Yes True Use the Spacebar and the Backspace key to
Engineering Commands Yes Default Use the Spacebar and the Backspace key to
Values Priority view and select option. Refer to Write
Priority Enumeration Set in Appendix A:
Display States Text Yes False True Use the Spacebar and the Backspace key to
view and select options. Refer to States Text
in Appendix A: Object Enumeration Sets of
the Object Dictionary (LIT-694980).
Interlock Source Yes 0 items List of source objects used for input into the
Definition logic expression.
Logic Yes Match All Use the Spacebar and the Backspace key to
view and select options.
Match All: All of the source conditions must
be true.
Match Any: One or more of the source
conditions must be true.
Complex: Use the Logic Equation attribute
for complex logic.
Logic No Define the relationship between the master
Equation conditions using logic operators and
parentheses for determining precedence.
Action Table True Yes 0 items Object Name
Delay
Command ID
Parameters (varies according to the
command)
False Yes 0 items Object Name
Delay
Command ID
Parameters (varies according to the
command)
5. Move the cursor to Source.

6. Press Enter. The Interlock object Source list appears
(Figure 14-6).
Figure 14-6: Interlock Object Source List

7. Type in an object name.
8. Press Tab to move to the next field.
the desired option appears.
10. Repeat Steps 8 and 9 for the other fields.
12. Repeat Steps 7 through 11 for each new source to be added.
14. Move the cursor to Logic.
15. Fill in the field according to Table 14-4.
16. If the Logic field is set to Complex, move the cursor to Logic
Equation and fill in the field.
17. Move the cursor to True under Action Table.
18. Press Enter. The True list appears (Figure 14-7).
Figure 14-7: Interlock Object True List

21. Fill in the remaining fields.
23. Repeat Steps 19 through 22 for each Action Table (True) value to
be added.
25. Move the cursor to the next field (False).
26. Press Enter. The False list appears (Figure 14-8).
Figure 14-8: Interlock Object False List

31. Repeat Steps 27 through 30 for each Action Table (False) value to
be added.
Editing an Interlock Object

To edit an Interlock object:
Note: To delete or add Sources or Action Table values, refer to the
appropriate sections of this chapter.
1. Browse to and highlight an Interlock object.
3. Press the F3 (Edit) key. The Interlock object attribute screen
Adding Sources to an Interlock Object

To add sources to an Interlock object:
2. Press Enter to open the object. The Interlock object attribute
(Figure 14-6).
the desired option appears.
10. Repeat Steps 8 and 9 for the other fields.
12. Repeat Steps 7 through 11 for each source to be added.

Deleting Sources from an Interlock Object

To delete sources from an Interlock object:
(Figure 14-6).
6. Highlight the source to be deleted.
8. Repeat Steps 6 and 7 for each source to be deleted.
Adding Action Table Entries to an Interlock Object

To add Action Table entries from an Interlock object:
4. Move the cursor to True or False under Action Table.
5. Press Enter. The Interlock object True or False list appears.

11. Repeat Steps 7 through 10 for each Action Table value to be
added.
Deleting Action Table Entries from an Interlock Object

To delete Action Table entries from an Interlock object:
4. Move the cursor to True or False under Action Table.
5. Press Enter. The True or False list appears.
6. Highlight the Action Table value to be deleted.
8. Repeat Steps 6 and 7 for each Action Table value to be deleted.
12. Press the any key to continue.
Commanding an Interlock Object

To command an Interlock object:
until the desired command appears. The Interlock object supports
the commands described Table 14-5.

Command Description
Re-Command Reissues the commands for the current state.
Override Updates the Present Value at Command Priority Operator
Override. Choose True to send the commands in the True
Action Table or False to send the commands in the False
Action Table.
Override Release Releases Command Priority Operator Override from Present
Value.
Release Releases the identified command priority from the specified,
writeable attribute, and allows it to be controlled by the next
highest priority.
Release All Releases Command Priorities 3 through 15 from the
specified, writeable attribute. Command Priorities 1 and 2
remain.
Enable Ensures that the object reacts to any changes it missed
while it was disabled.
Disable Locks out all outputs and prevents the Interlock functionality.

it, press the Tab key to highlight the field and either type in the
5. Press Enter.
Deleting an Interlock Object

To delete an Interlock object:
Chapter 15
Working with Signal Select

Objects
Introduction
The Signal Select feature allows you to create objects that either
calculate the average, high, and low values from a set of analog points,
or process values from multiple zones to adjust various setpoints.
• add a Signal Select object
• edit a Signal Select object
• add input entries to a Signal Select object
• delete input entries from a Signal Select object
• command a Signal Select object
• delete a Signal Select object

Key Concepts
Signal Select
The Signal Select feature works with either analog or binary points,
and in Multi-Zone applications where values from multiple zones are
processed and used by the Air Handling Unit (AHU) to adjust various
setpoints.
With Signal Select, you can:
• determine the highest, lowest, and average values of a set of analog
input points.
• command analog points to the average, highest, or lowest values
calculated from a set of analog input points.
• calculate the state of a set of binary input points (using AND and
OR logical operations) and use the calculated value to command a
binary output point.
Analog Signal Select

For Analog point types, the Signal Select object computes (one or
more of) average input, highest input, and lowest input values for use
in updating an attribute value of another object.
This computation occurs each time the input points change value.
Immediately after the computation, the Signal Select object commands
each (of up to three) referenced output objects to their respective
values (average output, highest output, and lowest output). If a binary
type attribute is defined as an input, the input value is converted to
analog before each computation. Any other input type forces the
Signal Select object to classify the input as unreliable.
Binary Signal Select

For Binary point types, the Signal Select object computes average
state, logical OR state, and logical AND state values for use in
updating an attribute value of another object.
This computation occurs each time one or more of the input points
changes state. Immediately after the computation, it commands each
(of up to three) referenced output objects to their respective states
(Average Output, Logical OR Output, and Logical AND Output).
If an analog type attribute is defined as an input, the input value is
converted to binary before each computation. Any other input type
forces the Signal Select object to classify the input as unreliable.
Table 15-1 describes the various types of computations.
Table 15-1: Computation Types for Binary Signal Select

Computation Type Description
Average Output If the majority of inputs are at State 1 or the inputs are
Computation evenly split between State 1 and State 0, the Average
Output is commanded to State 1. If the majority of
inputs are at State 0, the Average output is commanded
to State 0.
Logical OR If any input is at State 1, the Logical OR output is
Computation commanded to State 1. If all inputs are at State 0, the
Logical OR output is commanded to State 0.
Logical AND If all inputs are at State 1, the AND output is
Computation commanded to State 1. If any input is not at State 1, the
AND output is commanded to State 0.
Attributes
The Signal Select object attributes described below are listed in the
order that they appear on the screen. Entry requirements for these
attributes are in Table 15-3.
For additional information about the Signal Select object and its
Object Name
Description
Object Type
Signal Select.
Object Category
Enabled
Input List
Lists attributes of objects used in the Signal Select calculations. If an
analog type is added to this list but the Point Type attribute indicates
binary, this analog type is converted to a binary value before each
computation and vice versa.
If one or more of the objects in the input list is disabled, the output
objects’ values are calculated using only the remaining inputs’ values.
Average Output
Indicates the object attribute updated using the calculated average of
all of the inputs of the Signal Select object.
High OR
Indicates the object attribute updated using the highest input of all of
the inputs in the Signal Select object for analog point types. For point
types specified as binary, the value is updated using a logical OR
condition of all inputs of the Signal Select object.
Low AND
Indicates the object attribute updated using the lowest input of all of
the inputs in the Signal Select object for point types specified as
analog. For point types specified as binary, the value is updated using
logical AND condition of all inputs of the Signal Select object.
Point Type
Indicates the type of input values (analog or binary) the Signal Select
monitors.
Procedure Overview
Table 15-2: Working with Signal Select Objects
Add a Signal Select Object Browse to and highlight the Programming container. Press the
F3 (Add) key. Highlight Signal Select and press Enter. Fill in the fields
using Table 15-3. Move the cursor to Input List. Press Enter. Type in an
object and attribute name. Press the F3 (Add Item) key to add a blank
entry. Press F4 (Back) key to return to the previous screen. Fill in the
remaining fields using to Table 15-3. Press the F3 (Save) key. Check the
Edit a Signal Select Object Browse to and highlight a Signal Select object. Press Enter to open the
Add Input Entries to a Signal Browse to and highlight a Signal Select object. Press Enter to open the
Select Object object. Press the F3 (Edit) key. Move the cursor to Input List. Press Enter.
Press the F3 (Add Item) key to add a blank entry. Type in an object and
attribute name. Press the F4 (Back) key to return to the previous screen.
Press the F3 (Save) key to save the changes. Check the User Assistance
Delete Input Entries from a Browse to and highlight a Signal Select object. Press Enter to open the
Signal Select Object object. Press the F3 (Edit) key. Move the cursor to Input List. Press Enter.
Highlight the input to be deleted and press F2 (Del Item) key. Press the
F4 (Back) key to return to the previous screen. Press the F3 (Save) key to
save the changes. Check the User Assistance area of the screen to verify
Command a Signal Select Browse to and highlight a Signal Select object. Press the F2 (Command)
Object key. Use the spacebar and the Backspace key to cycle through the list
Delete a Signal Select Object Browse to and highlight a Signal Select object. Press Enter to open the
Detailed Procedures
Adding a Signal Select Object
To add a Signal Select object:
3. Highlight Signal Select and press Enter. The Signal Select object
Figure 15-1: Signal Select Object Attribute Screen


Object Type Yes Signal The default is preset and cannot be changed.
Select
Object Yes HVAC Use the spacebar and the Backspace key to
Enabled Yes True Use the spacebar and the Backspace key to
Engineering Input List Yes 0 Enter the exact object and attribute reference.
Values Present Value appears as the default
attribute.
Minimum number of Inputs in list = 2
Maximum number of Inputs in list = 12
Average No Blank Enter the exact object and attribute reference.
Output Present Value appears as the default
attribute.
High OR No Blank Enter the exact object and attribute reference.
Present Value appears as the default
attribute.
Low AND No Blank Enter the exact object and attribute reference.
Present Value appears as the default
attribute.
Point Type Yes Analog Use the spacebar and the Backspace key to
view and select options: Analog, Binary.
5. Move the cursor to Input List.

6. Press Enter. The Signal Select object Input List appears
(Figure 15-2).
Figure 15-2: Signal Select Object Input List

7. Type in an object and attribute name.
9. Repeat Steps 7 and 8 for each input being added.
11. Fill in the remaining fields using Table 15-3.
Editing a Signal Select Object

To edit a Signal Select object:
Note: To delete or add Input entries, refer to the appropriate
1. Browse to and highlight a Signal Select object.

3. Press the F3 (Edit) key. The Signal Select object attribute screen
Adding Input Entries to a Signal Select Object

To add Input entries to a Signal Select object:
1. Browse to and highlight a desired Signal Select object.
(Figure 15-2).
7. Type in an object and attribute name.
8. Repeat Steps 6 and 7 for each input being added.
Deleting Input Entries from a Signal Select Object

To delete Input entries from a Signal Select Object:
(Figure 15-2).
6. Highlight the input to be deleted.
8. Repeat Steps 6 and 7 for each input to be removed from the list.
Commanding a Signal Select Object

To command a Signal Select object:
2. Press the F2 (Command) key. The Signal Select Command field
appears.
3. Use the spacebar and the Backspace key to cycle through the list
until the desired command appears. The Signal Select object

Command Description
Enable Ensures that the object reacts to any changes it may have
missed while it was disabled and returns it to normal operation.
Disable Locks out all outputs and prevents the Signal Select functionality.
4. Press Enter.
Deleting a Signal Select Object

To delete a Signal Select object:
Chapter 16
Working with Auto Shutdown

Objects
Introduction
The Auto Shutdown (AS) object provides a means of preventing
nuisance alarms by suppressing alarm reporting for specified points.
This chapter describes the Auto Shutdown object and how to:
• add an Auto Shutdown object
• edit an Auto Shutdown object
• command an Auto Shutdown object
• delete an Auto Shutdown object
An example of a use for the Auto Shutdown object is to prevent alarms
set to monitor the discharge air temperature of a fan when that fan is
turned off.

Key Concepts
Auto Shutdown Object
When a selected multistate control point is in a specified shutdown
state, the Auto Shutdown object suppresses alarm reporting from a list
of dependent objects to prevent nuisance alarms. This is accomplished
by sending an enable/disable command to each of the dependent
objects’ Alarm objects, based on the control point’s attribute reference
value and the shutdown state. A startup delay is provided so that points
are not released immediately from shutdown.
An example of a use for the Auto Shutdown object is to prevent alarms
set to monitor the discharge air temperature of a fan when that fan is
turned off. When the fan is turned off, the fan state value is sent to the
Auto Shutdown object. The Auto Shutdown object then evaluates the
Present Value (control point state) against the Shutdown State defined
in the Auto Shutdown object. If the Present Value matches the
Shutdown State, the Auto Shutdown object sends a Disable Command
to the Alarm Object of every referenced dependent object in the
Dependents list.
Consequently, when the fan is turned back on, the Auto Shutdown
object again evaluates the current state and, if the Present Value does
not match the Shutdown State, starts the Startup Delay timer. Once the
timer expires, the Auto Shutdown object sends an Enable command to
the Alarm Object of every referenced dependent object in the
Dependents list.
Note: Changing the Dependents attribute causes an immediate
reevaluation of the current state. However, changes to the
Startup Delay time do not take effect until the next change in
the Control Point state.
Auto Shutdown Logic

The flowchart in Figure 16-1 shows the logic sequence of the
Auto Shutdown object.
COS (Control Point Attribute)
Auto Shutdown
Object
Control Point State
Are values
Shutdown State No Startup Delay
equal?
Yes
Yes
Is there an Wait for Delay to

Yes Delete timer. No
active timer? Expire.
No
Disable Alarms of Enable Alarms of

Dependent Dependent
Objects. Objects.
AS Seq.vsd
Figure 16-1: Auto Shutdown Object Logic
Attributes
Control Point
The value associated with this attribute, along with the shutdown state,
is used to determine if an alarm shutdown should occur.
Dependents
Each dependent object identified in this list of object references is used
to locate the Alarm object that is to have its alarm reporting controlled
by the Control Point.
Shutdown State
The value of this attribute determines the definition of the shutdown
state.
Startup Delay
The Startup delay represents the time in minutes that must elapse
before alarm reporting is re-enabled once the Control Point changes
from the shutdown state.
Reliability
The value of this attribute reflects the reliability of the Control Point.
Input Unreliable is the state used when the configured input goes
unreliable.
Commands
Disable
Prevents the AS object from responding to any change occurring at the
control attribute reference, including the reliability associated with the
control point.
Enable
This ensures activation of all processing associated with this object.
Immediately following receipt of this command, the AS object
re-evaluates the control attribute reference value and takes the
appropriate action to the dependent list.
Example
Figure 16-2 and Figure 16-3 show screens for a sample completed
Auto Shutdown object on air handler AHU-1. The control point is the
fan (N2 BO point) and the dependents are temperature sensors DA-T
(Discharge Air), RM-T (Room Temperature), STATIC (Static
Pressure), and RA-T (Return Temperature). The dependents are all
N2 AI points.
Figure 16-2: Completed Auto Shutdown Object - Focus Screen
Figure 16-3: Completed Auto Shutdown Object - Dependents

Procedure Overview
Table 16-1: Working with Auto Shutdown Objects
Add an Auto Shutdown Object Browse to and highlight the multistate point for
which you want to suppress alarm reporting.
Press the F3 (Add) key. Select Auto Shutdown
from the list of objects that appears. Press
Enter. Enter an object name and description.
Under Engineering Values, add the Control
Point attribute reference and at least
one dependent object reference. Press the F3
(Save) key. Press any key to continue. Press
F4 (Cancel) to return to the main screen.
Edit an Auto Shutdown Object Browse to and select the Auto Shutdown
object that you want to edit. Press the Enter
key to open the object. Press the F3 (Edit) key.
Edit the fields as desired. Press the F3 (Save)
key. Press any key to continue. Press the F4
key to return to the main screen.
Command an Auto Shutdown Browse to and select the Auto Shutdown
Object object that you want to command. Press the
F2 (Command) key. Use the spacebar and
Tab keys to select either Enable or Disable.
Press the Enter key to execute the selected
command.
Delete an Auto Shutdown Browse to and select the Auto Shutdown
Object object that you want to delete. Press the Enter
key to open the object. Press the Delete key to
delete the object. Press the Tab key to confirm
the deletion.
Detailed Procedures
Adding an Auto Shutdown Object
To add an Auto Shutdown object:
1. Browse to and highlight the object containing the multistate point
for which you want to suppress alarm reporting.
3. Select Auto Shutdown from the list of objects that appears.
4. Press Enter. The Auto Shutdown object configuration screen
Figure 16-4: Auto Shutdown Object Screen

5. Enter an object name and description.
6. Under Engineering Values, add the Control Point attribute
reference and at least one dependent object reference.
9. Press F4 (Cancel) to return to the main screen.
Editing an Auto Shutdown Object

To edit an Auto Shutdown object:
1. Browse to and select the Auto Shutdown object that you want to
edit.
2. Press the Enter key to open the object.
Commanding an Auto Shutdown Object

To command an Auto Shutdown Object:
command.
3. Use the spacebar and Tab keys to select either Enable or Disable.
4. Press the Enter key to execute the selected command.
Deleting an Auto Shutdown Object

To delete an Auto Shutdown object:
delete.
3. Press the Delete key to delete the object.
Chapter 17
Working with Multiple Command

Objects
Introduction
The Multiple Command (MC) object issues a series of commands to
multiple objects with a single command action.
• add a Multiple Command object
• edit a Multiple Command object
• add Action Table entries to a Multiple Command object
• delete Action Table entries from a Multiple Command object
• command a Multiple Command object
• delete a Multiple Command object

Key Concepts
Multiple Command Object
The Multiple Command object issues a series of commands to multiple
objects with a single command action. Commanding the Multiple
Command object results in the execution of the commands for a given
state. It supports States 1-32.
A possible use of the Multiple Command object involves using one
command to start building controls for the day. For instance, a
Multiple Command object can be added with three states using
Occupancy mode states text (Unoccupied, Occupied, and Startup).
When the building is in Unoccupied mode, the Multiple Command
object can turn off fans, lower the setpoint to 60°F, and secure the
doors of the building. During the Startup mode, the Multiple
Command object can unlock doors, and start boiler circulating pumps.
When in Occupied mode, the Multiple Command object can turn on
fans and raise setpoints to 72°F.
Another possible use for the Multiple Command object involves using
one command to run fan sequencing-type operations. For instance, a
number of fans listed in the Action Table attribute start sequentially at
one minute intervals by setting the Delay accordingly. The Delay time
is cumulative, so if a one minute delay between each fan start is
desired, then the Delay times would be 0, 60 120, 180 minutes, etc.
Attributes
The Multiple Command object attributes described below are listed in
For additional information about the Multiple Command object and its
attributes, refer to Object Dictionary.
Object Name
Description
Object Type
Multiple Command.
Object Category
Enabled
Commands Priority
Determines the order of all commands sent by importance. If it is set to
No Priority, commands are sent at each individual priority specified in
the Action Table attribute.
Relinquish Default
Indicates the default value used for the Present Value attribute when
commands are not controlling this object. If this attribute is configured
with a value, the object sends commands for the value immediately.
Number Of States
Specifies the number of possible Multiple Command object states,
1-32.
States Text
Indicates the displayed text for the Present Value.
Action Table (State0…StateN)

Contains the list of actions to take for each supported state. Each
action contains a slave object reference, a delay, a command and
parameters associated with the command, and a priority. The priority
in this table is used only when Command Priority is set to No Priority.
The delay is the number of seconds before the given command is
issued. Command delays can be lengthened or shortened to result in
commands being sent out after, before, or at the same time as any
other command.
Note: The total number of commands identified in the Action
Table command set should not exceed 40.
Procedure Overview
Table 17-1: Working with Multiple Command Objects
Add a Multiple Command Browse to and highlight the Programming container. Press the
Object F3 (Add) key. Highlight Multiple Command and press Enter. Fill in the
fields using Table 17-2. Move the cursor to State 0 under Action Table.
Press Enter. Type in an object name. Press the Tab key or the down
arrow key to move to the next field. Type in or choose the required
information. Press the F3 (Add Item) key to add a blank entry. Press the
F4 (Back) key to return to the previous screen. Move the cursor to the
next State. Press the F3 (Save) key. Check the User Assistance area of
Edit a Multiple Command Browse to and highlight a Multiple Command object. Press Enter to open
Object the object. Press the F3 (Edit) key. Edit the fields using Table 17-2. Press
the F3 (Save) key. Check the User Assistance area of the screen to verify
Add Action Table Entries to a Browse to and highlight a Multiple Command object. Press Enter to open
Multiple Command Object the object. Press the F3 (Edit) key. Move the cursor to the appropriate
State under Action Table. Press Enter. Press the F3 (Add Item) key to
add a blank entry. Type in an object name. Press the Tab key or the down
arrow key to move to the next field. Type in or choose the required
information. Press the F3 (Add Item) key to add a blank entry. Press the
next State, if necessary. Press the F3 (Save) key. Check the User
Delete Action Table Entries Browse to and highlight a Multiple Command object. Press Enter to open
from a Multiple Command the object. Press the F3 (Edit) key. Move the cursor to the appropriate
Object State under Action Table. Press Enter. Highlight any field for the object
reference to be deleted. Press the F2 (Del Item) key. Press the
next state, if necessary. Press the F3 (Save) key. Check the User
Command a Multiple Browse to and highlight a Multiple Command object. Press the
Command Object F2 (Command) key. Use the Spacebar and the Backspace key to cycle
Delete a Multiple Command Browse to highlight a Multiple Command object. Press Enter to open the
Object object. Press the Delete key. Press the Tab key to confirm the deletion.
Detailed Procedures
Adding a Multiple Command Object
To add an Multiple Command object:
3. Highlight Multiple Command and press Enter. The Multiple
Command object attribute screen appears (Figure 17-1).
Figure 17-1: Multiple Command Object Attribute Screen


Invalid characters: @ . ? * $ # : ‘ [ ]
If not complete the system assigns a
name.
Object Type Yes Multiple Default is preset and cannot be
Command changed.
Object Category Yes HVAC Use the Spacebar and the Backspace
key to view and select options: HVAC,
Enabled Yes True True, False
Engineering Commands Priority Yes Default Use the Spacebar and the Backspace
Values key to view and select options. Refer to
Write Priority Enumeration Set in
Appendix A: Object Enumeration Sets
of the Object Dictionary (LIT-694980).
Relinquish Default No Blank Use the Spacebar and the Backspace
key to view and select options: Blank,
State 0, State 1, State 2, State 3.
Display Number Of States Yes 4 Use the Spacebar and the Backspace
key to view and select options: 1-32
This attribute determines the number of
states to appear in the Action Table.
States Text Yes States Use the Spacebar and the Backspace
key to view and select options. Refer to
States Text in Appendix A: Object
Enumeration Sets of the Object
Action Table Action Table Yes Actions to take for each supported
(State0…State32) state. Each action contains an object
reference, a delay, a command, and
parameters associated with the
command, and possibly a priority.
Note: The total number of commands
identified in the Action Table 1
command set should not
exceed 40.
5. Move the cursor to State 0 under Action Table.

6. Press Enter. The Multiple Command object State list appears
(Figure 17-2).
Figure 17-2: Multiple Command object State List

8. Press the Tab key or the down arrow key to move to the next field.
9. Type in or choose the required information.
10. Repeat Steps 8 and 9 for all of the required fields.
12. Repeat Steps 7 through 11 for each object reference to be added.
14. Move the cursor to the next State.
15. Repeat Steps 6 through 14 for each State being configured as
determined by the Number of States attribute.
Editing a Multiple Command Object

To edit a Multiple Command object:
Note: To delete or add Action Table values, refer to the appropriate
1. Browse to and highlight a Multiple Command object.
3. Press the F3 (Edit) key. The Multiple Command object attribute
Adding Action Table Entries to a Multiple Command Object

To add Action Table entries to a Multiple Command object:
4. Move the cursor to appropriate State under Action Table.
5. Press Enter. The Multiple Command object State list appears.
8. Press the Tab key or the down arrow key to move to the next field.
9. Type in or choose the required information.
10. Repeat Steps 8 and 9 for all of the required fields.
12. Repeat Steps 7 through 11 for each object reference to be added to
the State list.

14. Move the cursor to the next State, if necessary.
15. Repeat Steps 5 through 14 for each State having an object
reference added to it.
Deleting Action Table Entries from a Multiple Command Object

To delete Action Table entries from a Multiple Command object:
4. Move the cursor to the appropriate State under Action Table.
5. Press Enter. The Multiple Command object State list appears.
6. Highlight any field for the object reference to be deleted.
8. Repeat Steps 6 and 7 for each object reference to be deleted from
the State list.
10. Move the cursor to the next State, if necessary.
11. Repeat Steps 5 through 10 for each State having an object
reference deleted from it.
Commanding a Multiple Command Object

To command a Multiple Command object:
until the desired command appears. The Multiple Command
object supports the commands described in Table 17-3.

Command Description
State 0 . . . Releases Command Priorities 9-15 (scheduling) and then
State 31 writes to the Present Value at the Default (16) command
priority. The state command names and number of
commands depend on the States Text and Number of
States attributes.
Override Updates the Present Value at Command Priority Operator
Override. Choose State 1-31.
Override Release Releases Command Priority Operator Override from
Present Value.
Release Releases the identified Command Priority from the
specified attribute. Choose an attribute name and
command priority.
Release All Releases Command Priorities 3-15 (scheduling), and then
writes the highest of the released values at the Default (16)
command priority. Command Priorities 1 and 2 remain.
Choose an attribute name.
Enable Allows the object’s functionality.
Disable Locks all outputs and prevents the object’s functionality.

5. Press Enter.
Deleting a Multiple Command Object

To delete a Multiple Command object:
1. Browse to highlight a Multiple Command object.
Chapter 18
Working with Data Broadcast

Objects
Introduction
The Data Broadcast object provides a means of sharing globally
important data with third-party BACnet devices.
IMPORTANT: Do not create Data Broadcast objects on sites

containing only Metasys devices (for example, N30s
or M-Series Workstations). Since Metasys devices
share data using the Johnson Controls COV
mechanism, the Data Broadcast object is not useful.
As the number of Data Broadcast objects on a site increases, the
network performance may suffer due to excessive broadcasts. Only use
Data Broadcast objects when necessary.
• add a Data Broadcast object
• edit a Data Broadcast object
• command a Data Broadcast object
• delete a Data Broadcast object

Key Concepts
Data Broadcast Object
This object can be added as an extension to any object that contains
critical data. Typically, this data may be the outdoor air temperature or
a value indicating whether a building is occupied. The Data Broadcast
then broadcasts an Unconfirmed COV (Change-of-Value) Notification
message to non-Metasys BACnet devices containing the referenced
data value when it changes.
Unconfirmed COV Notification

Unconfirmed COV Notification is a BACnet service that can be used
to distribute object attributes of wide interest to many devices
simultaneously without a subscription.
Attributes
Input Reference
The object and attribute whose value is monitored for COVs. This
object’s attribute value, if reliable, is then broadcast in an
Unconfirmed COV Notification message.
Reliability
The reliability of the Data Broadcast object. The reliability changes to
Input Unreliable when errors occur with the Input Reference.
Message Transmits
This attribute provides a count of the number of Unconfirmed COV
Notification messages that have been sent by the Data Broadcast
object. The value rolls over to 0, and continues counting, after
reaching 4,294,967,295.
Status
The Data Broadcast object sets the Status attribute to
OS_UNRELIABLE under any of the following conditions:
• The Reliability attribute is set to a value other than RELIABLE.
• There is a communications problem with the input reference.
• The input reference attribute data type does not support sign up.
Procedure Overview
Table 18-1: Working with Data Broadcast Objects
Add a Data Broadcast Object Browse to and highlight the container where you want to add the Data
Broadcast Object. Press the F3 (Add) key. Select Data Broadcast from
the list of objects that appears. Press Enter.
Edit a Data Broadcast Object Browse to and select the Data Broadcast object that you want to edit.
Press the Enter key to open the object. Press the F3 (Edit) key. Edit the
fields as desired. Press the F3 (Save) key. Press any key to continue.
Press the F4 key to return to the main screen.
Command a Data Broadcast Browse to and select the Data Broadcast object that you want to
Object command. Press the F2 (Command) key to open the Command field. Use
the Spacebar and Tab keys to select either Enable or Disable. Press
Enter.
Delete a Data Broadcast Browse to and select the Data Broadcast object that you want to delete.
Object Press the Enter key to open the object. Press the Delete key to delete the
object. Press the Tab key to confirm the deletion.
Detailed Procedures
Adding a Data Broadcast Object
To add a Data Broadcast object:
1. Browse to and highlight the object for which you want to
broadcast a value from one of its attributes.
3. Select Data Broadcast from the list of objects that appears.
4. Press Enter. The Data Broadcast object configuration screen
Figure 18-1: Data Broadcast Object Configuration Screen

5. Enter an object name and description. If you added the Data
Broadcast object to another object the input reference is filled in,
otherwise, enter the name of the object attribute for which you
want to broadcast a value.
8. Press F4 (Cancel) to return to the main screen.
Editing a Data Broadcast Object

To edit a Data Broadcast object:
1. Browse to and select the Data Broadcast object that you want to
edit.
7. Press the F4 key to return to the main screen.
Commanding a Data Broadcast Object

To command a Data Broadcast Object:
command.
3. Use the spacebar and Tab keys to select either Enable or Disable.
4. Press the Enter key.
Deleting a Data Broadcast Object

To delete a Data Broadcast object:
delete.
3. Press the Delete key to delete the object.
Chapter 19
Working with
Demand Limiting/Load Rolling
(DLLR) Objects T
Introduction
The Demand Limiting/Load Rolling (DLLR) object selectively sheds
loads to assure that the total energy consumed during one interval
never exceeds a certain limit.
• add a DLLR object
• edit a DLLR object
• command a DLLR object
• delete a DLLR object

Key Concepts
Demand Limiting/Load Rolling Controller Object
The Demand Limiting/Load Rolling (DLLR) Controller object reduces
utility expenses by selectively shedding loads.
Demand limiting reduces energy costs by turning off designated
equipment when the amount of energy consumed by the facility
approaches a specified target. The purpose of demand limiting is to
keep the demand for energy at one time below this target. This reduces
energy costs because utility companies often determine charges by the
day’s peak demand for energy.
Load rolling reduces energy consumption by repeatedly turning off
designated equipment at specified intervals. For example, instead of
running a fan continuously, load rolling can save energy by turning the
fan off for 15 minutes every hour.
The DLLR object is the heart of the DLLR feature. The DLLR
algorithm inside the DLLR object determines the necessary power
reduction to meet the specified target. Power reduction is
accomplished by shedding loads. Shedding loads is done by advising
the associated loads to switch off their associated outputs, which then
leads to the actual physical shedding of loads causing the desired
power reduction.
Shedding
The process of turning off equipment for Demand Limiting/Load
Rolling.
Releasing
The process of turning on equipment shed by Demand Limiting/Load
Rolling.
Demand Limiting
The job of demand limiting is to assure that the total energy consumed
during one interval never exceeds a certain limit. The Demand Limit
(DL) attribute is the maximum allowed average power during this
interval. Hence, the target of DL is to keep the demand below the
demand limit.
The DLLR executes once each minute to calculate a new amount to
shed for DL. The DLLR first sheds loads to satisfy the Load Rolling
(LR) target. The DLLR then sheds loads of Priority 4 first to meet the
DL target. If this is not possible with loads of Priority 4, then loads of
Priority 3 are also used. The same mechanism applies then for loads of
Priorities 2 and 1. Loads shed for LR count towards meeting the
DL target.
If the DL target is not met after shedding all eligible loads, the amount
of power not shed is in the DL not Shed attribute.
The DLLR can use two different algorithms to determine the amount
of power to shed: Fixed Window Algorithm and Sliding Window
Algorithm.
Fixed Window Algorithm (FWA)

The fixed window is a period of time during which maximum energy
consumption must not be exceeded. This period is started and ended
by the End-of-Interval (EOI) pulse, which is provided by the power
company. Typical values for the interval length are 15 or 30 minutes.
As an example, a demand limit of 100 kW with a 15-minute fixed
interval means only that the total energy consumption between
two EOI pulses must not exceed 25 kWh, but it does not limit the
maximum power that can be used. If, for example, only 10 kWh were
consumed during the first 10 minutes of a fixed 15-minute interval,
there are still 15 kWh allowed to be consumed during the last
5 minutes of the interval. This results in an allowed average power of
180 kW during the last 5 minutes of the interval, which is 80% above
the demand limit, and still no loads would have to be shed.
Sliding Window Algorithm (SWA)

The sliding window is a period of time during which maximum energy
consumption must not be exceeded. This period has a fixed length,
here called interval length, and it always ends at the current time.
A typical value for the interval length is 15 minutes.
As an example, a demand limit of 100 kW with a 15 minute sliding
interval means only that the maximum energy consumption within any
15 consecutive minutes must not exceed 25 kWh, but it does not limit
the maximum power that can be used. However, since every minute is
also the beginning of a new sliding interval, the Sliding Window
Algorithm reacts every minute and tries to prevent the demand from
getting above the demand limit. The Fixed Window Algorithm reacts
only when there is danger of surpassing the maximum energy during
the interval.
Interaction with Other Objects

Note: For more information about the DLLR object’s interaction
with other objects, refer to Appendix A: Building an Energy
Management Application (LIT-6892310) in this document.
Load Objects
The Loads sign up for Change-of-Value (COV) on the DLLR’s
DLLR Status attribute. This attribute informs the loads about the
current state of their DLLR. The DLLR can enter the Register mode
by setting DLLR Status temporarily to Register, which causes the
signed up loads to register.
The DLLR signs up for trigger on some internal attributes of the
Loads, which allows the DLLR to be constantly informed about the
eligibility of Loads to be used as sheddable Loads. Which and how
many attributes are used for this purpose must be determined after the
overall system communication performance is evaluated.
Meter Objects
The DLLR generally can use any object as its meter object, as long as
that object fulfills the requirements listed below. Currently, the Pulse
Meter object is the best suited object for this purpose, but Analog
Input and Analog Value objects are possible when they meet
requirements.
The following requirements must be met:
• A permanent communication path must exist between the meter
object and the DLLR.
• The meter object must calculate a new rate exactly once every
60 seconds.
• This rate must be the average power over the just elapsed minute
and must be provided in the meter object’s Present Value attribute,
which has to support signup for COV.
• The meter object’s Rate Units must be identical to the DLLR’s
Rate Units.
EOI Attribute
Note: The use of an End-of-Interval (EOI) input is required for the
Fixed Window Algorithm only. It must not be used for the
Sliding Window Algorithm.
The attribute supplying the End-of-Interval pulse is defined by the
attribute reference entered in the DLLR’s EOI attribute. This EOI
attribute can be any attribute of any object, as long as the following
requirements are met:
• A permanent communication path must exist between this attribute
and the DLLR.
• This attribute must be a numerical attribute, where a raise from
0 to 1 indicates the end of the interval, and thus, the beginning of
the next interval.
• The object providing this attribute must support signup for trigger
on this attribute.
Attributes
The DLLR object attributes described below are listed in the order that
in Table 19-2.
For additional information about the DLLR object and its attributes,
Object Name
Description
Object Type
Analog Alarm.
Object Category
Enabled
DL Mode
Shows the operation mode of Demand Limiting. The mode Monitor
Only means that no Load is to be shed.
Demand Limit
Indicates the maximum allowed average demand during the interval.
Algorithm
Indicates the type of mathematical procedure used to determine the
amount to shed for demand limiting.
Meter Object
References the object supplying the instantaneous demand.
Interval Length
Indicates the input used in the algorithm to indicate the number of
minutes in the sliding and fixed windows.
Offline Shed Rate

Indicates the absolute amount of power that Demand Limiting can
increase or decrease the current amount of power shed per minute
when the meter is offline. This value is specified in power/minute.
Positive numbers increase, negative numbers decrease the amount
shed.
Display Precision
object.
Indicates the operation mode of Load Rolling. The mode Monitor
Only means that no Loads are to be shed.
LR Target
Indicates the desired power reduction through Load Rolling.
Consumption Units
Defines the unit for energy values; for example, kWh.
Offline Shed Rate Units

Defines the unit used for offline shed rate value; for example,
kW/minute.
Rate Units
Defines units for demand values; for example, kW.
Limit Elevation
Indicates the amount in percent by which the demand limit is increased
at the beginning of the next interval. The increased demand limit is the
starting value of the the demand limit profile, in the Fixed Window
Algorithm.
EOI Attribute
Indicates the Attribute reference to the EOI pulse, in the Fixed
Window Algorithm.
Sensitivity
Indicates the level of aggression for shedding Loads, in the Sliding
Window Algorithm.
Registering Phase
Defines the time in seconds that the DLLR remains in the Register
mode to get all signed up Loads to register.
Algorithm Delay
Defines the time in seconds that the DLLR puts between the execution
of the meter object and the execution of the DL algorithm. This allows
the newest values to be reported by the meter before the DL algorithm
executes.
Restart Register
Indicates (if set) if the DLLR enters the Register mode after a restart.
Procedure Overview
Table 19-1: Working with DLLR Objects
Add a DLLR Object Browse to and highlight the Energy container. Press the F3 (Add) key.
Highlight DLLR and press Enter. Fill in the fields using Table 19-2. Press
Edit a DLLR Object Browse to and highlight a DLLR object. Press Enter to open the object.
Press the F3 (Edit) key. Edit the fields using Table 19-2. Press the
(F3) Save key. Check the User Assistance area of the screen to verify if
Command a DLLR Object Browse to and highlight a DLLR object. Press the F2 (Command) key.
Delete a DLLR Object Browse to and highlight a DLLR object. Press Enter to open the object.
Detailed Procedures
Adding a DLLR Object
To add a DLLR object:
3. Highlight DLLR and press Enter. The first of two DLLR attribute
screens appears (Figure 19-1).
Figure 19-1: DLLR Object Attribute Screen (1 of 2)

Figure 19-2: DLLR Object Attribute Screen (2 of 2)


Section Attribute Required Default Options/Range
Object Type Yes DLLR The default is preset and cannot be changed.
Load Rolling LR Mode Yes LR Monitor Use the Spacebar and Backspace key to
only view and select options: LR Monitor only,
LR Shedding.
LR Target Yes 0.0 kW Enter a float value that is greater than or
equal to zero.

(Cont.)
Demand DL Mode Yes DL Monitor Use the Spacebar and Backspace key to
Limiting only view and select options: DL shedding,
DL monitor only.
Meter Object Yes Blank Enter the exact name of the Pulse Meter
object dedicated to this DLLR object.
Algorithm Yes None Use the Spacebar and Backspace key to
view and select options: None, Fixed
Window, Sliding Window.
Interval Yes 15 minutes Enter an integer value between 3 and
Length 60 minutes.
Offline Shed Yes 0.0 Enter a float value.
Rate kW/minutes
Demand Limit Yes 0.0 kW Enter a float value that is greater than or
equal to zero.
Rate Units Yes kW Use the Spacebar and Backspace key to
view and select options. Refer to Units
Enumeration Set in Appendix A: Object
(LIT-694980).
Consumption Yes kWh Use the Spacebar and Backspace key to
Units view and select options. Refer to Units
(LIT-694980).
Offline Shed Yes kW/min Use the Spacebar and Backspace key to
Rate Units view and select options. Refer to Units
(LIT-694980).
Sliding Sensitivity Yes Medium Use the Spacebar and Backspace key to
Window Alg view and select options: Low, Medium, High.
Display Display Yes 10ths Use the Spacebar and Backspace key to
Precision view and select options. Refer to Display
Fixed Window Limit Yes 0% Enter an integer value between 0% and 99%.
Alg Elevation
EOI Attribute Yes Blank Enter an object and attribute name.
Advanced Registering Yes 15 seconds Enter an integer value that is greater than or
Setup Phase equal to zero.
Algorithm Yes 5 seconds Enter an integer value that is greater than or
Delay equal to zero.
Restart Yes False Use the Spacebar and Backspace key to
Register view and select options:
True = The DLLR enters the Register mode
after a restart.
False = The DLLR does not enter Register
mode after a restart.

Editing a DLLR Object

To edit a DLLR object:
1. Browse to and highlight a DLLR object.
3. Press the F3 (Edit) key. The DLLR object attribute screen appears
5. Press the (F3) Save key.
Commanding a DLLR Object

To command a DLLR object:
until the desired command appears. The DLLR object supports the
commands listed in Table 19-3.

Command Description
Force Register Use this command only when necessary; for example, when
loads have been lost or when there are many changes to
the loads.
This command reinitializes connections between Load and
DLLR objects. Load shedding is suspended during this time.
Selecting False only updates the database while selecting
True clears out and then updates the database.
Enable Allows the DLLR object’s functionality.
Disable Prohibits the DLLR from sending shed load commands.

5. Press Enter.
Deleting a DLLR Object

To delete a DLLR object:
Chapter 20
Working with Load Objects T
Introduction
Load objects identify pieces of equipment, corresponding to an
N2 Binary Output, Binary Value (BV), Multistate Output (MSO),
Multistate Value (MSV), or Multiple Command (MC) object, that
consumes a certain noticeable amount of energy. Load objects register
with the DLLR (Demand Limiting/Load Rolling) object, meaning they
let the DLLR know they exist and can be shed to save energy when
appropriate.
• add a Load object
• edit a Load object
• command a Load object
• delete a Load object

Key Concepts
Load Object
This object allows a user to shut off equipment based on the evaluation
of information from the DLLR object (how much energy is used on
average and how much energy does not need to be used).
One Load object exists for every Load that participates in the DLLR
feature. The Load object receives a Shed Load command from the
DLLR object and takes immediate actions to switch off its associated
output, which then leads to the actual physical Load shedding, causing
the desired power reduction. The Load object is responsible for
monitoring the conditions that require the Load to be released. The
request to release a Load can also come from outside of the Load
object.
To achieve optimal operation, the Load object should be placed into
the device as close as possible to the device containing the output
attribute. If comfort override and output alarm checking are defined,
these attributes should be also very close to the Load object.
The comfort override attribute and the DLLR may be shared by
several Load objects, but the output attribute must not be referenced by
more than one Load object.
The Load object interacts with other objects. For more information,
refer to Appendix A: Building an Energy Management Application
(LIT-6892310) in this document.
Shedding
The entire process of turning off equipment for DLLR.
Releasing
The entire process of turning on equipment shed by DLLR.
Attributes
The Load object attributes described below are listed in the order that
in Table 20-2.
For additional information about the Load object and its attributes,
Object Name
Description
Object Type
Load.
Object Category
Enabled
Comfort Alarm Attr (Attribute)

References the attribute supplying the comfort override alarm
condition.
Output Alarm Attr (Attribute)

References the attribute supplying the output alarm condition.
Output Attribute
References the attribute controlling the physical output.
DLLR Object
Identifies the DLLR object that determines the load to be shed.
Load Priority
Specifies the load priority.
Load Use
Specifies the use of the Load object for either DL only, LR only, or
both DL and LR.
Number of States
Indicates the output attribute’s number of states.
Shed State
Specifies the output attribute state’s to be switched to when the load is
shed.
Load Locked
Indicates that the Load object is locked and will not shed its load.
It does not prevent the load from being released.
Restart Release
Specifies if the load should be released when the Load feature is
started.
Alarm Release
Specifies if the load should be released upon release time when the
DLLR object is in the alarm state.
Offline Release
Specifies if the load should be released upon release time when it has
lost communication with its DLLR object.
Rate 1
Indicates the absolute power difference when output changes from
State 1 to State 0.
Rate 2
State 2 to State 0.
Rate 3
State 3 to State 0.
Rate Units
Defines unit for demand values, for example, kW.
Min (Minimum) Shed Time

Specifies the minimum time in which the Load must be shed.
Max (Maximum) Shed Time

Specifies the maximum amount of time the load can be shed in
minutes. This time must be equal to or greater than the Minimum Shed
Time.
Min (Minimum) Release Time

Specifies the minimum amount of time in which the load must be
released in minutes.
Display Precision
object.
Registered Delay
Defines the delay in seconds for registering at the DLLR object after
the Load object is informed by the DLLR object that it is time to
register, or after the Load feature is started. This attribute can be varied
to avoid too many Load objects registering at the DLLR object at the
same time and to help in getting a certain order in the DLLR object’s
database.
Period
Defines the time period of the registering attempts in seconds.
Restart Register
Specifies if the load should register when the Load object is started or
restarted.
Procedure Overview
Table 20-1: Working with Load Objects
Add a Load Object Browse to and highlight the Energy container. Press the F3 (Add) key.
Highlight Load and press Enter. Fill in the fields using Table 20-2. Press
Edit a Load Object Browse and highlight a Load object. Press Enter to open the object. Press
the F3 (Edit) key. Edit the fields according to Table 20-2. Press the
Command a Load Object Browse to and highlight a Load object. Press the F2 (Command) key. Use
the Spacebar and the Backspace key to cycle through the list until the
desired command appears. Press Enter.
Delete a Load Object Browse to and highlight a Load object. Press Enter to open the object.
Detailed Procedures
Adding a Load Object
To add a Load object:
3. Highlight Load and press Enter. The first of two Load object
attribute screens appears (Figure 20-1 and Figure 20-2).
Figure 20-1: Load Object Attribute Screen (1 of 2)

Figure 20-2: Load Object Attribute Screen (2 of 2)


Area
Object Type Yes Load The default is preset and cannot be changed.
Setup Comfort Alarm Yes Blank Enter the exact object and attribute name of the
Attribute object controlling Comfort Alarm.
Output Alarm Yes Blank Enter the exact object and attribute name of the
Attribute object controlling Output Alarm.
Output Yes Blank Enter the exact object and attribute name of the
Attribute object controlling the Output.
DLLR Object Yes Blank Enter the exact name of the DLLR object.
Load Priority Yes 4 Enter a whole number from 1 to 4.

Area
(Cont.)
Setup Load Use Yes For DL Use the Spacebar and Backspace key to view
(Cont.) and LR and select options: For DL only, For LR only, For
DL and LR.
Number of Yes 2 Enter a whole number from 2 to 4.
States
Shed State Yes 0 Enter a whole number from 0 and 2 (must be at
least 2 less than the Number of States).
Load Locked Yes False Use the Spacebar and Backspace key to view
Restart Yes False Use the Spacebar and Backspace key to view
Release and select options: True, False.
Alarm Release Yes False Use the Spacebar and Backspace key to view
Offline Yes False Use the Spacebar and Backspace key to view
Release and select options: True, False.
Rate 1 Yes 0.0. kW Enter a float value greater than or equal to 0.
Rate Units Yes kW Use the Spacebar and Backspace key to view
and select options. Refer to Units Enumeration
Set in Appendix A: Object Enumeration Sets of
Min Shed Time Yes 1 minute Enter a whole number/Integer value greater
than 0.
Max Shed Yes 1 minute Enter a value greater than 0 or equal to Minimum
Time Shed Time.
Min Release Yes 1 minute Enter a value greater than 0 or equal to Minimum
Time Shed Time.
Display Yes 10ths Use the Spacebar and Backspace key to view
Precision and select options. Refer to Display Precision
(LIT-694980).
Advanced Registering Yes 0 second Enter an integer value greater than or equal to 0.
Setup Delay
Period Yes 86400 Enter an integer value greater than or equal to 0.
seconds
Restart Yes False Use the Spacebar and Backspace key to view
Register and select options: False, True

Editing a Load Object

To edit a Load object:
1. Browse and highlight a Load object.
3. Press the F3 (Edit) key. The Load object attribute screen appears
Commanding a Load Object

To command a Load object:
1. Browse to and highlight a Load object.
until the desired command appears. The Load object supports the
commands described in Table 20-3.

Command Description
Unlock Load Unlocks load making it available to shed.
Lock Load Locks load making it unavailable to shed.
Force Register Re-notifies the DLLR object that the Load object exists.
Used if the user suspects the Load object is not
registered correctly.
Release Load Releases and sheds the Load while obeying all
constraints concerning the releasing of loads, such as
when the Minimum Shed Time has not yet elapsed, the
Load is not yet released, but will wait until it becomes
eligible to be released. Options include:
• For DL
• For LR
• For DL and LR
Force Release Load Releases and sheds the load while ignoring all
constraints concerning the release of loads.
Enable Allows the functionality of the Load object and makes the
Load available to shed.
Disable Prevents the functionality of the Load object and makes
the Load unavailable to shed.

5. Press Enter.
Deleting a Load Object

To delete a Load object:
1. Browse to and highlight a Load object.
Chapter 21
Working with Pulse Meter

Objects T
Introduction
The Pulse Meter object calculates a rate of change in the Pulse
Counter. It also totalizes the counted pulses and converts them into
units of consumption.
• add a Pulse Meter object
• edit a Pulse Meter object
• command a Pulse Meter object
• delete a Pulse Meter object

Key Concepts
Pulse Meter Object
Working with the Pulse Meter object allows a user to determine the
rate of energy used and accumulated energy used.
The Pulse Meter object accumulates the differences between
consecutive reads of the integer value provided by a pulse counter and
calculates the rate of change between each reading of the value.
Note: The Pulse Meter object handles only counters that count
forward.
The Pulse Meter object must be tied to an N2 Pulse Counter object to
access the counter value that resides in the pulse counter hardware
device (which is hardwired to the pulse input). The N2 Pulse Counter
object may be hardware specific, while the Pulse Meter object is
hardware independent.
Multiple Pulse Meter objects may share the same N2 Pulse Counter
object. The Pulse Meter object must reside on the same device as the
N2 Pulse Counter device.
The Pulse Meter object interacts with other objects. For more
information, refer to Appendix A: Building an Energy Management
Application (LIT-6892310) in this document.
Attributes
The Pulse Meter object attributes described below are listed in the
For additional information about the Pulse Meter object attributes,
Object Name
Description
Object Type
Pulse Meter.
Object Category
Enabled
Meter Active
Specifies whether the associated Meter object should be collecting
data.
Counter Object
Specifies the associated Pulse Counter object.
Rollover Limit
Specifies the highest counter value before the pulse counter on the
pulse counting device rolls over to zero.
Rate Units
Specifies the engineering units for all rate attributes.
Rate Constant
Specifies a constant used in the algorithm.
Rate Limit
Specifies the highest allowed Present Value before using Rate Default.
Rate Default
Specifies the value of Present Value when the calculated rate exceeds
the Rate Limit.
Sample Time
Specifies the period of time for automatic executions of the algorithm.
Consumption Units
Specifies the engineering units for all consumption attributes.
Pulse Consumption
Specifies a constant used in the algorithm.
Display Precision
object.
Procedure Overview
Table 21-1: Working with Pulse Meter Objects
Add a Pulse Meter Object Browse to and highlight the Energy container. Press the F3 (Add) key.
Highlight Pulse Meter and press Enter. Fill in the fields using Table 21-2.
Edit a Pulse Meter Object Browse to and highlight a Pulse Meter object. Press Enter to open the
object. Press the F3 (Edit) key. Fill in the fields using Table 21-2. Press
the (F3) Save key. Check the User Assistance area of the screen to verify
Command a Pulse Meter Browse to and highlight a Pulse Meter object. Press the F2 (Command)
Object key. Use the Spacebar and Backspace key to cycle through the list until
Delete a Pulse Meter Object Browse to and highlight a Pulse Meter object. Press Enter to open the
Detailed Procedures
Adding a Pulse Meter Object
To add a Pulse Meter object:
3. Highlight Pulse Meter and press Enter. The Pulse Meter object
Figure 21-1: Pulse Meter Object Attribute Screen


Area
Object Type Yes Pulse The default is preset and cannot be changed.
Meter
Administrative.
Enabled Yes True Use the Spacebar and Backspace key to view and
select options: True, False.
Setup Counter Object Yes Blank Enter the exact name of the object that will provide
the pulse counter value.
Rollover Limit Yes 32767 Enter a whole number. The value depends on the
hardware used for the Pulse Counter:
• N2 open = 32767 (default)
• SYS 91 = depends on the configuration
Rate Units Yes kW Use the Spacebar and the Backspace key to view
and select options. Refer to Units Enumeration Set
in Appendix A: Object Enumeration Sets of the
Object Dictionary (LIT-694980).
Rate Constant Yes 3600 Enter a float value greater than zero.
Rate Limit Yes 3.402823 Enter a float value greater than or equal to zero.
E38
Rate Default Yes 0 kW Enter a float value greater than or equal to zero.
Sample Time Yes 60 Enter a whole number greater than or equal to zero.
seconds
Consumption Yes kWh Use the Spacebar and the Backspace key to view
Units and select options. Refer to Units Enumeration Set
in Appendix A: Object Enumeration Sets of the
Pulse Yes 1.0 kWh Enter a float value greater than zero. Must be set to
Consumption the physical quantity that each single pulse
represents.
Display Yes 10ths Use the Spacebar and the Backspace key to view
Enumeration Set in Appendix A: Object Enumeration
Sets of the Object Dictionary (LIT-694980).

Editing a Pulse Meter Object

To edit a Pulse Meter object:
1. Browse to and highlight a Pulse Meter object.
3. Press the F3 (Edit) key. The Pulse Meter object attribute screen
5. Press the (F3) Save key.
Commanding a Pulse Meter Object

To command a Pulse Meter object:
the desired command appears. The Pulse Meter object supports

Command Description
Reset Resets the Pulse Meter, including the Consumption
attribute.
Start Meter Resumes metering.
Stop Meter Stops metering.
Enable Starts metering dependent on the Meter Active
attribute (True).
Disable Disables metering independent of the Meter Active
attribute (True or False).
4. Press Enter.
Deleting a Pulse Meter Object

To delete a Pulse Meter object:
Chapter 22
Working with Utility Profile

Objects
Introduction
The Utility Profile object is a standalone object that takes over some
functions provided by the DLLR (Demand Limiting/Load Rolling)
application. Working with this object allows a user to report energy
usage.
• add a Utility Profile object
• edit a Utility Profile object
• command a Utility Profile object
• delete a Utility Profile object

Key Concepts
Utility Profile Object
The Utility Profile object collects utility data from a Pulse Meter
object and a DLLR object. The associated Pulse Meter object should
be dedicated to the Utility Profile object, since it will be activated,
de-activated, and reset by the Utility Profile object. The DLLR object
may be shared by multiple Utility Profile objects. This is the case
when separate utility profiles should be generated for different
tracking periods, such as daily, weekly, and monthly.
For each tracking period it logs the following:
• the energy consumption
• the time and date of the interval with the highest energy
consumption
• the time and date of the interval with the highest sum of energy
consumption and energy not consumed due to shedding
For more information about how the Utility Profile object interacts
with other objects, refer to Appendix A: Building an Energy
Management Application (LIT-6892310) in this document.
Attributes
The Utility Profile object attributes described below are listed in the
For additional information about the Utility Profile object and its
Object Name
Description
Object Type
Utility Profile.
Object Category
Enabled
Meter Active
Specifies whether the associated Meter object should be collecting
data.
DLLR Object
Specifies the associated DLLR object.
Meter Object
Specifies the associated Pulse Meter object.
Tracking Periods
Indicates the period during which consumption is totaled before being
reset, typically a billing period.
Display Precision
object.
Consumption Units
Specifies units for all energy values (kWh).
Rate Units
Specifies units for all demand values (kW).
Procedure Overview
Table 22-1: Working with Utility Profile Objects
Add a Utility Profile Object Browse to and highlight the Energy container. Press the F3 (Add) key.
Highlight Utility Profile and press Enter. Fill in the fields using Table 22-2.
Edit a Utility Profile Object Browse to and highlight a Utility Profile object. Press Enter to open the
Command a Utility Profile Browse to and highlight a Utility Profile object. Press the F2 (Command)
Object key. Use the Spacebar and Backspace key to cycle through the list until
Delete a Utility Profile Object Browse to and highlight a Utility Profile object. Press Enter to open the
Detailed Procedures
Adding a Utility Profile Object
To add a Utility Profile object:
3. Highlight Utility Profile and press Enter. The Utility Profile object
Figure 22-1: Utility Profile Object Attribute Screen


name.
Object Type Yes Utility Profile The default is preset and cannot be
changed.
Setup DLLR Object Yes Blank Enter the exact name of the associated
DLLR object.
Meter Object Yes Blank Enter the exact name of the associated
Meter object.
Tracking Yes 31 Enter a whole number from 1 to 31.
Periods
Display Yes 10ths Use the Spacebar and the Backspace key
Precision to view and select options. Refer to Display
Consumption Yes kWh Use the Spacebar and the Backspace key
Units to view and select options. Refer to Units
(LIT-694980).
Rate Units Yes kW Use the Spacebar and the Backspace key
to view and select options. Refer to Units
(LIT-694980).

Editing a Utility Profile Object

To edit a Utility Profile object:
1. Browse to and highlight a Utility Profile object.
3. Press the F3 (Edit) key. The Utility Profile object attribute screen
Commanding a Utility Profile Object

To command a Utility Profile object:
the desired command appears. The Utility Profile object supports

Command Description
Display Displays the customized profile summary on the active user
interface.
Print Sends the customized utility profile summary to be printed at
an identified printer. Enter the exact name of the Printer
object.
Reset Resets and starts a new tracking period.
Start Meter Allows metering.
Stop Meter Prevents metering.
Enable Starts metering dependent on the Meter Active attribute
(True).
Disable Disables metering independent of the Meter Active attribute
(True or False).

5. Press Enter.
Deleting a Utility Profile Object

To delete a Utility Profile object:
Chapter 23
Working with Analog Totalization

Objects
Introduction
An Analog Totalization object maintains a total for the data recorded
at an analog sensor. It answers the question “How much?” and is
typically used to measure the consumption of a supply, such as steam,
electricity, or chilled water. The input sensor provides a value
corresponding to the amount of consumption or flow.
• add an Analog Totalization object
• edit an Analog Totalization object
• command an Analog Totalization object
• delete an Analog Totalization object
© November, 2001 Johnson Controls, Inc. www.johnsoncontrols.com

Key Concepts
Analog Totalization Object
The Analog Totalization object can be added to any container or object
in the hierarchy. The Analog Totalization object references any analog
attribute value for input data calculations.
Note: The Input Reference of an Analog Totalization object should
refer to a signed or unsigned integer, a signed or unsigned
long, or a floating point based attribute in order to perform as
intended. Analog Totalization objects referencing other
attribute data types (e.g., Boolean) yield unusual results,
though not necessarily unusable results. Neither the VT100
nor Project Builder give an error message when this object is
attached to any attribute other than signed or unsigned
integer, signed or unsigned long, or floating point based
attributes.
Typical uses of Analog Totalization include:
• to determine how many kilowatt/hours were used in a week
• to determine how much steam is used in a week
• to totalize a calculated value (for instance, degree days)
The Analog Totalization formula and an example are illustrated in
Table 23-1.
Table 23-1: Analog Totalization Formula and Example Calculations

Analog Calculation
Totalization
Formula Present Value + (Input x Period)/(Time Factor x Scalefactor) = Present Value (New)
Example 200 gallons + (20 gallons x 1 minute)/(60 seconds x 1) = 220 gallons
Analog Totalization Object Reset

Table 23-2 describes under what conditions the reset of the Analog
Totalization object occurs and what conditions result due to the reset.
Table 23-2: Analog Totalization Reset

Reset Conditions
Occurs: • When a Reset Command is received.
• When the following attributes are rewritten:
Low Cutoff Value
Timebase
Scalefactor
Reset
Totalize Limit, when the Present Value has reached the currently defined
Totalize Limit value
Rollover, when the Present Value has reached the currently defined Totalize
Limit value
• Following a return from a Totalization object’s disabled state to an enabled
state
Results In: • Termination of ongoing calculations
• Restoration of the Present Value and Rollover Count values to their initial
states
• Retriggering of all Change-of-Value state changes
Attributes
The Analog Totalization object attributes described below are listed in
For additional information about the Analog Totalization object and its
Object Name
Description
Object Type
Analog Totalization.
Object Category
Enabled
Input Reference
Specifies the object and attribute totalized by this object. If this
attribute is unreliable or falls below the Low Cutoff Value, totalization
is temporarily suspended.
Timebase
Establishes the time frame on which the calculated totalization value is
based. Processing a write of this attribute sets the Reset condition.
Scalefactor
Indicates the value used to scale the totalized value to either a larger or
smaller value than would otherwise result. Processing a write of this
attribute sets the Reset condition. This value must be greater than zero.
Totalize Limit
Defines a threshold value the Present Value must meet or exceed in
order for the totalization object to take special action. The special
action taken depends on the setting defined for the Rollover attribute.
Low CutOff Value

Defines a minimum input value; values beneath this minimum input
value are not totalized. With this attribute, sensor errors associated
with the low readings of flow sensors can be eliminated. Writing this
attribute forces a Reset condition.
Rollover
Defines the special action that the Analog Totalization object must
take when the Present Value reaches the Totalize Limit value. If the
Rollover attribute is set to False, the Runtime Totalization object
ceases further operation when the Present Value equals or exceeds the
Totalize Limit value. If it is True, it resets the Present Value to 0.0 and
resumes a new totalization cycle.
Units
Indicates the measurement units of this object.
Display Precision
object.
Present Value
Represents the current totalized value of the object. Writing this
attribute (changing it) forces the Reset condition. Present Value
appears to the right of the object name in the container hierarchy after
the object is created.
Reset
Forces a Reset condition and then returns to False, after a write of this
attribute to True. The reading of this attribute (viewing it on the user
interface) always returns a False condition. This attribute is not
displayed on the attributes screen but it is useful for advanced
diagnostics.
Rollover Count
Indicates how many rollovers have occurred since the object started
totalization, when the Rollover attribute is True. This is an internal
attribute value. It is not displayed on the attributes screen but it is
useful for advanced diagnostics.
Procedure Overview
Table 23-3: Working with Analog Totalization Objects
Add an Analog Totalization Browse to and highlight the container or object where the Analog
Object Totalization object is to be added. Press the F3 (Add) key. Select Analog
Totalization and press Enter. Fill in the fields using Table 23-4. Press the
Edit an Analog Totalization Browse to and highlight an Analog Totalization object. Press Enter to
Command an Analog Browse to and highlight an Analog Totalization object. Press the
Totalization Object F2 (Command) key. Use the Spacebar and the Backspace key to cycle
Delete an Analog Totalization Browse to and highlight an Analog Totalization object. Press Enter to
deletion.
Detailed Procedures
Adding an Analog Totalization Object
To add an Analog Totalization object:
1. Browse to and highlight the container or object where the Analog
Totalization object is to be added.
3. Select Analog Totalization and press Enter. The Analog
Totalization object attribute screen appears (Figure 23-1).
Figure 23-1: Analog Totalization Object Attribute Screen


Object Type Yes Analog The default is preset and cannot be changed.
Totalization
Input Yes If this Analog Totalization object is being
Reference added to a container, the exact name of the
object and attribute to be totalized must be
entered. If this Analog Totalization object is
being added to an object, the name of that
object appears automatically with its
Present Value attribute.
Example: HEATING SP.Present Value.
Present Value is the default attribute that
appears.
Engineering Timebase Yes Hours Use the Spacebar and Backspace key to view
Values and select options: Hours, Seconds, Minutes.
Scalefactor Yes 1.0 A float value greater than 0
Totalize No Blank A float value greater than 0
Limit
Low Cutoff Yes 0.0 A float value greater than 0
Value
Rollover Yes False Use the Spacebar and Backspace key to view
Display Units Yes Blank Use the Spacebar and the Backspace key to
cycle through the list of options. Refer to Units
(LIT-694980).
Display Yes 10ths Use the Spacebar and Backspace key to cycle
Precision through the list of options. Refer to Display

Editing an Analog Totalization Object

To edit an Analog Totalization object:
1. Browse to and highlight an Analog Totalization object.
3. Press the F3 (Edit) key. The Analog Totalization object attribute
Commanding an Analog Totalization Object

To command an Analog Totalization object:
until the desired command appears. The Analog Totalization
object supports the commands listed in (Table 23-5).

Command Description
Reset Resets the Present Value to zero.
Enable Instructs the Analog Totalization object to start analog totalizing
the Input Reference object.
Disable Instructs the Analog Totalization object to stop analog totalizing
4. Press Enter.
Deleting an Analog Totalization Object

To delete an Analog Totalization object:
Chapter 24
Working with Event Totalization

Objects
Introduction
The Event Totalization object tracks the number of events or pulses
over time, meaning it counts the number of transitions in an object’s
value.
• add an Event Totalization object
• edit an Event Totalization object
• command an Event Totalization object
• delete an Event Totalization object

Key Concepts
Event Totalization Object
An Event Totalization object records a total for the number of times
any binary event has occurred. Unlike the other types of totalization,
Event Totalization updates its Present Value output each time an event
occurs, instead of calculating the value every minute.
The Event Totalization object can be added to any container or object
in the hierarchy. The Event Totalization object references any object
and one of its attributes for input data calculations.
Note: The Input Reference of an Event Totalization object should
refer to enumeration or Boolean based attributes in order to
perform as intended. Event Totalization objects referencing
other attribute data types (e.g., floating point) yield unusual
results, though not necessarily unusable results. Neither the
VT100 nor Project Builder give an error message when this
object is attached to any attribute other than enumeration or
Boolean based attributes.
Typical uses for Event Totalization are determining:
• how many times a motor started
• how often a sensor was in alarm
• how many cars entered a parking lot
The Event Totalization formula and an example are illustrated in
Table 24-1. Refer to the Attributes section of this chapter for
information about attributes used in the calculation.
Table 24-1: Event Totalization Formula and Example Calculations

Event Calculation
Totalization
Formula Present Value + (Value per Pulse/Scalefactor) = Present Value (New)
Example 1 person + (1/1) = 2 persons (Occupancy)
Event Totalization Object Reset

Describes under what conditions the reset of the Event Totalization
object occurs and what conditions result due to the reset.
Table 24-2: Event Totalization Reset

Reset Conditions
Low Cutoff Value
Timebase
Scalefactor
Reset
Limit value
state
states
Attributes
The Event Totalization object attributes described below are listed in
For additional information about the Event Totalization object and its
Object Name
Description
Object Type
Event Totalization.
Object Category
Enabled
Input Reference
attribute is unreliable, totalization is temporarily suspended.
Reference
Defines the state (0-31) in which the Input Reference attribute must be
for totalization to be active. Writing this attribute forces the Reset
condition.
Value Per Pulse

Indicates the unit value of the Input Reference for pulse totalization.
For the event totalization, the value is 1. Writing this attribute sets the
Reset condition.
Transition
Defines which transitions should be counted. If the value is Entering
State, it counts the number of transitions into a given state as indicated
by the Reference attribute. If the value is Count All, it counts all state
transitions. Writing this attribute sets the Reset condition.
Scalefactor
smaller value than would otherwise result. Writing this attribute sets
the Reset condition.
Totalize Limit
Defines a threshold value the Present Value must meet or exceed in
order for the totalization object to take special action. The special
action taken depends on the setting defined for the Rollover attribute.
Rollover
Defines the special action the totalization object must take when the
Present Value reaches the Totalize Limit value. If the Rollover
attribute is set to False, the Runtime Totalization object ceases further
operation when the Present Value equals or exceeds the Totalize Limit
value. If it is True, it will reset the Present Value to 0.0 and resume a
new cycle of totalization.
Units
Display Precision
object.
Present Value
attribute forces the Reset condition. Present Value appears to the right
of the object name in the container hierarchy after the object is created.
Reset
Forces a Reset condition, after a write of this attribute to True. The
reading of this attribute always returns a False condition. It is not
diagnostics.
Rollover Count
Procedure Overview
Table 24-3: Working with Event Totalization Objects
Add an Event Totalization Browse to and highlight the container or object where the Event
Object Totalization object is to be added. Press the F3 (Add) key. Select Event
Edit an Event Totalization Browse to and highlight an Event Totalization object. Press Enter to open
Object the object. Press the F3 (Edit) key. Edit the fields using Table 24-4. Press
Command an Event Browse to and highlight an Event Totalization object. Press the
through the list of commands until the desired command appears.
Press Enter.
Delete an Event Totalization Browse to and highlight an Event Totalization object. Press Enter to open
Object the object. Press the Delete key. Press the Tab key to confirm the
deletion.
Detailed Procedures
Adding an Event Totalization Object
To add an Event Totalization object:
1. Browse to and highlight the container or object where the Event
Totalization object is to be added.
3. Select Event Totalization and press Enter. The Event Totalization
object attribute screen appears (Figure 24-1).
Figure 24-1: Event Totalization Object Attribute Screen


Object Yes Event The default is preset and cannot be changed.
Type Totalization
Input Yes If this Event Totalization object is being added
Reference to a container, the exact name of the object and
attribute to be totalized must be entered. If this
Event Totalization object is being added to
another object, the name of that object appears
automatically with its Present Value attribute.
appears.
Engineering Reference Yes State 0 Use the Spacebar and Backspace key to cycle
Values through the list of options: 0 to 31.
Value Per Yes 1 A float value equal to or greater than 0
Pulse
Transition Yes Entering Use the Spacebar and Backspace key to cycle
State through the list of options: Entering State,
Count All.
Totalize No Blank A float value greater than 0
Limit
Display Units Yes Blank Use the Spacebar and Backspace key to view
Display Yes 1s Use the Spacebar and Backspace key to view
(LIT-694980).

Editing an Event Totalization Object

To edit an Event Totalization object:
1. Browse to and highlight an Event Totalization object.
3. Press the F3 (Edit) key. The Event Totalization object attribute
Commanding an Event Totalization Object

To command an Event Totalization object:
of commands until the desired command appears. The Event
Totalization object supports the commands identified in
Table 24-5.

Command Description
Reset Resets the Present Value to zero.
Enable Instructs the Event Totalization object to start event totalizing the
Input Reference object.
Disable Instructs the Event Totalization object to stop event totalizing the
Input Reference object.
4. Press Enter.
Deleting an Event Totalization Object

To delete an Event Totalization object:
Troubleshooting
When configuring an Event Totalization object with a Multistate
Value object, the user can inadvertently specify a value for the
Reference attribute that is unobtainable within the Multistate Value
object. The Reference attribute dictates the state in which the targeted
object has its specified events recorded.
This situation occurs because the user is prompted with a generic list
of state selections ranging from State 0, State 1, State 2, all the way up
to State 31, when queried for the Reference value. Because this initial
selection list is not directly derived from the targeted Multistate Value,
it is possible for the user to select a value that actually falls outside the
range of values defined for the Multistate Value object.
Table 24-6 lists examples of potential problems and suggested
solutions.
Table 24-6: Event Totalization Multistate Configurations

Configuration Explanation Solution
The Multistate Value object is State 0, State 1, State 2, and The state specified for the
configured as follows: State 3 are the only legitimate Reference attribute of the Event
• Number of States attribute = 4 values that the Multistate Value Totalization object must be a
object can attain. state that can be legitimately
• States Text attribute = States achieved by the Multistate Value
(value ranges from State 0 to Since the Multistate Value object
cannot enter State 4, the Event object.
State 31)
Totalization object can record any
The Event Totalization object is events and its Present Value
configured as follows: remains at 0.
Reference attribute = State 4 No error message displays and the
Event Totalization object’s
Executing attribute displays Active,
despite an unobtainable value being
entered.
The Multistate Value object is Legitimate selections for the Event Edit the Event Totalization object
configured as follows: Totalization object include: using the steps described in the
• Number of States attribute = 4 State 0 (Occupied) Editing an Event Totalization
Object, highlight the Reference
• States Text attribute = HVAC State 1 (Unoccupied)
attribute field and press the
Mode (Startup, Shutdown, State 2 (Startup) Spacebar or Backspace key.
Occupied, Unoccupied)
State 3 (Shutdown) This action forces a presentation
The Event Totalization object is of the attainable values, given
Since State 4 falls outside the range
configured as follows: the value of the Multistate Value
of legitimate Multistate Values, the
Reference attribute = Any Event Totalization object is object’s States Text attribute.
available options: State 0 through inoperable. The compatible value can then
State 31 be chosen from the values
State 4 also falls outside the range
of legitimate States Text values. presented.
Examination of the Event
Totalization object via the VT100
results in the terminal beeping and
the Reference attribute value
displaying a “?”.

Configuration (Cont.) Explanation Solution

The Multistate Value object is Legitimate selections for the Event The state specified for the
configured as follows: Totalization object include: Reference attribute of the Event
• Number of States attribute = 3 State 0 (Occupied) Totalization object must be a
state that can be legitimately
• States Text attribute = HVAC State 1 (Unoccupied)
achieved by the Multistate Value
Mode (Startup, Occupied, State 2 (Startup) object.
Unoccupied are possible.
Since State 3 falls outside the range
Shutdown is not achievable
of legitimate Multistate Values, the
by the Multistate Value
Event Totalization object is
object.)
inoperable.
The Event Totalization object is
However, State 3 falls within the
configured as follows:
legitimate range of HVAC mode
Reference attribute = State 3 values, so the examination of the
(This correlates to Shutdown.) Event Totalization object via the
VT100 does not result in the
terminal beeping nor the Reference
attribute value displaying a “?”.
IMPORTANT: It is recommended to set the Reference attribute of a

new Event Totalization object being configured with
a Multistate Value object to an initial selection of
State 0. This guarantees that no matter which States
Text set is employed by the Multistate Value object,
the value falls within the legitimate range. After
creating the Event Totalization object, go back and
edit the Reference attribute to the required State.
This allows the presentation of legitimate values given
the Multistate Value object’s States Text attribute.
Chapter 25
Working with
Runtime Totalization Objects
Introduction
The Runtime Totalization object tracks the number of one minute time
intervals that elapse while a designated input, such as a binary or
multistate value, has matched a specified state.
• add a Runtime Totalization object
• edit a Runtime Totalization object
• command a Runtime Totalization object
• delete a Runtime Totalization object

Key Concepts
Runtime Totalization Object
A Runtime Totalization object accumulates total time only while a
particular condition is satisfied (for instance, Supply Fan 1 is on).
It answers the question “How long?” and is typically used to even out
the use and wear of equipment, or to schedule maintenance after a
certain amount of use. Data is recorded in minutes and converted to
hours for the display.
The Runtime Totalization object can be added to any container or
object. The Runtime Totalization object references any binary or
multistate attribute value for input data for its own calculations.
Note: The Input Reference of a Runtime Totalization object should
perform as intended. Runtime Totalization objects
referencing other attribute data types (e.g., floating point)
yield unusual results, though not necessarily unusable
results. Neither the VT100 nor Project Builder give an error
message when this object is attached to any attribute other
than enumeration or Boolean based attributes.
Typical uses for a Runtime Totalization object are determining:
• fan or pump runtime
• the amount of time a point is in alarm
• runtime of fixed loads (such as lighting) for energy totalization and
tenant billback
The Runtime Totalization formula and an example are illustrated in
Table 25-1. Refer to the Attributes section of this chapter for
information about attributes used in the calculation.
Table 25-1: Runtime Totalization Formula and Example Calculations

Runtime Calculation
Totalization
Formula Present Value (current) + TA / (3600 x Scalefactor) = Present Value (new)
Example 1.5 hours + 60 seconds/(3600 seconds/hour x 1) = 1.52 hours
Note: TA represents the time the Input Reference spends in the Reference state.
Runtime Totalization Object Reset

Describes under what conditions the reset of the Runtime Totalization
object occurs and what conditions result due to the reset.
Table 25-2: Runtime Totalization Reset

Reset Conditions
Low Cutoff Value
Timebase
Scalefactor
Reset
Limit value
state
states
Attributes
The Runtime Totalization object attributes described below are listed
in the order that they appear on the screen. Entry requirements for
these attributes are in Table 25-4.
For additional information about the Runtime Totalization object and
its attributes, refer to Object Dictionary.
Object Name
Description
Object Type
Runtime Totalization.
Object Category
Enabled
Input Reference
attribute is unreliable or changes from the Reference (state) to another
state, totalization is temporarily suspended.
Reference
Defines the state (0-31) totalized as defined in the Input Reference
attribute. Writing this attribute forces the Reset condition.
Scalefactor
smaller value than would otherwise result. Writing this attribute forces
the Reset condition.
Totalize Limit
Defines a threshold value that the Present Value must meet or exceed
in order for the Runtime Totalization object to take special action. The
special action taken depends on the setting defined for the Rollover
attribute.
Rollover
Defines the special action the Runtime Totalization object must take
when the Present Value reaches the Totalize Limit value. If the
Rollover attribute is set to False, the Runtime Totalization object
ceases further operation when the Present Value equals or exceeds the
Totalize Limit value. If it is True, it will reset the present Value to 0.0
and resume a new cycle of totalization.
States Text
Indicates the text that appears for the Present Value.
Units
Display Precision
object.
Present Value
attribute forces the Reset condition. Present Value appears to the right
of the object name in the container hierarchy after the object is created.
Reset
Forces a Reset condition, after a write of this attribute to True. The
reading of this attribute always returns a False condition. It is not
diagnostics.
Rollover Count
Procedure Overview
Table 25-3: Working with Runtime Totalization Objects
Add a Runtime Totalization Browse to and highlight the container or object where the Runtime
Object Totalization object is to be added. Press the F3 (Add) key. Select Runtime
Edit a Runtime Totalization Browse to and highlight a Runtime Totalization object. Press Enter to
Command a Runtime Browse to and highlight a Runtime Totalization object. Press the
through the list of commands until the desired command appears.
Press Enter.
Delete a Runtime Totalization Browse to and highlight a Runtime Totalization object. Press Enter to
deletion.
Detailed Procedures
Adding a Runtime Totalization Object
To add a Runtime Totalization object:
1. Browse to and highlight the container or object where the
Runtime Totalization object is to be added.
3. Select Runtime Totalization and press Enter. The Runtime
Totalization object attribute screen appears (Figure 25-1).
Figure 25-1: Runtime Totalization Object Attribute Screen


Area
Object Type Yes Runtime The default is preset and cannot be changed.
Totalization
Input Yes If this Runtime Totalization object is being
Reference added to a container, the exact name of the
object and attribute to be totalized must be
entered. If this Runtime Totalization object is
being added to another object, the name of
that object appears automatically with its
Present Value attribute.
appears.
Engineering Reference Yes State 1 Use the Spacebar and the Backspace key to
Values cycle through the list of options: 0 to 31.
Totalize Limit Yes (hours) A float value greater than 0
Display States Text Yes States Use the Spacebar and Backspace key to view
and select options. Refer to States Text in
Appendix A: Object Enumeration Sets of the
Units Yes hours Use the Spacebar and Backspace key to view
Display Yes 10ths Use the Spacebar and Backspace key to view
(LIT-694980).

Editing a Runtime Totalization Object

To edit a Runtime Totalization object:
1. Browse to and highlight a Runtime Totalization object.
3. Press the F3 (Edit) key. The Runtime Totalization object attribute
Commanding a Runtime Totalization Object

To command a Runtime Totalization object:
1. Browse to and highlight a Runtime Totalization object.
of commands until the desired command appears. The Runtime
Totalization object supports the commands identified in
Table 25-5.

Command Description
Reset Terminates ongoing calculations, restores the present value to
its initial state, creates a reset date and time stamp, and
reinitializes all Changes of Value.
Enable Forces a Reset on the Runtime Totalization object and returns it
to normal operation.
Disable Locks out all outputs and prevents functionality of the Runtime
Totalization object. Temporarily suspends totalization.
4. Press Enter.
Deleting a Runtime Totalization Object

To delete a Runtime Totalization object:
1. Browse to and highlight a Runtime Totalization.
Chapter 26
Working with Analog Alarm

Objects
Introduction
The Analog Alarm object adds the alarming capability for a
floating-point attribute of any object, such as the Present Value of an
Analog Input object.
Note: The Input Reference of an Analog Alarm object should refer
to an analog attribute type in order to perform as intended.
Analog Alarm objects referencing other attribute data types
(e.g., Boolean) yield unusual results, though not necessarily
unusable results. Neither the VT100 nor Project Builder give
an error message when this object is attached to any attribute
other than floating point based attributes.
This object detects an alarm based on up to four limits and can be
configured to report that alarm. This object sets the Alarm State
attribute of the object it is added to.
• add an Analog Alarm object
• edit an Analog Alarm object
• command an Analog Alarm object
• delete an Analog Alarm object

Key Concepts
Analog Alarm Object
When the Analog Alarm object’s Input attribute value exceeds the
defined limits, it causes a change in the Analog Alarm object’s present
value and the generation of a Status Notification Report (SNR).
For example, with this object you can have a warning issued if the
temperature in a room falls below 60°F and an alarm issued if the
temperature falls below 50°F.
States
The Analog Alarm object can be in any of the following states:
Normal State
This occurs when the Analog Alarm object is in an acceptable,
expected condition, as indicated by the Input attribute value.
Off Normal State

This occurs when the Analog Alarm object transitions into the high
and low warning conditions, as indicated by Input attribute value.
Fault State
This occurs when the Analog Alarm object transitions into the
high alarm, low alarm, and unreliable conditions, as indicated by the
Input attribute value.
SNR
Status Notification Report. A report that is generated by alarm
objects and routed via the Message Routing feature to printers and
VT100 Terminals.
Attributes
The Analog Alarm object attributes described below are listed in the
For additional information about the Analog Alarm object and its
Object Name
Description
Object Type
Analog Alarm.
Object Category
Enabled
Input Reference
Indicates the object and attribute monitored for Changes-of-Value
(COVs) and reported in alarm messages. The reliability of the Input
Reference is monitored and saved in the Reliability attribute of this
alarm object. The last value received from the Input Reference is
written to the Input attribute.
High Alarm Limit

Specifies the actual High Alarm Limit. If blank, the limit is not used.
Low Alarm Limit

Specifies the actual Low Alarm Limit. If blank, the limit is not used.
Differential
Indicates the amount the Input decreases or increases. If the Input is in
High Alarm (or High Warning), it must decrease by the Differential
before the object will return to High Warning (or Normal). If the Input
is in Low Alarm (or Low Warning), it must increase by the
Differential before the object will return to Low Warning (or Normal).
This Differential is provided to prevent nuisance alarms due to a value
that is cycling near an alarm (or warning) limit.
High Warning Offset

Indicates the value that is added to the Analog Alarm Reference
attribute to determine the actual High Warning Limit. If blank, the
offset is not used. Either the High Warning Offset and Low Warning
Offset must be defined or both must be blank.
Warning Reference
The value that is added to the High and Low Warning Offsets to create
the actual warning limits that the Input is compared against. The
Reference is typically a setpoint. In order to disable warning analysis,
this attribute must be blank.
Low Warning Offset

Indicates the value that is subtracted from the Analog Alarm Reference
variable to determine the actual Low Warning limit. If blank, the offset
is not used. Either the High Warning Offset and Low Warning Offset
must be defined or both must be blank.
Fault Ack Req (Acknowledgment Required)

Indicates whether a transition into the Fault state creates a Message
Requiring Acknowledgment (MRA).
Fault Priority
Provides the priority assigned to the Fault state that gets transmitted to
the SNR.
Fault Ack Pend (Acknowledgement Pending)

Indicates whether a Message Requiring Acknowledgment (MRA)
concerning a transition into the Fault state is waiting to be
acknowledged.
Off Normal Ack Req (Acknowledgement Required)

concerning a transition into the Off Normal state must be
acknowledged.
Event Enable
Determines if the object sends reports (SNRs), if this value is True.
Dialout Required
Forces a dial out to a destination device (if True), when this object
goes into an alarm or warning state.
Delay Time
Indicates the amount of time, following a change to the Analog Alarm
reference value, that an Input must get within the warning or alarm
limits before the object reports the warning. After this time, the input
value is reevaluated. If it is still outside of the limit, a report is
generated. If the Delay Time is changed, any current timer is canceled
and reset to the new Delay Time.
Off Normal Priority

Indicates the priority assigned to the Off Normal state that gets
transmitted to the SNR.
Normal Ack Req (Acknowledgement Required)

Indicates whether an MRA concerning a transition into the Normal
state must be acknowledged.
Normal Priority
Indicates the priority assigned to the Normal state that gets transmitted
to the SNR.
Alarm Message Text

Provides text associated with the SNR that a user can add for further
information when an alarm or warning occurs.
Procedure Overview
Table 26-1: Working with Analog Alarm Objects
Add an Analog Alarm Object Browse to and highlight the container or object where the Analog Alarm
object is to be added. Press the F3 (Add) key. Highlight Analog Alarm
and press Enter. Fill in the fields using Table 26-2. Press the F3 (Save)
Edit an Analog Alarm Object Browse to and highlight an Analog Alarm object. Press Enter to open the
Command an Analog Alarm Browse to and highlight an Analog Alarm object. Press the
Object F2 (Command) key. Use the Spacebar and the Backspace key to cycle
Delete an Analog Alarm Object Browse to and highlight an Analog Alarm object. Press Enter to open the
Detailed Procedures
Adding an Analog Alarm Object
To add an Analog Alarm object:
1. Browse to and highlight the container or object where the Analog
Alarm object is to be added.
3. Highlight Analog Alarm and press Enter. The first of two Analog
Alarm attribute screens appears (Figure 26-1).
Figure 26-1: Analog Alarm Attribute Screen (1 of 2)

Figure 26-2: Analog Alarm Attribute Screen (2 of 2)


Object Type Yes Analog The default is preset and cannot be changed.
Alarm
Engineering Input Yes Blank If this Analog Alarm object is being added to
Values Reference a container, the exact name of the object and
attribute to have an alarm must be entered. If
this Analog Alarm object is being added to
another object, the name of that object
appears automatically with its Present Value
attribute.
appears.

(Cont.)
Engineering High Alarm No Blank A float value. Must be greater than the value
Values (Cont.) Limit of (Analog Alarm Reference + High Warning
Offset).
Low Alarm No Blank A float value. Must be less than the value of
Limit (Analog Alarm Reference - Low Warning
Offset).
Differential Yes 0.00 A float value greater than or equal to zero.
High Warning No Blank A float value greater than or equal to zero.
Offset If warnings are defined, define both High
Warning Offset and Low Warning Offset or
neither.
Warning A float value that is added to the High and
Reference Low Warning Offsets to create the actual
warning limits that the Input is compared
against. To disable warning analysis, this
attribute must be blank.
Low Warning No Blank A float value greater than or equal to zero.
Offset If warnings are defined, define both High
Warning Offset and Low Warning Offset or
neither.
Alarm Setup Fault Ack Req Yes False Use the Spacebar and Backspace key to
view and select options:
False = Acknowledgement not required.
True = Acknowledgement required.
Fault Priority Yes Serious Use the Spacebar and Backspace key to
view and select options: Critical, Serious,
Important, Status.
Off Normal Yes False Use the Spacebar and Backspace key to
Ack Req view and select options:
Alarm State Event Enable Yes True Use the Spacebar and Backspace key to
True = Enables the object to report SNRs.
False = Disables SNR reporting feature.
Dialout Yes False Use the Spacebar and Backspace key to
Required view and select options:
False = Dialout not required.
True = Dialout required.
Delay Time Yes 0 seconds Units = Seconds
Off Normal Yes Important Use the Spacebar and Backspace key to
Priority view and select options: Critical, Serious,
Important, Status.

(Cont.)
Alarm State Normal Ack Yes False Use the Spacebar and Backspace key to
(Cont.) Req view and select options:
Normal Yes Status Use the Spacebar and Backspace key to
Important, Status.
Notification Identifies the instance number (Object
Class Identifier [OID]) of the local Notification Class
object to which notifications are sent.
Report Delay The number of seconds after the input value
goes outside of an alarm or warning limit that
the object waits before generating a warning
or alarm. This applies only to changes from
the normal state. After this time, the input
value is reevaluated. If it is still outside the
limit, a report is generated.
Alarm Setup Alarm Yes Blank Up to 56 alphanumeric characters (1 line)
Message Text

Editing an Analog Alarm Object

To edit an Analog Alarm object:
1. Browse to and highlight an Analog Alarm object.
3. Press the F3 (Edit) key. The Analog Alarm object attribute screen
appears.

Commanding an Analog Alarm Object

To command an Analog Alarm object:
until the desired command appears. The Analog Alarm object

Command Description
Cancel Delay Cancels delay timer if active. Canceling the delay time on an
Time Analog Alarm object causes a warning if the value is in this
state.
Cancel Report Cancels the report delay timer if active. Canceling the report
Delay Time delay time on an Analog Alarm object causes a warning or
alarm if the value is in this state.
Enable Allows regular alarm analysis.
Disable Prevents alarm analysis. Forces object to normal condition.
4. Press Enter.
Deleting an Analog Alarm Object

To delete an Analog Alarm object:
Chapter 27
Working with Multistate Alarm

Objects
Introduction
The Multistate Alarm object provides the alarming capability for a
Boolean or multistate attribute for any object, such as the Present
Value of a Binary Input object.
Note: The Input Reference of a Multistate Alarm object should
perform as intended. Multistate Alarm objects referencing
other attribute data types (e.g., floating point) yield unusual
results, though not necessarily unusable results. Neither the
VT100 nor Project Builder give an error message when this
object is attached to any attribute other than enumeration or
Boolean based attributes.
This object detects the alarm with respect to a difference from a
defined normal state, and it can be configured to report the alarm.
• add a Multistate Alarm object
• edit a Multistate Alarm object
• command a Multistate Alarm object
• delete a Multistate Alarm object

Key Concepts
Multistate Alarm Object
When the Multistate Alarm object’s Input attribute value goes Off, it
causes the generation of a Status Notification Report (SNR). For
example, an alarm can be issued when a switch is in the Off position.
States
The Multistate Alarm object can be in any of the following states:
Normal State
This occurs when the Multistate Alarm object is in an acceptable,
expected condition, as indicated by the Input attribute value.
Fault State
This occurs when the Multistate Alarm object enters the alarm
condition, as indicated by the Input attribute value.
SNR
Status Notification Report. A report that is generated and routed via
the Message Routing feature to printers and VT100 Terminals.
Attributes
The Multistate Alarm object attributes described below are listed in the
For additional information about the Multistate Alarm object and its
Object Name
Description
Object Type
Multistate Alarm.
Object Category
Enabled
Input Reference
Indicates the object and attribute monitored for Changes-of-Value
(COVs) and reported in alarm messages. The last value received from
the Input Reference is written to the Input attribute. Also, the
reliability of the Input Reference is monitored and saved in the
Reliability attribute of this object.
Normal State
Indicates the attribute value that is compared to the Input. If the Input
value is different from the Normal State, an Alarm state occurs.
Fault Ack Req (Acknowledgement Required)

concerning a transition into the Fault state must be acknowledged.
Fault Priority
Indicates the priority assigned to the Fault state that gets transmitted to
the SNR.
Normal Ack Required (Acknowledgement Required)

Indicates whether an MRA concerning a transition into the Normal
state must be acknowledged.
Normal Priority
Indicates the priority assigned to the Normal state that gets transmitted
to the SNR.
Event Enable
Determines if the object sends reports (SNRs), if this value is True.
Dialout Required
Forces a dial out to a destination device (if True), when this object
goes into an alarm or warning state.
Delay Time
Indicates the amount of time Input has to get within the alarm limits
before the object reports the alarm, following a Normal state change.
The Present Value does not change what is reported until the Delay
Time has expired. If the Delay Time is changed, any current timer is
canceled and reset to the new Delay Time.
Alarm Message Text

Provides text associated with the SNR that a user can add for further
information when an alarm or warning occurs.
Procedure Overview
Table 27-1: Working with Multistate Alarm Objects
Add a Multistate Alarm Object Browse to and highlight the container or object where the Multistate Alarm
is to be added. Press the F3 (Add) key. Highlight Multistate Alarm and
press Enter. Fill in the fields using Table 27-2. Press the F3 (Save) key.
Edit a Multistate Alarm Object Browse to and highlight a Multistate Alarm object. Press Enter to open the
Command a Multistate Alarm Browse to and highlight a Multistate Alarm object. Press the
Object F2 (Command) key. Use the Spacebar and the Backspace key to cycle
Delete a Multistate Alarm Browse to and highlight a Multistate Alarm object. Press Enter to open the
Object object. Press the Delete key. Press the Tab key to confirm the deletion.
Detailed Procedures
Adding a Multistate Alarm Object
To add a Multistate Alarm object:
1. Browse to and highlight the container or object where the
Multistate Alarm is to be added.
3. Highlight Multistate Alarm and press Enter. The first of
two Multistate Alarm object attribute screens appears
(Figure 27-1).
Figure 27-1: Multistate Alarm Object Attribute Screen (1 of 2)

Figure 27-2: Multistate Alarm Object Attribute Screen (2 of 2)


name.
Object Type Yes Multistate The default is preset and cannot be
Alarm changed.

(Cont.)
Engineering Input Yes If this Multistate Alarm object is being added
Values Reference to a container, the exact name of the object
and attribute to have an alarm must be
entered. If this object is being added to
another object, the name of that object
appears automatically with its Present Value
attribute.
appears.
Normal State Yes State 0 Use the Spacebar and Backspace key to
view and select options: State 0-State 31.
Alarm Setup Fault Ack Req Yes False Use the Spacebar and Backspace key to
Fault Priority Yes Serious Use the Spacebar and Backspace key to
view and select options: Critical, Serious,
Important, Status.
Normal Ack Yes False Use the Spacebar and Backspace key to
Req view and select options:
Normal Yes Status Use the Spacebar and Backspace key to
Important, Status.
Notification Identifies the instance number (Object
Class Identifier [OID]) of the local Notification
Class object to which notifications are sent.
Alarm State Event Enable Yes True Use the Spacebar and Backspace key to
Dialout Yes False Use the Spacebar and Backspace key to
Required view and select options: True, False.
Report Delay The number of seconds after the input value
goes outside of an alarm or warning limit
that the object waits before generating a
warning or alarm. This applies only to
changes from the normal state. After this
time, the input value is reevaluated. If it is
still outside the limit, a report is generated.
Delay Time No 0 second Units = seconds
Alarm Setup Alarm No Blank Type a message up to one line that appears
Message Text when an alarm occurs.

was successful. If errors are detected, correct them and resave the
entries. Once the save is successful, continue with Step 7.
Editing a Multistate Alarm Object

To edit a Multistate Alarm object:
1. Browse to and highlight a Multistate Alarm object.
3. Press the F3 (Edit) key. The Multistate Alarm object attribute
screen appears (Figure 27-1 and Figure 27-2).
Commanding a Multistate Alarm Object

To command a Multistate Alarm object:
until the desired command appears. The Multistate Alarm object

Command Description
Cancel Delay Time Cancels the current Delay Timer.
Enable Allows regular alarm analysis.
Disable Prevents alarm analysis. Forces object to normal
condition.
4. Press Enter.
Deleting a Multistate Alarm Object

To delete a Multistate Alarm object:
3. Press the Delete.
Chapter 28
Working with Trend Log Objects
Introduction
The Trend Log object monitors and records changes in the behavior of
an individual attribute over time, in order to help operators diagnose
various site-wide behavioral characteristics.
• add a Trend Log object
• edit a Trend Log object
• command a Trend Log object
• delete a Trend Log object

Key Concepts
Trend Log Object
The Trend Log object can be added to any object to sample the value
of any of the attributes of the following data types: Boolean, float,
double float, enumeration, byte, unsigned integer, unsigned long,
signed integer, signed long, or bit string. Typically, a Trend Log object
collects data from an N2 Analog Input point object in a controller,
which reports information such as outdoor air temperature or room air
temperature. This data can be displayed or printed. Figure 28-1 shows
a sample of Trend Log object data collected.
Trend Log Data From: ADMIN-Office, Present Value, Fault, OutOfService
27 Aug 1999 12:00:00 78.0 deg F
27 Aug 1999 14:32:00 79.1 deg F
28 Aug 1999 00:00:00 79.1 deg F
28 Aug 1999 12:00:00 79.1 deg F
29 Aug 1999 00:00:00 78.7 deg F
29 Aug 1999 12:00:00 79.3 deg F
30 Aug 1999 00:00:00 81.3 deg F
Figure 28-1: Sample Trend Log
Attributes
The Trend Log object attributes described below are listed in the order
that they appear on the screen. Entry requirements for these attributes
are in Table 28-2.
For additional information about the Trend Log object and its
Object Name
Description
Object Type
Trend Log.
Object Category
Enabled
Stop When Full

Determines whether the Trend Log object stops collecting data when it
fills the buffer. True causes the Trend Log object to stop collecting
data when the buffer is full. False causes it to continue collecting data
every interval and to overwrite the oldest data sample with each new
data sample.
Buffer Size
Determines how many data samples can be collected before the Trend
Log object must stop collecting data, or begin overwriting the oldest
data samples.
Log Interval
Determines how often the Trend Log object collects data from the
Input Reference object. For example, a Log Interval of 600 seconds
causes the Trend Log object to collect a data sample every
600 seconds (10 minutes). When Log Interval is set to zero, the
Trend Log object operates as a Change-Of-Value (COV) mechanism,
only recording data when the value of the Input Reference object
changes by a difference equal to or greater than the COV Increment
defined in the Input Reference object.
Input Reference
Determines which object or attribute the Trend Log object collects
data from. The Input Reference and the name of the object and
attribute to be trended must match exactly.
Procedure Overview
Table 28-1: Working with Trend Log Objects
Add a Trend Log Object Browse to and highlight the container or object where the Trend Log
object is to be added. Press the F3 (Add) key. Highlight Trend Log and
press Enter. Fill in the fields using Table 28-2 Press the F3 (Save) key.
Edit a Trend Log Object Browse to and highlight a Trend Log object. Press Enter to open the
Command a Trend Log Object Browse to and highlight a Trend Log object. Press the F2 (Command)
key. Use the Spacebar and the Backspace key to cycle through the list
Delete a Trend Log Object Browse to and highlight a Trend Log object. Press Enter to open the
Detailed Procedures
Adding a Trend Log Object
To add a Trend Log object:
1. Browse to and highlight the container or object where the Trend
Log object is to be added.
3. Highlight Trend Log and press Enter. The Trend Log object
Figure 28-2: Trend Log Object Attribute Screen


Area
Object Type Yes Trend Log The default is preset and cannot be changed.
Administrative.
Enabled Yes True Use the Spacebar and Backspace key to view and
select options: True, False.
Setup Stop When Yes False Use the Spacebar and Backspace key to view and
Full select options: True, False.
Buffer Size 144 1-5000
Log Interval 600 Minimum Value = 0
Maximum Value = 86400
Units = Seconds
Input Yes If this Trend Log object is being added to a
Reference container, the exact name of the object and
attribute to be trended must be entered. If this
Trend Log object is being added to another object,
the name of that object appears automatically with
its Present Value attribute.
Present Value is the default attribute that appears.
IMPORTANT: The desired Buffer Size, Log Interval, and Input

Reference values must be entered now. They can be
entered only when adding a new Trend Log object.
Editing a Trend Log Object

To edit a Trend Log object:
1. Browse to and highlight a Trend Log object.
3. Press the F3 (Edit) key. The Trend Log object attribute screen
Commanding a Trend Log Object

To command a Trend Log object:
until the desired command appears. The Trend Log object
supports the command described in Table 28-3.

Command Description
Display Displays the data that the Trend Log object collected from
the Input Reference object. See sample in Figure 28-1.
Print Prints the data that the Trend Log object collected from the
Input Reference object. See sample in Figure 28-1.
Enter the exact name of the Printer object.
Execute Instructs the Trend Log object to take a sample.
Enable Instructs the Trend Log object to start collecting data from
Disable Instructs the Trend Log object to stop collecting data from

it, press the Tab key to highlight the field and type in the
necessary information.
5. Press Enter.
Deleting a Trend Log Object

To delete a Trend Log object:
Chapter 29
Working with Notification Class

Objects
Introduction
The Notification Class object defines a standardized BACnet object
with attributes that contain information required for the distribution of
event notifications within BACnet systems. Notification Classes are
useful for event-initiating objects that have identical needs in terms of
how their notifications should be handled, what the destinations for
their notifications should be, and how they should be acknowledged.
IMPORTANT: A Notification Class object needs to have a

recipient list to define the destinations to which
Notifications are sent. This cannot be done in a
VT100, therefore, use Project Builder to add
Notification Class objects.
The instructions in this chapter assume the database in which you are
adding the Notification Class object has been properly uploaded to, or
created in, Project Builder software. This chapter describes how to:
• add Notification Class object in Project Builder
• edit a Notification Class object in Project Builder
• edit a Notification Class object with a VT100
• command a Notification Class object with a VT100
• delete a Notification Class object with a VT100

For information on setting up a database using Project Builder, see the

N30 Supervisory Controller Quick Start Technical Bulletin. For
information on using Project Builder software, including working with
objects and the M-View screen, see the Project Builder User’s Guide.
Note: The Notification Class object is a BACnet object and is
sometimes referred to as BACnet Notification Class object.
For reference information on this object in the Object
Dictionary, see the BACnet Notification Class (LIT-694250)
chapter.
Key Concepts
Notification Class
A notification class defines how event notifications are prioritized
according to To-Offnormal, To-Fault, and To-Normal events; whether
these categories of events require acknowledgement (nearly always, by
a human operator); and what destination devices or processes receive
notifications.
Destinations
It is often necessary to send event notifications to multiple destinations
or to different destinations based on the time of day or day of week.
Notification Classes may specify a list of destinations, each of which is
qualified by time, day of week, and type of handling. See Table 29-1
for a list of destination parameters. If an event that uses a Notification
Class object occurs and the day is one of the days of the week that is
valid for a given destination, and the time is within the window
specified in the destination, then a notification is sent to the
destination. Further qualify destinations, as applicable, by any
combination of the three event transitions (To-Offnormal, To-Fault,
and To-Normal).
The destination also defines the recipient device to receive the
notification and a process within the device. Numeric handles identify
processes that are only meaningful to the destination device. The
administration of these handles is a local matter. The recipient device
may be specified by either its unique Device Object Identifier or its
BACnet Address. In the latter case, a specific node address, a multicast
address, or a broadcast address may be used. The destination further
specifies whether the notification is sent using a confirmed or
unconfirmed event notification.
The Recipient List attribute describes how the parameters listed in
Table 29-1 relate to the Notification Class object.
Table 29-1: BACnet Destination Parameters

Parameter Type Description
From Time, To Time Time The window of time (inclusive) during which the
destination is viable on the valid days of the week.
Issue Confirmed Boolean True if confirmed notifications are sent and False if
Notifications unconfirmed notifications are sent.
Process Identifier Unsigned The handle of a process within the recipient device that
receives the event notification.
Recipient BACnet Recipient The destination devices to receive notifications.
Transitions BACnet Event Transition A set of three flags that indicate those transitions
Bits (To-Offnormal, To-Fault, To-Normal) for which this
recipient is suitable.
Valid Days BACnet Days of Week The set of days of the week on which this destination
may be used during the value of From Time, To Time.
Attributes
Ack Required
Conveys three separate flags that represent whether acknowledgement
is required in notifications generated for To-Offnormal, To-Fault, and
To-Normal event transitions, respectively.
Description
This is a string of printable characters.
Notification Class
Indicates the numeric value of this notification class and equals the
instance number of the Notification Class object. Event-initiating
objects use this number to refer to this Notification Class object
indirectly.
Object Identifier
A unique numeric code used to identify the object.
Object Name
A character string that represents the name of the object.
Object Type
A value that indicates membership in a particular object type class.
Priority
Convey the priority to be used for event notifications for
To-Offnormal, To-Fault, and To-Normal events, respectively. A lower
number indicates a higher priority.
Recipient List
Conveys a list of one or more recipient destinations to which
notifications are sent when event-initiating objects using this class
detect the occurrence of an event. The destinations themselves define a
structure of parameters that is summarized in Table 29-1.
Procedure Overview
Table 29-2: Notification Class Object
Add a Notification Class In Project Builder, open the database to which you want to add the
Object in Project Builder Notification Class object. Expand the database so that the container or
object you want to add the Notification Class object to is visible. In the
object library on the left side of the screen, open the N30 folder. Select
the Notification object and drag it to the container or object to which you
want to add the Notification Class object. Browse to the object you just
created. Double-click the row header of the Notification Class object to
open the M-View screen. Enter an object name and description. Click the
List Elements button. Click the Add button. Click the Structure Elements
button. Fill in the fields according to Table 29-3. Click Done to return to
the Complex View – Recipient list. Continue adding until all recipients are
entered. Click Done to return to the M-View screen for the Notification
Class object. Click the Array Elements button to edit the priority list. Click
the Ack Required button to edit whether destinations must globally
acknowledge transitions. Click OK when finished.
The object cannot be used until the new, modified database is
downloaded to your N30.
Edit a Notification Class In Project Builder, open the database with the Notification Class object
Object in Project Builder you want to edit. Browse to and select the object you want to edit.
Double-click the row header of the object to open the M-View screen. Edit
the object name and description if necessary. Click the List Elements
button. Click the Structure Elements button. Fill in the fields according to
Table 29-3. Click Done to return to the Complex View – Recipient list. Edit
each recipient in the list as necessary. Click Done to return to the M-View
screen. Click the Array Elements button to edit the priority list. Click the
Ack Required button to edit whether destinations must globally
acknowledge transitions. Click OK when finished.
The edited object cannot be used until the new, modified database is
downloaded to your N30.
Edit a Notification Class Browse to and select the Notification Class object that you want to edit.
Object with a VT100 Press the Return key to open. Press the F3 (Edit) key. Edit the fields as
required.
Note: The recipient list cannot be edited using a VT100.
Command a Notification Class Browse to and select the Notification Class object you want to command.
Object with a VT100 Press the F2 (Command) key. Use the Spacebar and Backspace keys to
select Enable or Disable. Press the Return key to execute the selected
command.
Delete a Notification Class Browse to and select the Notification Class object you want to delete.
Object with a VT100 Press the Return key to open. Press the Delete key. Press the Tab key to
confirm the deletion.
Detailed Procedures
Adding a Notification Class Object in Project Builder
To add a Notification Class object:
1. In Project Builder, open the database to which you want to add the
Notification Class object.
2. Expand the database so that the container or object you want to
add the Notification Class object to is visible.
3. In the object library on the left side of the screen, open the N30
folder.
4. Select the Notification object and drag it over to the container or
object to which you want to add the Notification Class object.
5. Browse to the object you just created.
6. Double-click the row header of the Notification Class object to
open the M-View screen for the Notification Class object
(Figure 29-1).
Figure 29-1: Notification Class Object in M-View

7. Enter an object name and description.
8. Click the List Elements button. The Complex View – Recipient

List screen appears (Figure 29-2).
Figure 29-2: Complex View - Recipient List

9. Click the Add button.
10. Click the Structure Elements button. A new Recipient form opens
(Figure 29-3).
Figure 29-3: New Recipient Form

11. Fill in the fields according to Table 29-3.
Table 29-3: Recipient List Fields

Field Used for
Valid Days The set of days of the week on which this destination may be used.
From Time The window of time (inclusive) during which the destination may be used.
To specify all times, use 00:00:00 for From Time and 23:59:59 for To Time.
To Time The window of time (inclusive) during which the destination may be used.
To specify all times, use 00:00:00 for From Time and 23:59:59 for To Time.
Recipient Choice The choice of whether to use an Object Identifier (value of 0) or the Network
Address (value of 1) of the destination to route the notifications.
Object ID The BACnet Object Identifier of the device object to which Event Notification
messages are sent.
Address Net Number The network number for the destination if routing via address.
Address IP The Internet Protocol (IP) Address of the destination if routing via address.
Address UDP Port Number The User Datagram Protocol (UDP) port number for the destination if routing
via address.
Process Identifier The process ID within the recipient device that is to receive the Event
Notification messages.
Confirmed Notif If TRUE, Confirmed Event Notifications are sent, if FALSE Unconfirmed
Event Notifications are sent.
Transitions Three flags that indicate which types of transitions (To-Offnormal, To-Fault,
or To-Normal) should be sent to the destination.
12. Click Done to return to the Complex View – Recipient list.

13. Repeat Steps 9 through 12 until all recipients are entered.
14. Click Done to return to the M-View screen for the Notification
Class object.
15. Click the Array Elements button to edit the priority list.
16. Click the Ack Required button to edit whether destinations must
globally acknowledge transitions.
17. Click OK when finished. You are returned to the main Project
Builder screen.
IMPORTANT: The object cannot be used until the new, modified

database is downloaded to your N30.
Editing a Notification Class Object in Project Builder

To edit a Notification Class object in Project Builder:
1. In Project Builder, open the database with the Notification Class
object you want to edit.
2. Browse to and select the object you want to edit.
3. Double-click the row header of the Notification Class object to
open the M-View screen for the Notification Class object
(Figure 29-1).
4. Edit the object name and description if necessary.
5. Click the List Elements button. The Complex View – Recipient
List screen appears containing previously entered recipients
(Figure 29-4).
Figure 29-4: Complex View - Recipient List with Recipients

6. Click the Structure Elements button for the Recipient you want to
edit.
7. Fill in the fields according to Table 29-3.
8. Click Done to return to the Complex View – Recipient list.
9. Repeat Steps 6 through 8 until all recipients that need to be edited
are complete.
10. Click Done to return to the M-View screen for the Notification
Class object.
11. Click the Array Elements button to edit the priority list.
12. Click the Ack Required button to edit whether destinations must
globally acknowledge transitions.
13. Click OK when finished. You are returned to the main Project
Builder screen.
IMPORTANT: The changes to the object cannot be used until the

new, modified database is downloaded to your N30.
Editing a Notification Class Object Using a VT100

To edit a Notification Class object using a VT100:
1. Browse to and select the Notification Class object that you want
to edit.
2. Press the Return key to open. The Notification Class object
attributes screen appears (Figure 29-5).
Figure 29-5: Notification Class Object Attributes

4. Edit the fields as required.
Note: The recipient list cannot be edited using a VT100.
Commanding a Notification Class Object Using a VT100

To command a Notification Class object using a VT100:
1. Browse to and select the Notification Class object you want to
command.
2. Press the F2 (Command) key. The command field appears.
3. Use the Spacebar and Backspace keys to select Enable or Disable.
4. Press the Return key to execute the selected command.
Deleting a Notification Class Object Using a VT100

To delete a Notification Class object using a VT100:
1. Browse to and select the Notification Class object you want to
delete.
2. Press the Return key to open.
Chapter 30
Working with Remote Destination

Objects
Introduction
The Remote Destination object ensures delivery of Status Notification
Reports (SNRs) to a workstation via a modem. It also makes and
maintains a connection with the workstation, allowing the workstation
to make a connection permanent or to deny a connection.
• add a Remote Destination object
• edit a Remote Destination object
• delete a Remote Destination object
Note: Remote Destination objects are not commandable.

Key Concepts
Remote Destination Object Operation
SNRs (received from Alarm objects) initiate a connection if either the
Dialout Required flag is set, or the Max SNR Queue reaches the
percentage set in the SNR Dial Out Level attribute.
The Remote Destination object is connected to the Serial Datalink
object by setting the Port Number attribute.
The Remote Destination object performs the following tasks:
• receives status notification report messages from the Message
Router object.
• sends Dial commands to the Serial Datalink object when status
notification report messages need to be sent.
• notifies the Serial Datalink object to disconnect when the Dial
Connect Timeout expires.
Attributes
Dial Connect Timeout
Indicates the amount of time the Remote Destination object waits to
receive messages before disconnecting, following the N30-initiated
Dial command.
Timeout
Indicates the amount of time remaining prior to disconnection,
following the N30-initiated Dial command.
Error State
Indicates the reason for error:
None - No error.
Dial Out Failed - The Serial Datalink object failed to connect in the
time set by the Retries and Retry Interval attributes. The Serial
Datalink object’s Connected To attribute does not change to Metasys
device. If the Error State attribute is set to this state, the Remote
Destination object’s offline status is True.
Disconnected - The Remote Destination object currently does not need
to be connected.
Max SNR Queue

Specifies the number of alarm messages that are buffered for this
Remote Destination. If the queue is full, alarm messages sent to this
Remote Destination to be printed may be lost.
Modem Config Object

Specifies the Modem Configuration object, which holds the modem
information used by the Serial Datalink object. This attribute must be
set to a Modem Configuration Class object.
Phone Number
Indicates the Dial-out phone number if a modem is connected to the
port.
Port Number
Indicates the port number specifying the port to which data is sent.
Queue Used Current

Indicates the number of active entries in the report list.
Retries
Specifies how many times the Remote Destination object resends the
Dial command. If the dial-up connection could not be made in the time
defined as the Retry Interval, the Remote Destination object sends the
Dial command again.
Retry Interval
Indicates the amount of time in which Retries occur. If the Error State
attribute is set to Disconnected, the Remote Destination object retries
sending the Dial command periodically in this interval.
SNR Dial Out Level

The percentage of the queue that needs to be full before dial-out
occurs.
Login ID
Identifies which user is connected during a dial-up session with an
M-Series Workstation.
Password
Identifies which password is connected during a dial-up session with
an M-Series Workstation.
Process Identifier
Used to route notifications (alarms) to this destination. Must be a
unique number for each device. If not specified, a value is
automatically assigned on download.
Ack Required
Setting this value to True allows the BACnet Acknowledgement
Notification messages to be passed to the M3 workstation.
Status
The Metasys Common Object (LIT-694020) chapter of the Object
Dictionary details this attribute. A list of relevant states follows (listed
in hierarchical order from highest to lowest):
Normal: Expected operating condition.
Active Filter
Selects the type of filtering in effect for this remote destination. The
• Pass None - When selected this destination receives no alarm
messages.
• Pass All - When selected this destination receives all alarm
messages.
Priority Filter A
Defines which priorities this destination receives when Filter A is in
Category Filter A
means messages of that defined category reach this destination.
Msg Type Filter A

Alarm.
Priority Filter B
Category Filter B
means that messages of that defined category reach this destination.
Msg Type Filter B

Defines which types of messages the destination receives when Filter
A is in effect. A value of True for a particular selection means
Alarm.
Procedure Overview
Table 30-1: Remote Destination Object Procedure Overview
Add a Remote Destination Browse to and highlight the Operator Devices container. Press the
Object F3 (Add) key. Highlight Remote Destination and press Enter. Fill in the
fields using Table 30-2. Press the F3 (Save) key. Check the User
Edit a Remote Destination Browse to and highlight a Remote Destination object. Press Enter to open
Object the object. Press the F3 (Edit) key. Edit the fields according to Table 30-2.
Delete a Remote Destination Browse to and highlight a Remote Destination object. Press Enter to open
Object the object. Press the Delete key. Press the Tab key to confirm the
deletion.
Note: The Remote Destination object has no commands.
Detailed Procedures
Adding a Remote Destination Object
To add a Remote Destination object:
3. Highlight the Remote Destination object from the list that appears
and press Enter. The first of two Remote Destination object
configuration screens appears (Figure 30-1). The second screen is
shown in Figure 30-2.
Figure 30-1: Remote Destination Object Configuration Screen 1

Figure 30-2: Remote Destination Object Configuration Screen 2

Table 30-2: Remote Destination Object Attributes

Object Type Yes Remote The default is preset and cannot be changed.
Destination
Object Yes HVAC HVAC, Fire, Security, Services, Administrative.
Category

(Cont.)
Engineering Port Number Yes Port 2 Port 0, Port 1, Port 2, Port 3. Port 0 is not a
Values valid option for this object.
Dial Connect Yes 60 Value greater than 0, duration of connection in
Timeout seconds when call is initiated by the N30
Retry Yes 180 60-600 seconds, time between dial attempts
Interval when previous dial attempts fail
Retries Yes 3 0-10, number of attempts before failure
Password Yes Blank M-Series Workstation connection password,
13 character maximum
SNR Dial Yes 80 % 35-100 percent
Out Level
Login Id Yes Blank M-Series Workstation Login ID, 20 character
maximum
Phone Yes Blank M-Series Workstation modem number to dial
Number
Active Filter Yes Pass All Pass None, Pass All, Filter A, Filter B,
Filter A and B.
Priority Yes [4] Items Critical, Serious, Important, Status.
Filter A
Category Yes [5] Items HVAC, Fire, Security, Services, Administrative.
Filter A
Msg Type Yes [3] Items System Alert, Operator Transaction, Alarm.
Filter A
Priority Yes [4] Items Critical, Serious, Important, Status.
Filter B
Category Yes [5] Items HVAC, Fire, Security, Services, Administrative.
Filter B
Msg Type Yes [3] Items System Alert, Operator Transaction, Alarm.
Filter B
Modem No Blank Enter the exact name of the Modem
Config Configuration object containing the required
Object dial-out information.
Remote No Blank M-Series Workstation Device name
Device
Name
Process Yes Blank This value is automatically assigned during
Identifier download, but must be assigned a value
between 3 and 15 for the given device when it
is being added from the VT100.
Queue
Ack Yes True True/False, Passes BACnet Event Notify
Required messages to M3 Workstation
5. Press F3 to save the new object.

was sucessful or if there were errors. If errors were detected,

Editing a Remote Destination Object

To edit a Remote Destination object:
1. Browse to and highlight a Remote Destination object.
3. Press the F3 (Edit) key. The Remote Destination object attribute
screen appears. See Figure 30-1 and Figure 30-2.
Deleting a Remote Destination Object

To delete a Remote Destination object:
1. Browse to and highlight a Remote Destination object.
Chapter 31
Working with E-mail Objects T
Introduction
The E-mail object provides alarm notification through electronic mail
(e-mail) to personnel at a remote location. The E-mail object translates
alarm messages into the correct e-mail format and sends the message
via the local mail gateway (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol [SMTP]
server).
Note: In order to function, the E-mail object must have access via
Ethernet to an SMTP server on the Local Area Network
(LAN). In addition, the N30 Device object must identify the
location of the SMTP server.
For standard alarming, the E-mail object routes alarms based on
filtering criteria defined in the E-mail object attributes. However, for
BACnet alarming, set the E-mail object as a destination of the
BACnet Notification Class in order to route alarms.
• add an E-mail object
• edit an E-mail object
• command an E-mail object
• delete an E-mail object

Key Concepts
E-mail Object Operation
The Message Router object sends a Status Notification Report (SNR)
containing status change information to the E-mail object. The E-mail
object converts the text of the SNR into the proper format for the body
of an e-mail message.
The E-mail object sends the e-mail message to an SMTP server, which
routes the message to the intended recipient (see Figure 31-1).
Note: The E-mail object can only guarantee delivery of the
message to the SMTP server. The SMTP server is
responsible for delivering the message to the intended
recipient. If the SMTP server cannot deliver a message, the
SMTP server sends a delivery failure notice to the e-mail
address identified in the Reverse Path attribute.
If the E-mail object cannot send a message due to errors/failures in
communicating with the server, the E-mail object buffers the message
and tries again at a later time according to the values of the Number of
Retries and the Retry Interval attributes.
TO:jane.smith@jci.com
FROM:john.smith@jci.com
SUBJECT:0001_SITE: SER HA 0001-AV-1 150.0 Deg F 14 Jan 2000 13:19:02
Site Name: 0001_SITE
Alarm Priority: SER
Event State: HA
Previous Event State: NOR
Object Name: 0001-AV-1
Object Value: 150.0 Deg F
Object Category: HVAC
Reliability: Reliable
Alarm Text: Chiller at northwest corner of building
Date: 14 Jan 2000
Time: 13:19:02
Message Type: Alarm
Acknowledge Required: TRUE
emailmsg
Figure 31-1: Sample E-mail Message

E-mail Delivery Failure

The E-mail object can only guarantee delivery of the message to the
SMTP server. The SMTP server is responsible for delivering the
message to the intended recipient. If the SMTP server cannot deliver a
message, the SMTP server sends a delivery failure notice to the e-mail
address identified in the Reverse Path attribute.
The following are sample situations in which an SMTP server cannot
deliver a message and, as a result, sends a delivery failure notice to the
Reverse Path e-mail address.
Attribute Values:
Recipient 1 = jsmith@acmeinc.com
Recipient 2 = hjones@acmeinc.com
Reverse Path = tedison@corpo.com
Situation 1
The mail system for Acme Inc. is currently full or not receiving
messages. The E-mail object sends a delivery failure message to
tedison@corpo.com indicating that the SNR message was not
delivered because the Acme Inc. mail system failed to receive it.
Situation 2
A recipient e-mail address does not exist because John Smith is no
longer an employee of Acme Inc. The E-mail object sends a delivery
failure message to tedison@corpo.com indicating that the
SNR message was not delivered because the recipient e-mail address
does not exist.
SMTP Server Location

In order to use the E-mail object, the N30 Device object must identify
the location of the SMTP server. If the site uses a Domain Name
System (DNS) server, use the SMTP Server Name attribute in the N30
Device object to identify the SMTP server location. If the site does not
use a DNS server, use the SMTP Server IP Address attribute in the
N30 device object instead. See the N30 Device (LIT-694610) chapter
in the Object Dictionary for details on using these attributes.
Attributes
Recipient 1/2/3 Name
Specifies the e-mail addresses of the intended recipients. Specifies up
to three recipients.
Reverse Path Name

Specifies the e-mail address of the person who receives delivery
failure messages for failures that occur after the e-mail has been sent to
the SMTP server. If the SMTP server cannot deliver a message, the
SMTP server sends a delivery failure notice to the e-mail address
identified in this attribute. (The E-mail object cannot receive email
messages and thus cannot receive delivery failure messages.)
Retry Interval
If delivery fails while the E-mail object is sending the e-mail to the
SMTP server, the E-mail object retries sending the e-mail message
periodically in this interval.
Retries
If delivery fails while the E-mail object is sending the e-mail to the
SMTP server, the E-mail object attempts to send the message in the
time defined in the Retry Interval attribute. The Number of Retries
attribute specifies how many times the E-mail object resends the
message.
Max SNR Queue

Specifies the number of SNR messages that the SNR queue can hold.
Process Identifier
Used to route messages to the E-mail object. Must be a unique number
for each device. If not specified, a value is automatically assigned on
download.
Active Filter
Selects the type of filtering in effect for the E-mail object. The filter
types are as follows:
• Pass None - No SNR messages sent.
• Pass All - Send all SNR messages.
• Filter A - Send SNR messages based on the settings of Filter A.
• Filter B - Send SNR messages based on the settings of Filter B.
• Filter A and B - Send SNR messages based on the settings of
Filter A and Filter B.
Priority Filter A
This element of Filter A defines which priorities the E-mail object
sends when Filter A is in effect. A value of True for a particular
position (Critical, Serious, Important, or Status) means that the E-mail
object sends messages of that defined priority.
Category Filter A
This element of Filter A defines which categories of messages the
E-mail object sends when Filter A is in effect. This filter has no effect
for SNRs that do not define a category. A value of True for a particular
position (HVAC, Fire, Security, Services, or Administrative) means
that the E-mail object sends messages of that defined category.
Msg Type Filter A

This element of Filter A defines which message types the E-mail
object sends when Filter A is in effect. A value of True for a particular
position (System Alert, Operator Transaction, or Alarm) means that
the E-mail object sends a message of that defined type.
Priority Filter B
This element of Filter B defines which priorities the E-mail object
sends when Filter B is in effect. A value of True for a particular
position (Critical, Serious, Important, or Status) means that the E-mail
Category Filter B
This element of Filter B defines which categories of messages the
E-mail object sends when Filter B is in effect. This filter has no effect
that the E-mail object sends messages of that defined category.
Msg Type Filter B

This element of Filter B defines which message types the E-mail
object sends when Filter B is in effect. A value of True for a particular
the E-mail object sends a message of that defined type.
Error State
Indicates the reason for the error. Possible values are:
• None
• Queue Full
• Server Error
Example
Figure 31-4 and Figure 31-5 show screens from a sample completed
E-mail object.
Figure 31-2: Completed E-mail Object - Screen 1

Figure 31-3: Completed E-mail Object - Screen 2

Procedure Overview
Table 31-1: E-mail Object Procedure Overview
Add an E-mail Object Browse to and highlight the Operator Devices container. Press the
F3 (Add) key. Highlight E-mail and press Enter. Fill in the fields using
Edit an E-mail Object Browse to and highlight an E-mail object. Press Enter to open the object.
Command an E-mail Object Browse to and highlight an E-mail object. Press the F2 (Command) key.
Use the Spacebar and the Backspace key to cycle through the list of
commands until the desired command appears. Press Enter.
Delete an E-mail Object Browse to and highlight an E-mail object. Press Enter to open the object.
Detailed Procedures
Adding an E-mail Object
To add an E-mail object:
3. Highlight the E-mail object from the list that appears and press
Enter. The first of two E-mail object configuration screens
appears (Figure 31-4). The second screen is shown in Figure 31-5.
Figure 31-4: E-mail Object Configuration Screen 1

Figure 31-5: E-mail Object Configuration Screen 2

Table 31-2: E-mail Object Attributes

Object Type Yes Email The default is preset and cannot be changed.
Object Yes HVAC HVAC, Fire, Security, Services, Administrative.
Category

(Cont.)
Setup Recipient 1 Yes Blank Maximum of 50 characters
Name
Recipient 2 No Blank Maximum of 50 characters
Name
Recipient 3 No Blank Maximum of 50 characters
Name
Reverse Yes Blank Maximum of 50 characters
Path Name
Retry Yes 180 60-600 seconds
Interval
Retries Yes 3 0-10
Queue
Identifier download but must be assigned a value
Filter A and B
Priority Yes [4] Items Critical, Serious, Important, Status
Filter A
Category Yes [5] Items HVAC, Fire, Security, Services, Administrative
Filter A
Msg Type Yes [3] Items System Alert, Operator Transaction, Alarm
Filter A
Filter B
Filter B
Filter B
5. Press F3 (Save) key.

correct them, and resave the entries. Once the save is successful,
Editing an E-mail Object

To edit an E-mail object:
1. Browse to and highlight an E-mail object.
3. Press the F3 (Edit) key. The E-mail object attribute screen
appears. See Figure 31-4 and Figure 31-5.
correct them, and resave the entries. Once the save is successful,
Commanding an E-mail Object

To command an E-mail object:
of commands until the desired command appears. The E-mail
object supports the commands identified in Table 31-3.

Command Description
Disable Causes E-mail object to ignore incoming SNR messages.
Enable Causes E-mail object to process incoming SNR messages.
Queue Clear Clears all SNR messages in the SNR queue.
4. Press Enter.
Deleting an E-mail Object

To delete an E-mail object:
Chapter 32
Working with Pager Objects
Introduction
The Pager object provides alarm notifications via pager to personnel at
a remote location who would otherwise not be aware of the alarm
coming into a workstation or terminal. The Pager object integrates the
alarm message into the correct protocol message format and sends the
dialup message via outgoing modem. This object is designed for a
supervisory controller such as the N30.
Notes: The Pager object supports only a basic notification function
that communicates to alphanumeric pager services that
support the Telocator Alphanumeric Protocol (TAP). The
pager service port must be set to accept N30 pager
notifications: Data bits = 8, Parity = None, and Stop bits = 1
The Pager object does not support Acknowledgement,
Systems Management Server (SMS) and Wireless
Application Protocol (WAP) solutions, or other similar
advanced functions.
For standard alarming, the Pager object routes alarms based on
filtering criteria defined in the Pager object attributes. However, for
BACnet alarming, set the Pager object as a destination of the BACnet
Notification Class object in order to route alarms.
• add a Pager object
• edit a Pager object
• command a Pager object
• delete a Pager object
© March 15, 2006 Johnson Controls, Inc. www.johnsoncontrols.com

Key Concepts
Pager Object Operation
The Message Router object sends a Status Notification Report (SNR)
containing status change information to the Pager object. The Pager
Object decodes the message and formats it into Pager message format.
The Pager object dials the pager service using the proper protocol.
Notes: Pager devices are connected via modem through a Dialout
N30 port. More than one Pager object can be related to a
Dialout port by setting the Port Number attribute. However,
only one Pager object at a time can use the port.
The Pager object can share a Dialout port only with other
Pager objects (not with other devices).
If another Pager object is already using the Dialout N30 port, the Pager
object stores the message in a queue and attempts to dial again at one
minute intervals.
Once the pager service receives the message, the pager service routes
the SNR message to the pager (see Figure 32-1).
Note: If a port is busy when the Pager object tries to dial the pager
service, the Pager object buffers the message and attempts to
dial out again at a later time.
Pager Message
SNR Message Alarm Message
SER B7F3 SUPPLY FAN Fault 04 Jun 2001 11:05:47 CALL MAINTENANCE SERVICE @ 555-4703
pagermsg
Figure 32-1: Sample Pager Message

Attributes
Port Number
Specifies the port to which the Pager object sends data.
Retries
Number of times that the Pager object resends any transmissions to the
pager service if an error occurs.
Process Identifier
Used to route messages to the Pager object. Must be a unique number
for each device. If not specified, a value is automatically assigned on
download.
Pager Number
Dial-out phone number of the pager to receive the Alphanumeric
message. Both the Pager Number and Pager Service are required for
the Pager object to function.
Pager Service
Dial-out phone number of the pager service providing Alphanumeric
messaging service. Both the Pager Number and Pager Service are
required for the Pager object to function.
Modem Config Object

Holds the modem information used by the Serial Datalink Object. Set
this attribute to a Modem Configuration object. When the Modem
Configuration Object attribute is set to None, the Pager object uses the
default modem initialization string and parameters from the Serial
Datalink object. See the Modem Configuration (LIT-694490) and
Serial Datalink (LIT-694810) chapters in the Object Dictionary.
Active Filter
Selects the type of filtering in effect for the Pager object. The filter
types are as follows:
• Pass None - No SNR messages sent.
• Pass All - Send all SNR messages.
• Filter A - Send SNR messages based on the settings of Filter A.
• Filter B - Send SNR messages based on the settings of Filter B.
• Filter A and B - Send SNR messages based on the settings of
Filter A and Filter B.
Priority Filter A
This element of Filter A defines which priorities the Pager object
position (Critical, Serious, Important, or Status) means that the Pager
Category Filter A
This element of Filter A defines which categories of messages the
Pager object sends when Filter A is in effect. This filter has no effect
that the Pager object sends messages of that defined category.
Msg Type Filter A

This element of Filter A defines which message types the Pager object
the Pager object sends a message of that defined type.
Priority Filter B
This element of Filter B defines which priorities the Pager object sends
when Filter B is in effect. A value of True for a particular position
(Critical, Serious, Important, or Status) means that the Pager object
sends messages of that defined priority.
Category Filter B
This element of Filter B defines which categories of messages the
Pager object sends when Filter B is in effect. This filter has no effect
that the Pager object sends messages of that defined category.
Msg Type Filter B

This element of Filter B defines which message types the Pager object
sends when Filter B is in effect. A value of True for a particular
the Pager object sends a message of that defined type.
Procedure Overview
Table 32-1: Pager Object Procedure Overview
Add a Pager Object Browse to and highlight the Operator Devices container. Press the
F3 (Add) key. Highlight Pager, and press Enter. Fill in the fields using
Edit a Pager Object Browse to and highlight a Pager object. Press Enter to open the object.
Command a Pager Object Browse to and highlight a Pager object. Press the F2 (Command) key.
Use the Spacebar and the Backspace key to cycle through the list of
commands until the desired command appears. Press Enter.
Delete a Pager Object Browse to and highlight a Pager object. Press Enter to open the object.
Detailed Procedures
Adding a Pager Object
To add a Pager object:
3. Highlight the Pager object from the list that appears and press
Enter. The first of two Pager object configuration screens appears
(Figure 32-2). The second screen is shown in Figure 32-3.
Figure 32-2: Pager Object Configuration Screen 1

Figure 32-3: Pager Object Configuration Screen 2

Table 32-2: Pager Object Attributes

Object Type Yes Pager The default is preset and cannot be changed.
Object Yes HVAC HVAC, Fire, Security, Services, Administrative
Category

(Cont.)
Engineering Port Number Yes PORT2 Enumeration set:
Values 1 = PORT1
2 = PORT2
3 = PORT3
Retries No 3 0-10
Identifier download, but must be assigned a value
Pager No Blank
Number
Pager No Blank
Service
Modem No Blank Object reference
Config
Object
Filter A and B
Filter A
Filter A
Filter A
Filter B
Filter B
Filter B

Editing a Pager Object

To edit a Pager object:
1. Browse to and highlight a Pager object.
3. Press the F3 (Edit) key. The Pager object attribute screen appears.
See Figure 32-2 and Figure 32-3.
Commanding a Pager Object

To command a Pager object:
of commands until the desired command appears. The Pager
object supports the commands identified in Table 32-3.

Command Description
Disable Writes Enable attribute to False. Causes Pager object to ignore
incoming SNR messages.
Enable Writes Enable attribute to True. Causes Pager object to process
incoming SNR messages.
7. Press Enter.
Deleting a Pager Object

To delete a Pager object:
Troubleshooting
If the Pager object experiences problems, verify the values of the
Pager Number and Pager Service attributes. Include area codes where
appropriate. If problems persist, see Troubleshooting Using Internal
Attributes below.
Troubleshooting Using Internal Attributes

Table 32-4 shows internal attributes of the Pager object. These
attributes may be helpful in troubleshooting Pager object problems.
To view internal attributes:
3. Press 0 to view all attributes. Figure 32-4 and Figure 32-5 show
sample screens with all Pager attributes displayed.
Table 32-4: Pager Object Internal Attributes

Attribute Sample Value Description
Dial Reply Connect 9600 Connected status of the Dial command
Req ID Send CrCr Message sent to request the ID
Req ID Reply* CrLf ID = Request ID message
Req ID Read Cnt** 0 Number of retries for this message
Req ID Retry 2 Seconds Delay before reading the reply
Snd ID Send EcPG1Cr Send ID message
Snd ID Reply* CrAkCrEcBrpCr Acknowledgement of a good reply for the Send ID message
Snd ID Read Cnt** 0 Number of retries for this message
Snd ID Retry 1 Seconds Delay before reading the reply
Snd Msg Send Sx5426623Cr Message containing the Pager Number, SNR message, Alarm
"Snr Msg etc." message, and control characters
Snd Msg Reply* CrAkCr Acknowledgement of a good reply for the Send message
Snd Msg Read Cnt** 0 Number of retries for this message
Snd Msg Retry 1 Seconds Delay before reading the reply
Snd Trm Send EtCr Message sent to terminate the connection
Snd Trm Reply* CrEcEtCr Acknowledgement of a good transmission for the Terminate
message
Snd Trm Read Cnt** 0 Number of retries for this message
Terminate Retry 0 Seconds Delay before reading the reply
Last Executed Time 09:29:58 Time stamp of last message processed
Last Executed Date 02 Aug 2001 Date stamp of last message processed
* An Nk appearing in the value of this attribute (for example, CrNkCrEcBrpCr) indicates an error such as a
checksum error, transmission error, or missing area code. An Rs appearing in the value of this attribute
(for example, CrRsCr) indicates the transmission violated a system rule (for example, invalid pager ID).
** If any of the Read Cnt values is the same as the Retries value, try increasing the Retries value to allow
more connection attempts.
Figure 32-4: Sample Pager Object - All Attributes Displayed (Screen 1)
Figure 32-5: Sample Pager Object - All Attributes Displayed (Screen 2)

Chapter 33
Working with BACnet™ Group

Objects T
Introduction
Note: Do not confuse the BACnet™ Group object with the
Johnson Controls Group object. For information on the
Group object, refer to the Working with Group Objects
chapter (LIT-6892060) of the N30 Supervisory Controller
User’s Manual or the Group chapter (LIT-694420) of the
Object Dictionary.
The BACnet Group object provides the user with the ability to
customize the organization of objects within the site. The BACnet
Group object simplifies the exchange of information between objects
by calling all members of the group at once. A group consists of any
combination of object types. For example, you can use the BACnet
Group object to monitor the temperature in different rooms throughout
a floor of a building.
This chapter describes the difference between BACnet Group objects
and Group objects and how to:
• add a BACnet Group object
• edit a BACnet Group object
• delete a BACnet Group object
Note: The BACnet Group object is not VT100 configurable. You
must use Project Builder to configure the BACnet Group
object.
See the American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and
Air-conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) Standard 135-1995 for
information on this object and the BACnet communication standard.
© May 1, 2002 Johnson Controls, Inc. www.johnsoncontrols.com

33-2 Working with BACnet Group Objects
Key Concepts
BACnet Group Object vs Johnson Controls Proprietary Group
Object
Differences between BACnet Group objects and Johnson Control
Proprietary Group objects are:
• BACnet Group objects are compliant with the BACnet protocol,
while Group objects are not.
• BACnet Group objects reference any object except another
BACnet Group object as long as all members of the group reside in
the same device that maintains the BACnet Group object. Group
objects can reference other Group objects and objects that do not
reside in the same device.
• BACnet Group objects have no limit to the number of members in
a group, and each object member within the group includes one or
more of its attributes. The Group object can hold up to 75 group
members.
• BACnet Group objects list multiple attributes of the group
members while the Group objects only list the Present Value of the
group members.
For information on the Group object, refer to the Working with Group
Objects chapter (LIT-6892060) of the N30 Supervisory Controller
User’s Manual or the Group chapter (LIT-694420) of the Object
Dictionary.
Attributes
The BACnet Group object attributes are described below.
For additional information about the BACnet Group object and its
attributes, refer to the BACnet Group chapter (LIT-694180) of the
Object Dictionary.
Object Name
Description
Object Type
Indicates membership in a particular object type class. In this case, the
object type is BACnet Group.
Object Identifier
Identifies the object with a unique code.
List of Group Members

Contains the references (Input References) that define the members of
the group. These group members are referenced during a transaction.
The List of Group Members consists of two parts:
• Object Identifier (Object ID)
• List of Property References (Attribute or Attribute with Array)
In M-View, the Object Identifier and the List of Property References
form the Input Reference. The Input Reference uses the syntax shown
in Table 33-1.
Nesting is not allowed and the List of Group Members cannot refer to
the Present Value property of the BACnet Group object. Refer to
Editing a BACnet Group Object in the Detailed Procedures to add and
delete the Input Reference elements of this attribute.
Table 33-1: Input Reference Syntax

Input Reference
Type Format Example
Full Reference <Device ID>.<Object ID>.<Attribute(Array)> B7F3N01.Programming.AV{1}
with Array Index .Priority Array[8]
Full Reference <Device ID>.<Object ID>.<Attribute> B7F3N01.Programming.AV{1}
without Array Index .Present Value
Functional Name <Object ID>.<Attribute (Array)> Test AV.Priority Array[8]
with Array Index
Functional Name <Object ID>.<Attribute> Test AV.Present Value
without Array Index
BACnet Syntax #<Device ID>:(#<class>:<instance>).#<Attribute #32:(#2:65001).#87[8]
with Array Index (Array)>
BACnet Syntax #<Device ID>:(#<class>:<instance>).#<Attribute> #32:(#2:65001).#85
without Array Index
Detailed Procedures
Notes: The BACnet Group object is not VT100 configurable. You
must use Project Builder to configure the BACnet Group
object.
Before performing the following procedures, start Project
Builder and open or create the project in which you want to
add a BACnet Group object. Refer to the Getting Started
chapter (LIT-693215) of Project Builder User’s Guide.
Adding a BACnet Group Object

Note: You must use Project Builder to add the BACnet Group
object.
For instructions on adding a BACnet Group object, refer to the
Working with Objects and the M-View Screen chapter (LIT-693230)
of Project Builder User’s Guide.
Editing a BACnet Group Object

Note: Figure 33-1 and Figure 33-2 show a Group object configured
to monitor the objects used by the Optimal Start (OST)
object that controls the heating and cooling of a zone in a
building for the month of December.
To edit a BACnet Group object:
1. Double-click the row head of the BACnet Group object or, with
the BACnet Group object selected, select Edit Object on the Edit
menu. The M-View Configuration dialog box appears
(Figure 33-1).
Figure 33-1: M-View Configuration Dialog Box

2. Edit the parameters using Table 33-2. Refer to the BACnet Group
chapter (LIT-694180) of the Object Dictionary.
Note: Clicking Cancel returns you to Project Builder without
saving your changes.
Table 33-2: Editing BACnet Group Object Attributes

To Edit This Attribute Do This
Object Name Type a name for this BACnet Group object (optional).
Description Type a description for this BACnet Group object (optional).
Object Type This attribute cannot be edited. Object Type is BACnet Group.
Object Category Select the desired category for this BACnet Group object. Default is HVAC.
3. Click the List Elements button. The List Of Group Members dialog
box appears (Figure 33-2).
Figure 33-2: List Of Group Members Dialog Box -

Optimal Start (OST) Example
Notes: If there are no Input References defined, the left side of the
screen is blank.
Clicking Cancel or Back returns you to the M-View
Configuration dialog box without saving your changes.
In Figure 33-2, Input Reference 3 is a reference to the
Present Value of an Analog Value object’s Outdoor Air
Temperature used by the OST object in its calculations.
4. To add an Input Reference, click Add and type the Input Reference
in the box according to the syntax in Table 33-1. Repeat this step if
you want to add more Input References.
Note: You must define at least one input reference to download the
database to an N30 and save your changes.
5. To delete an Input Reference, select the Input Reference box you
want to delete and click Delete. Repeat this step if you want to
delete more Input References.
6. Click Done to save your changes and return to the M-View
Configuration dialog box.
7. Click OK to save your changes and return to Project Builder.
Note: To view the Present Value of the BACnet Group object,
enter online mode and use the M-Inspector feature.
Deleting a BACnet Group Object

You can delete a BACnet Group object using Project Builder or the
VT100.
Using Project Builder

For instructions on deleting a BACnet Group object using Project
Builder, refer to the Working with Objects and the M-View Screen
Using the VT100

To delete a BACnet Group object using the VT100:
1. Browse to and highlight the BACnet Group object.
Controls Group
507 E. Michigan Street
P.O. Box 423 www.johnsoncontrols.com
Milwaukee, WI 53201 Printed in U.S.A.
Chapter 34
Working with Event Enrollment

Objects T
Introduction
The Event Enrollment object monitors the value of a single attribute in
another object in the same or another device, and reports events based
on changes in the attribute’s value. For example, the Event Enrollment
object can monitor the temperature value from a room thermostat and
report an event if the temperature falls below a low limit parameter
value.
Note: The Event Enrollment object is not VT100 configurable.
You must use Project Builder to configure the Event
Enrollment object.
• add an Event Enrollment object
• edit an Event Enrollment object
• command an Event Enrollment object
• delete an Event Enrollment object
• edit Event Parameters - examples
© May 1, 2002 Johnson Controls, Inc. www.johnsoncontrols.com

34-2 Working with Event Enrollment Objects
Key Concepts
Event Enrollment Object
Unlike the Analog Alarm objects and Multistate Alarm objects in the
N30 Supervisory Controller, Event Enrollment objects are compliant
with BACnet™ protocol. The Event Enrollment object’s attributes
contain information for generating events. The object is configured to
trigger an event when the value of the user-defined referenced attribute
changes and meets the specified criteria. When an event occurs, a
notification message is sent to the user-defined recipients. Notification
message recipients are devices defined in the Notification Class object
referenced by the Event Enrollment object.
See the Event Enrollment/BACnet Event Enrollment chapter
(LIT-694160) of the Object Dictionary or the American Society of
Heating, Refrigerating and Air-conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE)
Standard 135-1995 for information on this object and the BACnet
communication standard.
Attributes
The Event Enrollment object attributes are described below.
Object Name
Description
Object Type
Indicates membership in a particular object type class. In this case, the
object type is Event Enrollment.
Object Property Reference

Designates the particular object and attribute referenced by the Event
Enrollment object. The condition specified by the Event Type is
applied to the referenced attribute to determine the Event State. The
Object Property Reference (also referred to as Input Reference) uses
one of the syntax options shown in Table 34-1.
Table 34-1: Object Property Reference Syntax

Object Property
Reference Type Format Example
Full Reference <Device ID>.<Object ID>.<Attribute (Array)> B7F3N01.Programming.AV{1}
with Array Index .Priority Array[8]
Full Reference <Device ID>.<Object ID>.<Attribute> B7F3N01.Programming.AV{1}
without Array Index1 P P
.Present Value
Functional Name <Object ID>.<Attribute (Array)> Test AV.Priority Array[8]
with Array Index
Functional Name <Object ID>.<Attribute> Test AV.Present Value
2
without Array Index P P
BACnet Syntax #<Device ID>:(#<class>:<instance>).#<Attribute #32:(#2:65001).#87[8]

with Array Index (Array)>
BACnet Syntax #<Device ID>:(#<class>:<instance>).#<Attribute> #32:(#2:65001).#85
without Array Index
1 Used for object references in another N30 device.
2 Used for object references in the same N30 device.
Event Type
Indicates the type of event analysis used to detect events that change
the Event State and report to recipient devices. Table 34-2 describes
each event type. See the Editing Event Parameters - Examples section
of this chapter.
Table 34-2: Event Types

Event Type Description
Change of Bitstring Generates an off-normal transition when the value of the referenced property is
equal to one of the user-defined Bitstring Values (List Elements after applying the
Bitmask) and the values are equal for the amount of seconds defined by the Time
Delay attribute. The Bitmask defines the bits important for monitoring.
Change of State Generates an off-normal transition when the value of the referenced property is
equal to one of the values in the List of Values (List Elements) and the values are
equal for the number of seconds defined by the Time Delay attribute.
Change of Value Generates a normal transition when the value of a referenced property changes by
an amount equal to or greater than the referenced property increment (Change of
Value [COV] Increment) for the amount of seconds defined by the Time Delay
attribute.
Command Failure Generates an off-normal transition if the values of the referenced property and the
Feedback Reference are not equal for a time greater than the number of seconds
defined by the Time Delay attribute.
Floating Limit Generates a transition to high or low limit alarm if the value of the referenced
property is higher or lower than the range of values determined by the current
value of the Setpoint Reference, High Limit, Low Limit, and Deadband for a time
greater than the number of seconds defined by the Time Delay attribute.
Out of Range Generates a transition to high or low limit alarm if the value of the referenced
property is higher or lower than the range of values defined by the High Limit and
Low Limit for a time greater than the number of seconds defined by the Time Delay
attribute.
Event Parameter
Provides the parameter values required to detect the specified Event
Type in the referenced object.
Event Enable
Defines three flags that determine if notifications are enabled for
To Off Normal, To Fault, and To Normal transitions.
Notify Type
Defines the notifications generated by the event analysis specified by
Event Type as Event or Alarm types. Both types generate event
notifications.
Notification Class
References a Notification Class object in the device containing the
Event Enrollment object. The Notification Class object specifies the
handling, reporting, and acknowledgement characteristics for one or
more Event Enrollment objects.
Alarm Message Text

Designates the optional user-defined text that is included in event
notification.
For additional information about the Event Enrollment object and its
attributes, refer to the Event Enrollment/BACnet Event Enrollment
chapter (LIT-694160) of the Object Dictionary.
Detailed Procedures
Notes: The Event Enrollment object is not VT100 configurable.
You must use Project Builder to configure the Event
Enrollment object.
Before performing the following procedures, start Project
Builder and open or create the project in which you want to
add an Event Enrollment object. Refer to the Getting Started
Adding an Event Enrollment Object

Note: You must use Project Builder to add the Event Enrollment
object. You can only add the Event Enrollment object to
other objects.
For instructions on adding an Event Enrollment object, refer to the
Working with Objects and the M-View Screen chapter (LIT-693230) of
Project Builder User’s Guide.
Editing an Event Enrollment Object

To edit an Event Enrollment object:
1. Double-click the row head of the Event Enrollment object, or with
the Event Enrollment object selected, select Edit Object on the
Edit menu. The M-View Edit Attributes dialog box appears
(Figure 34-1).
Figure 34-1: M-View Edit Attributes Dialog Box

2. Edit the parameters using Table 34-3. Refer to the Event
Enrollment/BACnet Event Enrollment chapter (LIT-694160) of the
Object Dictionary.
Table 34-3: Editing Event Enrollment Object Attributes

To Edit This Attribute Do This
Object Name Type a name for this Event Enrollment object (optional).
Description Type a description for this Event Enrollment object (optional).
Object Type This attribute cannot be edited. Object Type is Event Enrollment.
Object Category Select the desired category for this Event Enrollment object from the
drop-down menu. Default is HVAC.
Object Property Ref Type the Object Property Reference in the box according to the syntax in
Table 34-1.
Event Type Select the desired Event Type for this Event Enrollment object from the
drop-down menu. The options are Change of Bitstring, Change of State,
Change of Value, Command Failure, Floating Limit, and Out of Range.
Event Parameters Click the Event Parameters button. Depending on the Event Type selected, a
corresponding dialog box appears. Edit the parameters in the dialog box and
click Done to save your changes and return to the M-View Edit Attributes
dialog box.
Refer to the Editing Event Parameters - Examples section in this chapter for
examples on how to edit the parameters for each Event Type.
Note: Clicking Cancel or Back returns you to the previous dialog box
without saving your changes.
Event Enable Click the Event Enable button. The Event Enable Dialog Box appears.
Select True or False for the To Off Normal, To Fault, and To Normal attributes.
Click Done.
Notify Type Select Event or Alarm as the Notify Type for this Event Enrollment object.
Notification Class Type the Object Identifier (Object ID) of the Notification Class object from
which you are routing alarms.
Alarm Message Text Type the desired text of the alarm message for event notification (optional).
3. Click OK to save your changes and return to Project Builder.

Commanding an Event Enrollment Object

You can command an Event Enrollment object using the M-Series
Workstation or the VT100. The Event Enrollment object must be
online.
Using the M-Series Workstation

To command an Event Enrollment object using the M-Series
Workstation:
1. In M-Explorer, select the Event Enrollment object.
2. On the Actions menu, click Inspect. The M-Inspector dialog box
Figure 34-2: M-Inspector Dialog Box - M-Command Tab

3. Click the M-Command tab.
4. Select Enable or Disable in the Command drop-down menu.
5. Click Execute.
6. Click Close.
Using the VT100

To command an Event Enrollment object using the VT100:
1. Browse to and highlight the Event Enrollment object.
2. Press the F2 (Command) key. The command field appears.
3. Use the Spacebar and the Backspace key to select the desired
command. The Event Enrollment object supports the commands
in Table 34-4.

Command Description
Enable The Event Enrollment object processes new values from the
referenced attribute (Object Property Reference).
Disable The Event Enrollment object ignores new values from the
referenced attribute (Object Property Reference).
4. Press Enter.
Deleting an Event Enrollment Object

You can delete an Event Enrollment object using Project Builder or
the VT100.
Using Project Builder

For instructions on deleting an Event Enrollment object using Project
Builder, refer to the Working with Objects and the M-View Screen
Using the VT100

To delete an Event Enrollment object using the VT100:
1. Browse to and highlight the Event Enrollment object.
Editing Event Parameters - Examples

This section provides examples for editing the Event Parameters of
each Event Type. For all other attributes, follow the instructions in the
Editing an Event Enrollment Object section in this chapter.
Change of Bitstring - Example

1. Edit the parameters of the M-View Edit Attributes dialog box
using Table 34-3. Figure 34-3 shows an example of an Event
Enrollment object that references an Analog Value object named
SetpointAV that generates an off-normal transition when the value
of its Status Flags attribute changes. The Status Flags attribute
uses a bitstring data type with 4 elements (bits). Refer to Table 1
in About the Object Dictionary (LIT-694010) for data type
descriptions.
Figure 34-3: M-View Edit Attributes Dialog Box - Change of Bitstring Example
2. Select Change of bitstring in the Event Type drop-down menu.
3. Click the Event Parameters button. The Change of Bitstring Event
Parameters dialog box appears (Figure 34-4).
Figure 34-4: Change of Bitstring Event Parameters Dialog Box

4. Type the desired amount of time (in seconds) in the Time Delay
box that you want to wait before generating an event after a value
change.
5. Click the 4 Elements button. The Bitmask dialog box appears
(Figure 34-5).
Figure 34-5: Bitmask Dialog Box

6. Select True or False for each element in the Bitmask.
Note: Only elements with a value of True in the Bitmask are
included in the event analysis and generate alarms.
7. Click Done to save changes and return to the Change of Bitstring
Event Parameters dialog box (Figure 34-4).
8. Click the List Elements button. The Bitstring Values dialog box
Figure 34-6: Bitstring Values Dialog Box

9. Click the Add or Delete button to add or delete Bitstring Values.
Note: One value is required for each set of elements’ values that is
required to generate an event. Use the Bitmask to exclude
elements that are not involved in any event.
10. Click the 4 Elements button to display the values. The Bitstring
Values - 4 Elements dialog box appears showing the 4 elements
(Figure 34-7).
Figure 34-7: Bitstring Values - 4 Elements Dialog Box

11. Select True or False for each bitstring value.
Note: An event generates when the actual value of the attribute is
equal to this set of bit values.
12. Click Done to save changes and return to the Bitstring Values
dialog box (Figure 34-6).
13. Click Done to save changes and return to the Change of Bitstring
14. Click Done to save changes and return to the M-View Edit
Attributes dialog box (Figure 34-3).
15. Click OK to save changes and return to Project Builder.
Change of State - Example

using Table 34-3. Figure 34-8 shows an example of a Multistate
Value object named FeedbackMV that generates an off-normal
transition when the value of its Reliability attribute changes. The
Reliability attribute uses the enumerated data type.
Figure 34-8: M-View Edit Attributes Dialog Box - Change of State Example
2. Select Change of state in the Event Type drop-down menu.
3. Click the Event Parameters button. The Change of State Event
Figure 34-9: Change of State Event Parameters Dialog Box

change.
5. Click the List Elements button. The List of Values dialog box
Figure 34-10: List of Values Dialog Box

6. Click Add or Delete to add or delete values.
Note: One value is required for each attribute status that is required
to generate an event.
7. Select the desired status for each value.
Note: An event generates when the actual status of the attribute is
equal to this status.
8. Click Done to save changes and return to the Change of State

Change of Value - Example 1

using Table 34-3. Figure 34-11 shows an example of an Analog
Input object named RoomTemp that generates a normal transition
when the value of its Present Value attribute changes by a
specified amount. The Present Value attribute uses the analog
(Float) data type.
Figure 34-11: M-View Edit Attributes Dialog Box -

Change of Value Example 1
2. Select Change of value in the Event Type drop-down menu.
3. Click the Event Parameters button. The Change of Value Event
Figure 34-12: Change of Value Event Parameters Dialog Box

change.
5. Type the desired value in the COV Increment box that you want
the attribute to change before generating an alarm.
Note: In this example, an event is generated 120 seconds after the
room temperature changes 3.0 degrees.
6. Click Done to save change and return to the M-View Edit
Change of Value - Example 2

Value object named FeedbackAV that generates a normal
transition when the value of its Status Flags attribute changes. The
Status Flags attribute uses a bitstring data type with 4 elements
(bits). See Figure 34-14.
Figure 34-13: M-View Edit Attributes Dialog Box -

Change of Value Example 2
2. Select Change of value in the Event Type drop-down menu.
3. Click the Event Parameters button. The Change of Value Event
Figure 34-14: Change of Value Event Parameters Dialog Box

change.
5. Select True or False for each value.
Notes: When the value is True, any change of value generates an
event.
In this example, an event is generated 30 seconds after the
InAlarm, Fault, or OutOfService changes state. Any changes
to the Overridden value is ignored.
Command Failure - Example

using Table 34-3. Figure 34-15 shows an example of a Binary
Value object named N30.Programming.BV that generates an
offnormal transition when a command to its Present Value
attribute fails. Failure is determined by the value of the feedback
reference Fan4.PresentValue.
Figure 34-15: M-View Edit Attributes Dialog Box - Command Failure Example
2. Select Command Failure in the Event Type drop-down menu.
3. Click the Event Parameters button. The Command Failure Event
Figure 34-16: Command Failure Event Parameters Dialog Box

box that you want to wait before generating an event. An event
generates after a command has been issued and the feedback value
does not change.
5. Type the reference for the attribute used to confirm the command
execution in the Feedback Reference box.
Note: The referenced command attribute and the referenced
feedback attribute must be of the same data type.
Floating Limit - Example

Input object named RoomTemp that transitions to high or low
limit alarm when the value of its Present Value attribute exceeds
the configured floating limit values.
Figure 34-17: M-View Edit Attributes Dialog Box - Floating Limit Example
2. Select Floating limit in the Event Type drop-down menu.
3. Click the Event Parameters button. The Floating Limit Event
Figure 34-18: Floating Limit Event Parameters Dialog Box

change.
5. Type the reference for the attribute that provides the value used as
a setpoint reference value in the Setpoint Reference box.
6. Type the lowest amount (in degrees) that the temperature can fall
below the referenced setpoint value before generating a low limit
alarm in the Low Limit box.
7. Type the highest amount (in degrees) that the temperature can rise
above the referenced setpoint value before generating a high limit
alarm in the High Limit box.
8. Type the amount of change (in degrees) from the limit value
required for the attribute to return to normal in the Deadband box.
Notes: In this example, the Present Value attribute is in alarm when
it is 4 degrees above or 3 degrees below the reference
setpoint. The Present Value attribute returns to normal when
it is 2.5 degrees above or 1.5 degrees below the reference
setpoint.
The Deadband value is considered when the temperature
returns from a high or low limit state to a normal state. Use
this feature to reduce toggling between the high or low limit
state and a normal state when the temperature remains near
the high or low limit.
Out of Range - Example

Input object named RoomTemp that transitions to high or low
limit alarm when the value of its Present Value attribute goes out
of the user-defined range.
Figure 34-19: M-View Edit Attributes Dialog Box - Out of Range Example
2. Select Out of range in the Event Type drop-down menu.
3. Click the Event Parameters button. The Out of Range Event
Figure 34-20: Out of Range Event Parameters Dialog Box

change.
5. Type the value (in degrees) for the low end of the range in the
Low Limit box.
6. Type the value (in degrees) for the high end of the range in the
High Limit box.
7. Type the amount of change (in degrees) from the limit value
required for the attribute to return to normal in the Deadband box.
Note: In this example, the Present Value attribute is in alarm
outside of the range of 66.0 to 74.0 and returns to normal
when it is inside the range of 68.0 to 72.0.
Controls Group
507 E. Michigan Street
P.O. Box 423 www.johnsoncontrols.com
Milwaukee, WI 53201 Printed in U.S.A.
N30 Supervisory Controller User’s Manual A-1
Appendix A
Building an Energy Management

Application
Introduction
Numerous energy management applications are possible for small to
mid-size site configurations. This document provides information to
consider when building a core energy management application,
including what objects are involved and how attributes interact.
This document describes how to build a core energy management
application.

A-2 N30 Supervisory Controller User’s Manual
Key Concepts
Object Interaction
Different objects interact in a core energy management application.
Figure A-1 illustrates an example of an energy management
application. Table A-1 describes the objects and their role in energy
management.
7 8
N2 Binary Input N2 Binary Input
Object Object
(Output Alarm) (Comfort Alarm)
2 6
N2 Binary Output
Load Object
Object
5 4 1
N2 Pulse Counter Pulse Meter
DLLR Object
Object Object
2 6
N2 Binary Output
Load Object
Object
4 3 9
Pulse Meter Utility Profile
Schedule Object
Object Object
DLLR Flow
Figure A-1: Energy Management Example

Table A-1: Energy Management Objects

Number Object Role
1 DLLR Receives energy consumption data from the Pulse Meter object to manage
demand limiting and load rolling through the shedding of loads.
2 Load Registers with the DLLR object to let the DLLR object know that it exists and
can be shed.
3 Utility Profile Collects utility data from a Pulse Meter object and a DLLR object.
4 Pulse Meter Collects energy consumption data to be available to either the Utility Profile
object or the DLLR object.
5 N2 Pulse Counts energy pulses via the N2 Bus from an actual hardware meter and
Counter relates the data to the Pulse Meter object.
6 Output Acts as the associated output for the Load object, which switches it off for the
Object actual physical load shedding. Besides an N2 Binary Output object, a Load’s
associated output can also be a Binary Value (BV), Multistate Output (MSO),
Multistate Value (MSV), or Multiple Command (MC) object.
7 Output Alarm Provides the attribute supplying the output alarm condition. This attribute can be
Object any numerical attribute of any object type in which a change from zero to a
non-zero value indicates an alarm condition.
8 Comfort Provides the attribute supplying the comfort override alarm condition. This
Alarm Object attribute can be any numerical attribute of any object type in which a change
from zero to a non-zero value indicates an alarm condition.
9 Schedule Starts new billing periods by resetting the Utility Profile object.
Object
Attribute Involvement
Building a core energy management application means that each
object must have its attributes configured to reference the appropriate
objects in order to achieve the desired results. Table A-2 lists the
objects and attributes involved and guidelines for data entry.
Table A-2: Key Components for a Core Energy Management Application

Object Attributes Data Entry Guidelines
Type/Function Involved
DLLR Meter Object Enter the exact name of that Pulse Meter object, which is
dedicated to serve only as an input to this particular DLLR object.
Load DLLR Object Enter the exact name of the DLLR object.
Output Attribute Enter the attribute of the output object that will be shut off to shed
the load. Make sure that the attribute supports a prioritized write.
Output Alarm Attr Enter the attribute supplying the Output Alarm condition.
Comfort Alarm Attr Enter the attribute supplying the Comfort Alarm condition.
Utility Profile Meter Object Enter the exact name of that Pulse Meter object, which is
dedicated to serve only as an input to this particular Utility Profile
object.
DLLR Object Enter the exact name of the DLLR object.
Pulse Meter Counter Object Enter the exact name of the N2 Pulse Counter object. The
N2 Pulse Counter object must reside on the same device as the
Pulse Meter object.
N2 Pulse Counter None None. The Pulse Meter object references this object.
Output Object None None. The Load object references this object’s Output Attribute.
Output Alarm None None. The Load object references this object ‘s Output Alarm
Object attribute.
Comfort Alarm None None. The Load object references this object’s Comfort Alarm
Object attribute.
Schedule Object List of Prop Refs Enter the name of the Utility Profile object and schedule the
Utility Profile’s Reset attribute to go to 1 at the time you want a
new billing period to start, and to go back to 0 one minute later.
Setting back the reset attribute is necessary to avoid a premature
start of the billing period in case the Schedule’s fast clock feature
should run.
Advanced Object Functions

Beyond a core application, the energy management objects can
combine with other objects to perform a variety of functions for
sophisticated applications. The possibilities are too numerous to be
covered in this document. Table A-3 offers an overview of the objects
and advanced functions possible in energy management applications.
Table A-3: Advanced Object Functions

Object Function
DLLR Operates at different demand limits and load rolling targets over time.
Allows an external source instead of the internal algorithm to dictate the amounts to shed.
Accounts for Pulse Meter failure through the configuration of its algorithm.
Load Adapts shedding priority to the current situation.
Performs local load rolling, such as cyclically running one out of many air handlers. This
requires the load to drive a Multiple Command object, which coordinates the local load rolling.
Handles analog loads, such as adjusting setpoints when shed. Again, this functionality is best
achieved through a Multiple Command object as the load’s output object.
Remains shed through load configuration in case of an abnormal situation.
Utility Provides a breakdown of energy consumption data over variable time periods.
Profile Provides a breakdown of energy consumption data into different energy tariffs. In this case
one Utility Profile per tariff must be used. The coordination of the Utility Profiles is best
achieved through scheduling, interlock, and/or multiple command objects.
Pulse Meter Allows electronic filtering of the pulse rate input signal by varying its Sample Time attribute.
Analog Provides detailed alarm notification for any abnormal situations in the energy management
Alarm application. Alarm objects can be attached to any numerical attribute of any object.
Multistate Provides detailed alarm notification for any abnormal situations in the energy management
Alarm application. Alarm objects can be attached to any numerical attribute of any object.
Interlock Monitors any numerical attribute of any object involved in the DLLR application.
Invokes any command of any object involved in the DLLR application. Can send commands
with or without delays to itself. This opens up many opportunities for periodic execution of
certain processes, such as local load rolling.
Tunes the energy management application at runtime by modifying parameters in the DLLR
and Load objects depending on certain conditions.
Serves as Comfort Alarm points used by Load objects.
Multiple Invokes any command of any object involved in the DLLR application.
Command Coordinates which of several Utility Profiles currently is active.
Replaces an N2 Binary Output as a load’s output.
Sends commands with or without delays to itself. This opens up many opportunities for
periodic execution of certain processes, such as local load rolling.
Serves as Comfort Alarm points used by Load objects.
Schedule Resets Utility Profiles or to select the currently active Utility Profile.
Tunes the energy management application at runtime by modifying parameters in the DLLR
and Load objects, depending on certain conditions.
Trend Log Provides additional detailed energy data.
Global Data Propagates data within the energy management application.
Sharing
Signal Changes attributes of the objects.
Select Monitors numerical attributes and subsequently propagates data within the energy
management application, based on the result of the logic evaluation of the input conditions.
Procedure Overview
Table A-4: Building an Energy Management Application
Build an Energy Management Add N2 point objects to the database, including N2 Pulse Counter objects.
Application Add the DLLR object. Add a Pulse Meter object referencing the N2 Pulse
Counter object and the DLLR object. Add a Utility Profile object to the
same device as the Pulse Meter and DLLR objects. Add another Pulse
Meter object referencing the N2 Pulse Counter object and the Utility
Profile object. Add Load objects referencing output loads to potentially be
shed and referencing objects representing an Output Alarm and a
Comfort Alarm. Add a Schedule object referencing the Utility Profile
object. Verify that the energy management application is operating
correctly.
Detailed Procedures
Building an Energy Management Application
To build an energy management application:
1. Add N2 point objects to the database, including N2 Pulse Counter
objects. See the N30 Supervisory Controller Point Mapping
Technical Bulletin (LIT-6891400).
2. Add the DLLR object. One DLLR object exists per meter
hardware piece. For example, a building with three electric meters
should have three DLLR objects to regulate the system. Multiple
DLLR objects can exist in one N30.
3. Add a Pulse Meter object referencing the N2 Pulse Counter object
and the DLLR object. The Pulse Meter should be on the same
device as the DLLR object.
4. Add a Utility Profile object to the same device as the Pulse Meter
and DLLR objects.
5. Add another Pulse Meter object referencing the N2 Pulse Counter
object and the Utility Profile object. One Pulse Meter object
should be dedicated to one Utility Profile object.
6. Add Load objects referencing output loads to potentially be shed
and referencing objects representing an Output Alarm and a
Comfort Alarm. A maximum of 80 Load objects can register to
one DLLR. A maximum of 80 output objects can be referenced by
the 80 Load objects.
7. Add a Schedule object referencing the Utility Profile object. This
Schedule is required to reset the Utility Profile object at the end of
each billing period. Enter the name of the Utility Profile object
and schedule the Utility Profile’s Reset attribute to go to 1 at the
time you want a new billing period to start, and to go back to 0
one minute later. Setting back the reset attribute is necessary to
avoid a premature start of the billing period if the Schedule’s fast
clock feature should run.
8. Verify that the energy management application is operating
correctly. Refer to the Troubleshooting section of this document.
Troubleshooting
This section provides some guidelines for making an energy
management application successful.
Table A-5: Energy Management Troubleshooting Guidelines

Guideline Procedure
Ensure All Loads are It is best to throttle (regulate the speed of) the load registration process by
Capable of modifying each Load object’s Registering Delay attribute, if one or more of the
Registering Correctly following conditions exist:
• twenty or more Load objects are used per DLLR object
• Load objects are mainly not on the same device as the DLLR object
• the device housing the DLLR object is likely to be low on acquired memory
To throttle the load registration process, assign a Register Delay of 5 seconds to
the first load to register, a delay of 6 seconds to the next, and so on. This results in
approximately one incoming registration message per second during the
Registering Phase. This also results and in a predictable order for the list of loads
kept inside the DLLR object.
Leaving the Register Delay attributes of all Load objects to zero seconds result in
the fastest possible load registration. However, if this overloads the device, such as
an N30, housing the DLLR object, use the Register Delay attributes to throttle the
registration process.
Ensure All Loads are After creating the entire database, check if the Load objects are correctly
Registered Correctly registered at their respective DLLR objects. Depending on the configuration
settings in the Load or DLLR objects, some loads may not have registered. Also,
creating the database while certain devices are offline may result in unregistered
loads.
1. Check if the DLLR object’s Number of Loads attribute matches the number of
loads expected to be registered (the number of loads created to register to the
DLLR object). If the numbers match, the loads are registered correctly. If not,
go the Step 2.
2. If the numbers do not match, or to ensure the correctness of the load
registration process, run the DLLR object’s Force Register command:
• To get all loads to register while the DLLR algorithm is not yet in a stage
in which it would be harmful to suspend its operation, run the DLLR
object’s Force Register command with the command parameter set to
True. This command erases the entire load registration information inside
the DLLR object, and starts a new registration process.
• To get all loads to register while the DLLR algorithm is already in a stage
in which it is critical not to suspend its operation, run the DLLR object’s
Force Register command with the command parameter set to False.
This command preserves the entire load registration information inside the
DLLR object while starting a new registration process.
3. Wait the amount of time equal to the Register Delay attribute, and then
recheck if the DLLR object’s Number of Loads attribute now matches the
number of loads expected to be registered.
Note: Since the Number of Loads attribute does not refresh automatically,
refresh the display by closing the current view and reopening it.
Guideline (Cont.) Procedure

Ensure All Loads are 4. If the numbers still do not match, and re-sending the Load object’s Force
Registered Correctly Register command does not correct the situation, check each Load object’s
(Cont.) Load Number attribute. A load number of zero indicates unsuccessful
registering that can be the result of several factors. Each Load object with a
Load Number attribute value of zero should be checked with these steps:
a. Check if all Load objects are online to their DLLR object. If all are online,
the loads are registered correctly. If not, continue with Step 4b.
b. Check if all Load objects have the correct name of the DLLR object
entered in their DLLR object attribute. If all have the correct name, all
loads are registered correctly. If not, continue with Step 4c.
c. Run the Force Register command for each questionable load.
d. Wait until the Registering Delay time has elapsed, then recheck the Load
Number attribute to see if it contains a non-zero number. This would
indicate that the load is now registered. In addition, if the DLLR object’s
Number of Loads attribute increases by one, this also indicates the load is
now registered.
e. Repeat Steps 4c and 4d. If it still appears that loads are not registered,
continue with Step 4f.
f. Check the DLLR object’s Registering Phase attribute. This attribute
defines the length of the registration process. In large systems it may be
necessary to extend this value to a time similar to the highest Register
Delay attribute.
g. Run the DLLR object’s Force Register command with the command
parameter set to True. This assures that loads are registered correctly, as
long as they are configured correctly and online.
If running the DLLR object’s Force Register command never results in correct load
registration, a memory or communication overload may exist, and registration
messages may be lost. In this case, throttle the registration process as described
earlier. If this does not improve the registration process, there may be a
communication or memory problem in the system, requiring a re-evaluation of the
entire system.
Ensure All Loads are An incorrectly configured load may never be eligible for shedding and therefore be
Potentially Eligible for of no use to the system.
Shedding To check if all loads have the potential to be eligible, each load must be individually
checked.
1. Check if the DLLR object’s Eligible for DL Only, Eligible for LR Only, and
Eligible for DLLR attributes add up to the Number of Loads attribute. If the
numbers add up, and the DLLR object’s Not Eligible attribute is zero, the loads
are eligible for shedding. If both conditions are not met, continue with Step 2.
Note: The above attributes do not refresh automatically each time they are
updated. To refresh the display, close the current view and reopen it.
2. Check each Load object’s Eligibility attribute. If Ineligible, continue with Step 3.
3. Check each Load object’s Shed Refusal attribute for a reason why the Load
may be ineligible for shedding.
4. Remove all of the conditions listed in the Load object’s Shed Refusal attribute
until the load becomes eligible, and Shed Refusal becomes No Refusal.

Ensure the Pulse If you want to use the Demand Limiting feature of the DLLR object, a rate of
Meter is Working consumption must be fed into the algorithm. While this rate could be provided by
Correctly any analog Present Value attribute of type float, the DLLR object is optimized to
use a Pulse Meter object as its input.
To ensure proper Pulse Meter operation:
1. Check the Pulse Meter object’s Reliability attribute. If it is Reliable, the Pulse
Meter object is operating correctly. If the value is Unreliable for more than a
few minutes, the Pulse Meter object is not working correctly. Go to Step 2.
2. Check if the Pulse Counter object specified in the Pulse Meter’s Counter
Object attribute resides on the same device as the Pulse Meter. If both objects
reside on the same device, but the Pulse Meter object is still Unreliable, go to
Step 3.
3. Verify that the Pulse Counter object’s N2 device is online.
4. Check if the value of the Pulse Meter object’s Consumption attribute actually
represents the consumption of a single pulse. Refer to the meter’s type plate
or user manual.
5. Check if the value of the Pulse Meter object’s Rate Constant attribute equals
the Rate Units attribute multiplied by seconds divided by the value of the
Consumption Units attribute. For example, if the Rate Unit is KW, and the
Consumption Unit is KWh, the correct value of the Rate Constant attribute
must be KWs / KWh = 3600 s/h.
6. Check that the calculated rate does not exceed the Pulse Meter object’s Rate
Limit attribute. To estimate the calculated rate:
a. Monitor the Pulse Meter’s Pulse Count attribute for a minute. It should
increase by a few points within that minute. However, in some cases the
rate of consumption is so low that no pulse is generated in a minute. If this
is true, wait until a pulse is generated and counted by the Pulse Counter
object and keep track of the time until the next pulse.
b. Multiply the number of Pulse Counts from Step 6a with the value of the
Pulse Consumption attribute, then divide it by the pulse counting period
length in seconds, and multiply that result by the value of the Rate
Constant attribute. The result should be reasonable. In most cases, you
can refer to figures from utility bills to check if the values are reasonable.
c. Make sure the Pulse Meter object’s Sample Time is set to 60 seconds.
This ensures that the DLLR algorithm always uses current data calculated
from the last minute’s consumption.
If a Sample Time of 60 seconds provides too few pulses to reasonably
operate the Demand Limiting algorithm, use a different pulse generator
with a higher resolution. The pulse count is too low if 60-second intervals
without any pulses occur, even during normal building operation.
However, sampling no pulses during some minutes at night may be a
reasonable rate. The DLLR algorithm works best when the rate is higher
than ten pulses per minute. This way the rate used in the algorithm is at
least within 10% of its real value.
When a meter different from a Pulse Meter is used, most considerations described
above do not apply. In this case, make sure the meter’s Present Value attribute
can be correctly read, and that it represents the average demand during the last
60 seconds.

Ensure the When the Fixed Window Algorithm is used, the End-of-Interval information has to
End-of-Interval (EOI) be made available to the DLLR object. After one entire interval has elapsed, the
Pulse is Working DLLR object’s EOI Alarm attribute should remain set to False. If it is set to True,
Correctly the DLLR object did not receive the End-of-Interval information. In this case,
check the following:
1. If the utility company provides the End-of-Interval pulse, verity that the EOI
pulse creating device is correctly wired to the system.
2. Verify that the object, typically a BI, actually changes to True for a short time
when the pulse is detected. The pulse should be long enough to allow the
N2 Bus to poll the high value from the N2 controller and generate a
Change-of-Value message to the DLLR object. In case the pulse cannot be
reliably transferred into a BI or similar object and on to the DLLR object, a
latching mechanism has to be added that ensures a pulse long enough to be
definitely detected.
3. Verify that the End-of-Interval regularly occurs once after each interval is
finished.
4. Verify that the object providing the End-of-Interval information is online to the
DLLR object.
Ensure the Load The DLLR object’s Load Rolling algorithm, when the LR Mode attribute is set to
Rolling Algorithm is LR Shedding, tries to keep the LR Shed attribute equal to or greater than the
Working Correctly LR Target attribute. This algorithm can easily be verified using the following
procedure:
1. Set the DLLR object’s LR Mode attribute to LR Shedding.
2. Verify that the DLLR object’s LR Shed attribute quickly becomes equal to or
greater than the DLLR object’s LR Target attribute.
3. If it does not reach the target, verify that the DLLR object’s DLLR Status
attribute reads In Alarm.
4. Make sure that the DLLR object’s LR Target is not unreasonably high, and
ensure that enough eligible loads are available to meet the target.
Occasionally not meeting the LR Target is acceptable, but it should be an
exception.
Ensure the Demand When the DLLR object’s DL Mode attribute is set to Shedding, the Demand
Limiting Algorithm is Limiting algorithm tries to keep the Interval Demand below the Demand Limit. The
Working Correctly correct operation of the algorithm is much harder to verify than the Load Rolling
algorithm. Use this general guideline to see if the Demand Limiting algorithm
produces reasonable results:
1. Set the DLLR object’s DL Mode attribute to Shedding.
2. Verify that the value of the DLLR object’s Interval Demand attribute always
stays below the value of the DLLR object’s Demand Limit attribute.
3. If Interval Demand exceeds the Demand Limit value, or when it is close to
exceeding the Demand Limit, verify that the DLLR object’s DLLR Status reads
In Alarm.
4. Make sure that the DLLR object’s Demand Limit is not unreasonably low, and
ensure that enough eligible loads are available to avoid exceeding the
Demand Limit. Do not exceed the Demand Limit, since it may cause penalties
to be paid to the utility company.
If there are severe consequences for exceeding the Demand Limit, start with a
much lower Demand Limit during the first weeks or months of operation to ensure
not to exceed the limit. With growing knowledge of the system’s behavior, the
Demand Limit may gradually be set closer to the actual limit provided by the utility
company.

Ensure the Demand The DLLR object’s DLLR Status attribute summarizes the overall state of the DLLR
Limiting Load Rolling object. The value should be Normal except when it is in its registering phase.
Object is Working Please verify the following additional DLLR attributes for more detailed information
Correctly about how the DLLR application is behaving:
• Reliability
• DLLR Alarm Reason
• Meter Alarm
• EOI Alarm
• Meter Value
The following attributes also provide more detailed information about how the
DLLR application is doing. In some cases it takes expertise to interpret the results,
but severe errors or malfunctions should be easily identifiable.
• Number of Loads Eligible For DLLR
• Eligible For DL Only
• Eligible For LR Only
• Not Eligible
• Highest Load Shed Sent
• Shed Accepted
• Shed Refused
• Shed Pending
• Shed Lost
• Shed Not Sent
• Interval Demand
• Unc Interval Demand
• Demand History
• Unc Demand History
• Amount Shed
• LR Shed
• LR to Shed
• LR not Shed
• DL Shed
• DL to Shed
• DL not Shed
Fixed Window Algorithm Only
• Calculation Active Limit
• Active Elevation
• Time Until EOI
• Time Since EOI
• Energy Since EOI
• Demand Since EOI
• Profile Limit
• Max Demand

Ensure the Utility The modular design of the Utility Profile makes it possible to track consumption
Profile Application is data and peak data broken down into a variety of specific tracking periods, such as
Working Correctly tracking periods for specific utility tariffs, days, weeks, months, or for any other
reason you may want to create separate tracking records.
The Utility Profile object should ideally reside either close to the Pulse Meter object
or the DLLR object. Ideally Pulse Meter and DLLR objects should reside in the
same device.
To verify the correct operation of the Utility Profile application:
1. Check the Utility Profile object’s Meter Active attribute. It should be either
Normal if the object is currently tracking data, or it should be Suspended if it is
currently not tracking data.
2. Make sure each Utility Profile object has a dedicated Pulse Meter object. The
Meter Active attribute of the Pulse Meter object must always be identical to the
Meter Active attribute of the Utility Profile object.
3. Check if the Pulse Meter object specified in the Utility Profile’s Meter object
attribute is an online Pulse Meter object.
4. Check if any Peak Unreliable or Consump Unreliable flags are set for each
Utility Profile object. Also check the Historical Data attribute for these flags. If
both the Pulse Meter and the DLLR object continuously provided reliable data,
there should be no indication of unreliable data in the Utility Profile object.
However, some previous conditions may have left their unreliability mark in the
utility profile data.
After each Utility Profile object has begun collecting, check for reasonable data for
the following attributes:
• Period Start Date
• Period Start Time
• Consumption Unc
• Consump Unreliable
• Peak Unreliable
• Demand Peak
• Demand Peak Date
• Demand Peak Time
• Unc Demand Peak Date
• Unc Demand Peak Time
• Historical Data
Figures from previous utility bills as well as some common sense should be
enough to determine if the results are reasonable.
Ensure the DLLR Run the following test to verify the system is configured correctly. Certain tests may
Energy Management require modification of values to simulate conditions that would not occur under
Application is normal operations.
Working Correctly 1. Verify all alarm messages generated by DLLR related objects are correctly
delivered to all their destinations. Invoking alarm messages may require
temporary manipulation of DLLR related data.
2. Verify all schedules involved in the DLLR application schedule the correct
objects at the correct times.
3. Verify all calendars are correctly tied into the DLLR application.
4. Verify there are no unbound references in the entire DLLR application. The
unbound references can be found in the Unbound References attribute of
each device object involved in the DLLR application.
5. Verify each device has sufficient memory and processor bandwidth. Refer to
the device object’s user manual for more information on how to verify these
conditions.
N30 Supervisory Controller User’s Manual B-1
Appendix B
Building a Message Router

Application
Introduction
The Message Router object receives all alarm messages (including
alarm messages requiring a user to acknowledge them) that are
generated and routes them to destinations, such as printers and
workstations. It also handles rerouting messages to alternate
destinations and sends all messages requiring acknowledgment to the
Report Server object.
Using Message Router objects to route alarms is one of two alarm
routing options. The BACnet Notification Class object can also be
used to route alarms. See Appendix F: Building a Notification Class
Alarm Routing Application (LIT-6892360) in this manual for
information on routing alarms using the BACnet Notification Class
object.
A Message Router object is a global object configured for each site.
A primary Message Router object resides on the site manager device,
and copies reside on all other controllers. The Message Router object
is an internal object that is vital to the communication between objects.
It works with the Report Server to ensure the delivery of messages
within the system.
This appendix describes aspects of the Message Router feature,
including the purpose of the Message Router object, how Status
Notification Reports are routed, how message filtering is configured,
and how the Message Router object interacts with other objects.
The Message Router and Report Server objects are internal objects of
the N30 Supervisory Controller. They may be accessed using a VT100
Terminal Emulator.

B-2 N30 Supervisory Controller User’s Manual
For information about generating N30 databases using Project Builder,

refer to the N30 Supervisory Controller Quick Start Technical Bulletin
(LIT-6891200).
Key Concepts
Message Router Purpose
The Message Router object controls where important dynamic system
information is recorded or displayed. This information can include:
• object changes into and out of alarm
• changes offline and online by controllers or other devices
• reports from the system, such as those generated when elements of
the site exceed user defined limits
This information is contained within Status Notification Reports
(SNRs) that are generated by alarm objects and routed to various
destinations for acknowledgment or storage.
Routing SNRs
The SNRs can be routed to defined destinations such as printers and
VT100s. The Message Router and Report Server internal objects
(one per site) are responsible for transmitting and managing
acknowledgement for the defined set of destination devices. The
routing mechanism uses the priority, BACnet event state and
timestamp of non-acknowledged events to provide the oldest, highest
priority SNR to the acknowledging devices. The initiating alarm object
provides this data.
Unacknowledged messages that appear on a VT100 may be replaced
without user acknowledgement if the same event for the same object
occurs before the acknowledgement of the original event. For
example, an analog alarm has a value of High Alarm and is displayed
on a VT100. If the alarm returns to a Normal state and then again goes
into a Normal state, the VT100 displays the data for the newest High
Alarm event.
An acknowledgement message, Acknowledged by: System,
is sent to non-acknowledging devices. Non-acknowledging devices,
such as printers, receive SNRs in the order of their occurrence.
The Message Router feature distributes SNRs from the various
sources. The Message Router examines each SNR and routes it to the
appropriate destinations based on the types of SNRs each destination is
configured to receive.
For information about how SNRs appear on a VT100, refer to the
Getting Started (LIT-6892030) chapter in this manual.
B-4 N30 Supervisory Controller User’s Manual
Filtering
Filtering is done by each destination using the priority, category, and
message type of each SNR received. Two separate filters exist for each
destination: Filter A and Filter B. The filtering operation allows output
of SNRs based on a match on priority, category, and message type.
Active Filter Attribute

The Active Filter attribute can be set to any of the following:
• Filter A and B
• Filter A
• Filter B
• Pass All (no filtering, all SNRs output)
• Pass None (no SNRs output)
The user can change the filter values to control which SNRs a
destination receives based on time of day or an event (scheduling or
interlocking). For example, based on the time of day, SNRs can be
routed to certain destinations during normal hours and other
destinations during off-hours. Another example would be to change
what is routed to a destination based on some event happening in the
system.
Configuring Filter Destinations

Table B-1 shows priority, category, and message type for SNRs
created by the N30. This information can be helpful when configuring
the filter destinations in the VT100 and Printer objects.
Table B-1: Configuring Filter Destinations

SNR Type Priority Category Message Type
Device Online and Offline Serious Services System Alert
(N30 and N2 Devices)
Memory Overload Serious Services System Alert
CPU Overload Serious Services System Alert
Battery Status (Good or Bad) Serious Services System Alert
Update References Serious Services System Alert
Acknowledgement Status Services Operator Transaction
Analog and Multistate Alarms (User Defined) (User Defined) Alarm
(User Defined)
Object Interaction
Figure B-1 illustrates an example of the Message Router feature.
Table B-2 describes the objects and their role in the Message Router
feature.
3
Printer Objects
2 1
Alarm Objects Message Router
(Analog and Multisate) Object 4
VT100 Objects
MR Flow
Figure B-1: Message Router Example
Table B-2: Message Router Feature Objects

Number Object Role
1 Message Receives alarm messages and SNRs from Alarm objects, works with the
Router Report Server object to distribute the messages throughout the system.
Object
2 Alarm Generate alarm messages and SNRs that are routed by the Message Router
Objects object. For more information, refer to Working with Analog Alarm Objects
(LIT-6892260) and Working with Multistate Alarm Objects (LIT-6892270)
chapters in this document.
3 Printer Contain the filtering information to determine what alarm messages and
Objects SNRs they receive from the Message Router for printing. For more
information, refer to Working with Printer Objects (LIT-6892110) chapter in
this document.
4 VT100 Contain the filtering information to determine what alarm messages and
Objects SNRs they receive from the Message Router for viewing. For more
information, refer to Working with VT100 Objects (LIT-6892050) chapter in
this document.
N30 Supervisory Controller User’s Manual C-1
Appendix C
Building an Optimal Start

Application
Introduction
An Optimal Start application makes it possible for users to reduce
energy consumption by controlling the occupied/unoccupied mode of
the building. This document provides information to consider when
building a core Optimal Start application, including what objects are
involved and how attributes interact.

C-2 N30 Supervisory Controller User’s Manual
Key Concepts
Object Interaction
Different objects interact in a core Optimal Start application.
Figure C-1 illustrates a sample Optimal Start application. Table C-1
describes the objects and their role in an Optimal Start application.
5
Any Analog Attribute
(Zone Temperatue)
6
(Cooling Setpoint)
1 4
Any Binary Object
Optimal Start Object
7 (Warmup and Cooldown)

(Heating Setpoint)
2 3
Any Binary Object
Schedule Object
8 (Zone Occupancy)
(Optional)
(Outdoor Air
Temperature) OST Flow
Figure C-1: Optimal Start Application Example
Table C-1: Optimal Start Application Objects

Number Object Role
1 Optimal Start Receives data from temperature points, setpoints, and a schedule object to
determine optimal start and optimal stop times.
2 Schedule Provides start and stop times for the building zone.
3 Any Binary Refers to the any binary object (N2 Binary Output, Binary Value, etc.) that
Object commands a zone to occupied or unoccupied. It is commanded by the
Schedule object to occupied and by the Optimal Start to unoccupied if the
Maximum Prestop attribute is enabled.
4 Any Binary Refers to the object (N2 Binary Output, Binary Value, etc.) that commands a
Object zone to warm up or cool down. It is commanded by the Optimal Start object
at the optimal start time and released at the occupied time. It will not be
released if the Zone WC Mode Obj and the Zone Occ Mode Obj are the
same.
5-8 Any Analog Provides any analog attributes (via N2 Analog Output objects, Analog Value
Attribute objects, etc.) representing zone temperatures, cooling setpoints, and heating
setpoints that are referenced by the Optimal Start object for use in
calculations. If an Analog attribute reference is defined for the outside air
temperature, it aids in determining if the Optimal Start object should adapt
constants and deadtimes.
Building an Optimal Start application means that each object must
have its attributes configured to reference the appropriate objects in
order to achieve the desired results. Table C-2 lists the objects and
attributes involved and guidelines for data entry.
Table C-2: Key Components for an Optimal Start Application

Optimal Start Zone Schedule Enter the exact name of the Schedule object scheduling the valid
Object start and stop times for the Binary object controlling zone
occupancy.
Zone Occ Mode Enter the exact name of the Binary object controlling zone
Object occupancy.
Zone WC Mode Enter the exact name of the Binary object controlling zone warmup
Object and cooldown. This may be the same object as the Zone Occ
Mode object.
Cooling Setpoint Enter the exact object and analog attribute name representing the
cooling setpoint.
Heating Setpoint Enter the exact object and analog attribute name representing the
heating setpoint.
Zone Temperature Enter the exact object and attribute name representing the zone
temperature.
Outside Air Enter the exact name of the attribute of the Analog object
Temperature representing the outside air temperature.
Schedule List of Prop Refs Enter the name of the Binary object that controls zone occupancy.
Procedure Overview
Table C-3: Building an Optimal Start Application
Build an Optimal Start Add N2 Controller and point objects to the database. Add the Schedule
Application object scheduling the Binary objects controlling zone occupancy. Make
sure valid start and stop times are entered into the Schedule object. Add
the Optimal Start object referencing the above Schedule object, the
Binary objects designated as zone occupancy and warmup/cooldown, and
the analog attributes of objects designated as modes, temperatures, and
setpoints.
Detailed Procedures
Building an Optimal Start Application
To build an Optimal Start application:
1. Add N2 Controller and point objects to the database. See the
N30 Supervisory Controller Point Mapping Technical Bulletin
(LIT-6891400) and the Project Builder User’s Guide.
2. Add the Schedule object scheduling the Binary object controlling
zone occupancy. See the Working with Schedule Objects
(LIT-6892070) chapter in this manual or the Adding and Editing
Schedules (LIT-693235)chapter of the Project Builder User’s
Guide.
3. Make sure valid start and stop times are entered into the Schedule
object.
4. Add the Optimal Start object referencing the above Schedule
object, the Binary objects designated as zone occupancy and
warmup/cooldown, and the analog attributes of objects designated
as modes, temperatures, and setpoints. See the Working with
Optimal Start Objects (LIT-6892090) chapter in this manual. Or,
in Project Builder software, drag the Optimal Start collection from
the Devices and Collections folders in the Object Library into the
Energy Container of your N30 database. With the object selected
in the database, select Edit Object on the Edit menu to enter
M-View. In M-View, enter your references and attributes. You
can then download the new database to any N30 that should have
the same Optimal Start settings.
Troubleshooting
This section provides some solutions for problems in an Optimal Start
application.
Table C-4: Optimal Start Troubleshooting Problems and Solutions

Problem Solution
Present Value of the The Optimal Start object’s Present Value attribute may indicate Not Operational
Optimal Start Object because of errors in its connection status to other required objects.
Indicates To verify the Optimal Start object’s connection status to other required objects:
Not Operational
1. Verify that the required Schedule object, Binary objects, and Analog objects
are all defined and online.
2. Verify that the Binary object controlling zone occupancy is in the List of Prop
Refs for the Schedule object.
3. Verify that valid start and stop times for the current day are defined in the
Schedule object.
Optimal Start Object is To ensure the Optimal Start object is adapting constants and deadtimes:
Not Adapting 1. Verify that the Adaptation Enabled attribute indicates True.
Constants and
2. Verify that the value of the Zone Temperature attribute is not within the value
Deadtimes
of the Temperature Differential attribute (plus or minus one degree).
3. Verify that the value of the Outdoor Air Temperature attribute is within the
values of the Cooling Design Temperature and Heating Design Temperature
attributes.
N30 Supervisory Controller User’s Manual D-1
Appendix D
Building an Interlock Application
Introduction
An Interlock application makes it possible for users to have multiple
objects react to certain established, relational conditions based on data
from other objects. This document provides information to consider
when building a core Interlock application, including what objects are
involved and how attributes interact.

D-2 N30 Supervisory Controller User’s Manual
Key Concepts
Object Interaction
Different objects interact in a core Interlock application.
Figure D-1 illustrates an example of an Interlock application.
Table D-1 describes the objects and their role in an Interlock
application.
2 5
Source Object Action Table Object
3 1 6
Source Object Interlock Object Action Table Object
4 7
Source Object Action Table Object
INTL Flow
Figure D-1: Interlock Application Example
Table D-1: Interlock Application Objects

Number Object Role
1 Interlock References Source objects to obtain attribute data.
Object Uses attribute data in conjunction with the Logic attribute to determine
conditions.
Identifies Action Table objects that will receive commands based on the
conditions.
2-4 Source Provide attribute data that work with the Interlock object’s Logic attribute to
Objects determine conditions. A Source object can be any object. The number of
Source objects do not need to equal the number of Action Table objects.
5-7 Action Table Receive commands based on the conditions determined by the Interlock
Objects object. An Action Table object can be any object capable of accepting
commands.
Building an Interlock application means that each object must have its
attributes configured to reference the appropriate objects and attributes
in order to achieve the desired results. Table D-2 lists the objects and
attributes involved and guidelines for data entry.
Table D-2: Key Components for an Interlock Application

Interlock Object Source
Object Name Enter the exact name of the object with the desired attribute data.
Attribute Enter the exact name of the attribute containing the desired data.
Relation Choose how the Attribute data must relate to the Value.
Value Choose the condition if the values of the Attribute and Value meet
the established Relation. For example, if the value of the Attribute
is greater than the Value, this is considered True.
Differential If the value of the Source object’s attribute is analog, enter a
number that establishes a range over which the Attribute value
may vary without constituting a change in value. This number
determines at what point in the fluctuations of an analog value
(Attribute) does the Relation become no longer True or no longer
False. This prevents commands being sent based on changes in
the analog value that may be too small to warrant them.
Logic Choose how the conditions must be met. If multiple Source objects
are being referenced by the Interlock object, must all conditions
established for all of the Source objects be met or can just one of
the conditions be met in order for the command in the Action Table
to be sent to the Action Table objects.
Logic Equation If the Logic attribute is set to Complex, use the Logic Equation
attribute to define the relationship between the master conditions
using logic operators and parentheses for determining precedence.
Action Table - True
Object Name Enter the exact name of the object to receive the command based
on the condition being True. Objects do not need to be specified for
both the True and False Action Table.
Delay Enter the time each command waits to be sent after the source
values meet the True condition.
Command ID Choose the command to be sent to the object referenced in this
Action Table. The commands available to choose from are based
on the type of object being referenced in this Action Table and the
access capability of the user adding the Interlock object.
Parameters Based on the command chosen various parameters may appear
just as in any instance of commanding an object. Fill in the
appropriate information.
Action Table -
False
Object Name Enter the exact name of the object to receive the command based
on the condition being False. Objects do not need to be specified
for both the True and False Action Table.
Delay Enter the same information as explained in Action Table - True.
Command ID Enter the same information as explained in Action Table - True.
Parameters Enter the same information as explained in Action Table - True.
Example
Figures D-2 through D-5 show screens from a sample completed
Interlock object. This sample object uses the Logic Equation attribute.
Figure D-2: Completed Interlock Object - Focus Screen

Figure D-3: Completed Interlock Object - Edit Screen
Figure D-4: Completed Interlock Object - Source

Figure D-5: Completed Interlock Object - Action Table - True

Procedure Overview
Table D-3: Building an Interlock Application
Build an Interlock Application Consider what the Interlock object needs to do and determine which
objects need to be involved. Make sure all of the objects involved in the
Interlock application are added to the database. Verify/record the exact
object and attribute names involved. Add the Interlock object referencing
all of the required objects.
Detailed Procedures
Building an Interlock Application
To build an Interlock application:
1. Consider what the Interlock object needs to do and determine
which objects need to be involved.
2. Make sure all of the objects involved in the Interlock application
are added to the database. See the appropriate chapters in this
manual.
3. Verify/record the exact object and attribute names to be involved
in the Interlock application.
4. Add the Interlock object referencing all of the required objects.
See the Working with Interlock Objects (LIT-6892140) chapter in
this manual.
N30 Supervisory Controller User’s Manual E-1
Appendix E
Building a Signal Select

Application
Introduction
A Signal Select application makes it possible for users to process
values from multiple zones to adjust various setpoints. This document
provides information to consider when building a core Signal Select
application, including what objects are involved and how attributes
interact.

E-2 N30 Supervisory Controller User’s Manual
Key Concepts
Object Interaction
Different objects interact in a core Signal Select application. A Signal
Select application involves any analog or binary attributes. Separate
Signal Select objects should be created for analog versus binary data to
ensure accurate and uniform data is involved in the computations.
If analog and binary data combine in a Signal Select object, the Signal
Select data tries to convert the data.
Figure E-1 illustrates an example of an analog Signal Select
application. Figure E-2 illustrates an example of a binary Signal Select
application.
2 5
N2 Analog N2 Analog
Input Object Output Object
(Zone) (Setpoint)
3 1 6
N2 Analog N2 Analog
Signal Select Object
(Zone) (Setpoint)
4 7
N2 Analog N2 Analog
(Zone) (Setpoint)
SSA Flow
Figure E-1: Analog Signal Select Example

Table E-1 describes the objects shown in Figure E-1 and their role in
an analog Signal Select application.
Table E-1: Analog Signal Select Application Objects

Number Object Role
1 Signal Select References any object to obtain analog attribute data.
Object Computes average, logical OR, and logical AND input values based on this
data.
Identifies analog attributes of any object to be updated based on the data and
computation.
2-3 Analog Provide attribute data to the Signal Select object. For example, the zone
Objects temperatures of various rooms.
4-6 Analog Represent the analog objects and attributes that are updated by the Signal
Objects Select object based on computations derived from the attribute data it
receives.
2 5
N2 Binary N2 Binary
(Zone) (Setpoint)
3 1 6
N2 Binary N2 Binary
Signal Select Object
(Zone) (Setpoint)
4 7
N2 Binary N2 Binary
(Zone) (Setpoint)
SSB Flow
Figure E-2: Binary Signal Select Example

Table E-2 describes the objects shown in Figure E-2 and their role in a
binary Signal Select application.
Table E-2: Binary Signal Select Application Objects

Number Object Role
1 Signal Select References any object to obtain binary attribute data.
Object Computes average, logical OR, and logical AND input values based on this
data.
Identifies binary attributes of any object to be updated based on the data and
computation.
2-3 Binary Provide attribute data to the Signal Select object.
Objects
4-6 Binary Represent the binary objects and attributes that are updated by the Signal
Objects Select object based on computations derived from the attribute data it
receives.
Building a Signal Select application means that each object must have
its attributes configured to reference the appropriate objects in order to
achieve the desired results. Table E-3 lists the objects and attributes
involved and guidelines for data entry.
Table E-3: Key Components for a Signal Select Application

Signal Select Input List Enter the exact object and analog or binary attribute names used
Object (Analog or in the Signal Select computation.
Binary) Average Output Enter the exact object and analog or binary attribute names
being updated to reflect the Average Output computed.
High OR Enter the exact object and analog or binary attribute names
being updated to reflect the High or Logical OR Output
computed. The Point Type attribute determines which
computation occurs.
Low AND Enter the exact object and analog or binary attribute names
being updated to reflect the Low or Logical AND Output
computed. The Point Type attribute determines which
computation occurs.
Point Type Enter the point type involved in the Signal Select application:
Analog or Binary.
Procedure Overview
Table E-4: Building a Signal Select Application
Build a Signal Select Add N2 Controller and point objects to the database. Verify/record the
Application exact object and attribute names to be involved in the Signal Select
application. Add the Signal Select objects referencing the objects with the
desired analog or binary attributes.
Detailed Procedures
Building a Signal Select Application
To build a Signal Select application:
1. Add N2 Controller and point objects to the database. See the
N30 Supervisory Controller Point Mapping Technical Bulletin
(LIT-6891400).
2. Verify/record the exact object and attribute names to be involved
in the Signal Select application.
3. Add the Signal Select objects referencing the objects with the
desired analog or binary attributes. See the Working with Signal
Select Objects (LIT-6892150) chapter in this manual.
N30 Supervisory Controller User’s Manual F-1
Appendix F
Building a Notification Class

Alarm Routing Application
Introduction
Notification Class objects receive alarm messages and route them to
destinations such as printers and VT100s. They also handle routing
messages requiring acknowledgement to the Report Server object.
Using Notification Class objects to route alarms is one of two alarm
routing options. The Message Router feature can also be used to route
alarms. See Appendix B: Building a Message Router Application
(LIT-6892320) in this manual for information on routing alarms using
the Message Router object. Only one of these two methods can be
used on a site. If routing to third-party (non-Metasys) BACnet devices
is required, then Notification Class objects need to be used for alarm
routing.
This appendix describes aspects of the Notification Class feature,
including how Status Notification Reports are routed, how message
filtering is configured, and how the Notification Class object interacts
with other objects.
For further information about the objects described in this appendix,
see the Working with Notification Class Objects (LIT-6892290)
chapter in this document and the relevant object chapters in the Object
Dictionary. For information about generating N30 databases using
Project Builder, refer to the N30 Supervisory Controller Quick Start
Technical Bulletin (LIT-6891200).

F-2 N30 Supervisory Controller User’s Manual
Key Concepts
Routing SNRs
The SNRs are routed to the destinations defined in the Recipient List
of the Notification Class object. These destinations need to be
configured in every Notification Class object. When adding a new
destination, such as a printer, add it to the Recipient List of all
Notification Class objects from which SNRs are desired.
The Notification Class object determines if acknowledgement is
required. (Unlike the Message Router Feature, where the Alarm object
determines if acknowledgement is required). If acknowledgement is
required, the SNRs are also automatically routed to the Report Server
for delivery to VT100s. The Report Server and VT100 function as
described in Appendix B: Building a Message Router Application
(LIT-6892320) in this manual.
One Notification Class object can distributes SNRs from various
sources. The Notification Class object examines each SNR and routes
it to the appropriate destinations based on the types of SNRs each
destination is configured to receive.
For information about how SNRs appear on a VT100, refer to the
Getting Started (LIT-6892290) chapter in this manual.
Filtering
For filtering, configure the Recipient List in the Notification Class
object. Filter options include valid days, times and types of SNRs. See
the Working with Notification Class Objects (LIT-6892290) chapter in
this manual for details.
N30 Supervisory Controller User’s Manual F-3
Default Notification Class Objects

Each N30 contains three Notification Class objects by default
(Table F-1). The objects, which generate SNRs, default to these
Notification Class objects. However, additional Notification Class
objects can be created and used to perform advanced filtering and
routing.
Table F-1: Default Notification Class Objects

Default Notification Class object Associated SNR
Alarm Notification Analog and Multistate Alarms (User Defined)
N2 Online/Offline
Offline Notification N30 Online/Offline
System Notification Memory/CPU Overload
Operator Login/Logout
Battery Status
Update References
Acknowledgement
F-4 N30 Supervisory Controller User’s Manual
Object Interaction
Figure F-1 is an example of the Notification Class Alarm Routing
feature. Table F-2 describes the objects and their role in the
Notification Class Alarm Routing feature.
3
Printer Objects
2 1
Alarm Objects Notification Class
(Analog and Multisate) Object
4
VT100 Objects
BNC Flow
Figure F-1: Notification Class Alarm Routing Example
Table F-2: Notification Class Alarm Routing Objects

Number Object Role
1 Notification Receives alarm messages and SNRs from Alarm objects, works with the
Class Object Report Server object to distribute the messages throughout the system.
Specifies priority and if acknowledgement is required.
2 Alarm Generate alarm messages and SNRs that are routed by the configured
Objects Notification Class object. For more information, refer to Working with Analog
Alarm Objects (LIT-6892260) and Working with Multistate Alarm Objects
(LIT-6892270) chapters in this document.
3 Printer Defined as recipients of SNRs in Notification Class objects. For more
Objects information, refer to Working with Printer Objects (LIT-6892110) chapter in
this document.
4 VT100 Contain the filtering information to determine what alarm messages and
Objects SNRs they receive from the report Server for viewing. For more information,
refer to Working with VT100 Objects (LIT-6892050) chapter in this document.

N30 Supervisory Controller User&#39;s Manual 6892010

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

N30 Supervisory Controller User&#39;s Manual 6892010

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

N30 Supervisory Controller User’s Manual 1

N30 Supervisory Controller

Chapter 1 Using this Manual ............................................................. 1-1

Key Concepts............................................................................................... 1-2

Key Concepts............................................................................................... 2-2

Key Concepts............................................................................................... 3-3

© Johnson Controls, Inc. www.johnsoncontrols.com

Object Names ............................................................................................................ 3-4

Detailed Procedures .................................................................................. 3-14

Key Concepts............................................................................................... 4-2

Detailed Procedures .................................................................................. 4-13

Editing an Operator Object....................................................................................... 4-15

Key Concepts............................................................................................... 5-2

Detailed Procedures .................................................................................... 5-6

Key Concepts............................................................................................... 6-2

Detailed Procedures .................................................................................... 6-6

Key Concepts............................................................................................... 7-2

Time Changes ............................................................................................................ 7-6

Detailed Procedures .................................................................................... 7-9

Key Concepts............................................................................................... 8-2

Detailed Procedures .................................................................................... 8-7

Key Concepts............................................................................................... 9-2

Detailed Procedures .................................................................................. 9-10

Key Concepts............................................................................................. 10-2

Detailed Procedures .................................................................................. 10-5

Key Concepts............................................................................................. 11-2

Detailed Procedures .................................................................................. 11-7

Key Concepts............................................................................................. 12-2

Detailed Procedures .................................................................................. 12-5

Key Concepts............................................................................................. 13-2

Detailed Procedures .................................................................................. 13-4

Key Concepts............................................................................................. 14-2

Detailed Procedures .................................................................................. 14-9

Key Concepts............................................................................................. 15-2

Detailed Procedures .................................................................................. 15-6

Editing a Signal Select Object.................................................................................. 15-8

Key Concepts............................................................................................. 17-2

Detailed Procedures .................................................................................. 17-5

Key Concepts............................................................................................. 18-2

Detailed Procedures .................................................................................. 18-4

Key Concepts............................................................................................. 19-2

Releasing ................................................................................................................. 19-2

Detailed Procedures ................................................................................ 19-10

Key Concepts............................................................................................. 20-2

Detailed Procedures .................................................................................. 20-7

Key Concepts............................................................................................. 21-2

Detailed Procedures .................................................................................. 21-5

Key Concepts............................................................................................. 22-2

Detailed Procedures .................................................................................. 22-5

Key Concepts............................................................................................. 23-2

Detailed Procedures .................................................................................. 23-7

Key Concepts............................................................................................. 24-2

Detailed Procedures .................................................................................. 24-7

Chapter 25 Working with Runtime Totalization Objects ................. 25-1

Key Concepts............................................................................................. 25-2

Detailed Procedures .................................................................................. 25-7

Key Concepts............................................................................................. 26-2

Detailed Procedures .................................................................................. 26-7

Key Concepts............................................................................................. 27-2

Detailed Procedures .................................................................................. 27-6

Deleting a Multistate Alarm Object ......................................................................... 27-10

Key Concepts............................................................................................. 28-2

Detailed Procedures .................................................................................. 28-5

N30 Supervisory Controller User's Manual 6892010

N30 Supervisory Controller User's Manual 6892010